Riemann Surfaces Related Topics (AM-97), Volume 97: Proceedings of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference. (AM-97) 9781400881550

The description for this book, Riemann Surfaces Related Topics (AM-97), Volume 97: Proceedings of the 1978 Stony Brook C

125 109 22MB

English Pages 528 [532] Year 2016

Report DMCA / Copyright

DOWNLOAD PDF FILE

Table of contents :
CONTENTS
PREFACE
A GEOMETRIC PROPERTY OF BERS’ EMBEDDING OF THE TEICHMÜLLER SPACE
PLANE MODELS FOR RIEMANN SURFACES ADMITTING CERTAIN HALF-CANONICAL LINEAR SERIES, PART I
NONTRIVIALITY OF TEICHMÜLLER SPACE FOR KLEINIAN GROUP IN SPACE
THE ACTION OF THE MODULAR GROUP ON THE COMPLEX BOUNDARY
SOME REMARKS ON BOUNDED COHOMOLOGY
THE DYNAMICS OF 2-GENERATOR SUBGROUPS OF PSL (2, C)
MINIMAL GEODESICS ON FRICKE’S TORUS-COVERING
ON VARIATION OF PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES
VANISHING THETA CONSTANTS
ANALYTIC TORSION AND PRYM DIFFERENTIALS
ON A NOTION OF QUASICONFORMAL RIGIDITY FOR RIEMANN SURFACES
SPIRALS AND THE UNIVERSAL TEICHMÜLLER SPACE
INTERSECTION MATRICES FOR BASES ADAPTED TO AUTOMORPHISMS OF A COMPACT RIEMANN SURFACE
HOMOMORPHISMS OF TRIANGLE GROUPS INTO PSL (2, C)
HYPERBOLIC MANIFOLDS, GROUPS AND ACTIONS
AUTOMORPHISMS OF COMPACT RIEMANN SURFACES AND WEIERSTRASS POINTS
AFFINE AND PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES ON RIEMANN SURFACES
BOUNDARY STRUCTURE OF THE MODULAR GROUP
A REALIZATION PROBLEM IN THE THEORY OF ANALYTIC CURVES
THE MONODROMY OF PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES
HOLOMORPHIC FAMILIES OF RIEMANN SURFACES AND TEICHMÜLLER SPACES
COMMUTATORS IN SL(2, C)
TWO EXAMPLES OF COVERING SURFACES
DEFORMATIONS OF SYMMETRIC PRODUCTS
REMARKS ON PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES
SOME REMARKS ON KLEINIAN GROUPS
REMARKS ON WEB GROUPS
REMARKS ON FUCHSIAN GROUPS ASSOCIATED WITH OPEN RIEMANN SURFACES
ON GENERALIZED WEIERSTRASS POINTS AND RINGS WITH NO PRIME ELEMENTS
THE TOPOLOGY OF ANALYTIC SURFACES: DECOMPOSITIONS OF ELLIPTIC SURFACES
DENSE GEODESICS IN MODULI SPACE
AUTOMORPHISMEN EBENER DISKONTINUIERLICHER GRUPPEN
REMARKS ON THE GEOMETRY OF THE SIEGEL MODULAR GROUP
ON THE ERGODIC THEORY AT INFINITY OF AN ARBITRARY DISCRETE GROUP OF HYPERBOLIC MOTIONS
ON INFINITE NIELSEN KERNELS
HYPERBOLIC 3-MANIFOLDS WHICH SHARE A FUNDAMENTAL POLYHEDRON
THE LENGTH SPECTRUM AS MODULI FOR COMPACT RIEMANN SURFACES
Recommend Papers

Riemann Surfaces Related Topics (AM-97), Volume 97: Proceedings of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference. (AM-97)
 9781400881550

  • 0 0 0
  • Like this paper and download? You can publish your own PDF file online for free in a few minutes! Sign Up
File loading please wait...
Citation preview

Annals of Mathematics Studies Number 97

RIEMANN SURF ACES AND RELATED TOPICS: PROCEEDINGS OF THE 1978 STONY BROOK CONFERENCE EDITED BY

IRWIN KRA AND

BERNARD MASKIT

PRINCETON UNIVERSITY PRESS AND

UNIVERSITY OF TOKYO PRESS PRINCETON, NEW JERSEY 1981

Copyright © 1981 by Princeton University Press All articles in this collection are © 1981 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

Published in Japan exclusively by University of Tokyo Press; In other parts of the world by Princeton University Press

Printed in the United States of America by Princeton University Press, Princeton, New Jersey

Library of Congress Cataloging in Publication data will be found on the last printed page of this book

CONTENTS PREFACE

~

A GEOMETRIC PROPERTY OF BERS' EMBEDDING OF THE TEICHMULLER SPACE by William Abikoff

3

PLANE MODELS FOR RIEMANN SURF ACES ADMITTING CERTAIN HALF-CANONICAL LINEAR SERIES, PART I by Robert D. M. Accola

7

NONTRIVIALITY OF TEICHM'OLLER SPACE FOR KLEINIAN GROUP IN SPACE by B. N. Apanasov

21

THE ACTION OF THE MODULAR GROUP ON THE COMPLEX BOUNDARY by Lipman Bers

33

SOME REMARKS ON BOUNDED COHOMOLOGY by Robert Brooks THE DYNAMICS OF 2-GENERATOR SUBGROUPS OF PSL(2,C) by Robert Brooks and J. Peter Matelski

53

65

MINIMAL GEODESICS ON FRICKE'S TORUS-COVERING by Harvey Cohn

73

ON VARIATION OF PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES by Clifford J. Earle

87

VANISHING THETA CONSTANTS by Hershel M. Farkas

101

ANALYTIC TORSION AND PRYM DIFFERENTIALS by John Fay

107

ON A NOTION OF QUASICONFORMAL RIGIDITY FOR RIEMANN SURF ACES by Frederick P. Gardiner SPIRALS AND THE UNIVERSAL TEICHMULLER SPACE by F. W. Gehring INTERSECTION MATRICES FOR BASES ADAPTED TO AUTOMORPHISMS OF A COMPACT RIEMANN SURFACE by Jane Gilman and David Patterson v

123

145

149

vi

CONTENTS

HOMOMORPHISMS OF TRIANGLE GROUPS INTO PSL (2, C) by Leon Greenberg HYPERBOLIC MANIFOLDS, GROUPS AND ACTIONS by M. Gromov

167 183

AUTOMORPHISMS OF COMPACT RIEMANN SURFACES AND WEIERSTRASS POINTS by Ignacio Guerrero

215

AFFINE AND PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES ON RIEMANN SURF ACES by R. C. Gunning

225

BOUNDARY STRUCTURE OF THE MODULAR GROUP by W. J. Harvey A REALIZATION PROBLEM IN THE THEORY OF ANALYTIC CURVES by Maurice Heins THE MONODROMY OF PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES by John H. Hubbard HOLOMORPHIC FAMILIES OF RIEMANN SURFACES AND TEICHMOLLER SPACES by Yoichi lmayoshi

245

253 257

277

COMMUTATORS IN SL(2, C) by Troels J0rgensen

301

TWO EXAMPLES OF COVERING SURF ACES by T. J0rgensen, A. Marden and Ch. Pommerenke

305

DEFORMATIONS OF SYMMETRIC PRODUCTS by George R. Kempf

319

REMARKS ON PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES by Irwin Kra and Bernard Maskit

343

SOME REMARKS ON KLEINIAN GROUPS by S. L. Krushkal

361

REMARKS ON WEB GROUPS by Tadashi Kuroda, Seiki Mori and Hidenori Takahashi

367

REMARKS ON FUCHSIAN GROUPS ASSOCIATED WITH OPEN RIEMANN SURF ACES by Yukio Kusunoki and Masahiko Taniguchi

377

ON GENERALIZED WEIERSTRASS POINTS AND RINGS WITH NO PRIME ELEMENTS by Henry Laufer

391

THE TOPOLOGY OF ANALYTIC SURF ACES: DECOMPOSITIONS OF ELLIPTIC SURF ACES by Richard Mandelbaum

403

CONTENTS

DENSE GEODESICS IN MODULI SPACE by Howard Masur

vii

417

AUTOMORPHISMEN EBENER DISKONTINUIERLICHER GRUPPEN by Gerhard Rosenberger

439

REMARKS ON THE GEOMETRY OF THE SIEGEL MODULAR GROUP by Robert J. Sibner

457

ON THE ERGODIC THEORY AT INFINITY OF AN ARBITRARY DISCRETE GROUP OF HYPERBOLIC MOTIONS by Dennis Sullivan

465

ON INFINITE NIELSEN KERNELS by Judith C. Wason

497

HYPERBOLIC 3-MANIFOLDS WHICH SHARE A FUNDAMENTAL POLYHEDRON by Norbert J. Wielenberg

505

THE LENGTH SPECTRUM AS MODULI FOR COMPACT RIEMANN SURF ACES by Scott Wolpert

515

PREFACE This volume contains papers and abstracts by participants of the Conference on Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics, which was held at the State University of New York at Stony Brook, June S-9, 1978. This was the fourth in a series of conferences on more or less the same subject (Tulane 1965, Stony Brook 1969, Maryland 1973). We invited papers from all the Conference participants, with acceptance for publication subject to refereeing. All the manuscripts were indeed refereed by participants, and not all were accepted. As usual, thanks are due to the National Science Foundation for financial support, the State University of New York at Stony Brook for its hospitality, and Princeton University Press for providing a series where these Proceedings could be published (volumes 66 and 79 contain the Proceedings of the previous two Conferences). Most of all we thank the participants in the Conference who wrote these papers and who refereed them, who gave invited lectures and seminar talks, and who talked mathematics and created the atmosphere of excitement that made our publishing effort worthwhile. We were particularly pleased by the appearance (both at the Conference and in these Proceedings) of many new (both young and old) faces. Mathematicians from many diverse fields are now interested in Riemann Surfaces and Kleinian groups. We are delighted that the old classical theory of functions of one complex variable still shows so many signs of vitality. I. Kra

B. Maskit

MAY 1979

ix

Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics

A GEOMETRIC PROPERTY. OF BERS' EMBEDDING OF THE TEICHMULLER SPACE William Abikoff In this short note we prove a geometric property of the Bers embedding of the Teichmi.iller space. To fix the notation, let G be a finitely generated Fuchsian group of the first kind acting in the unit disc L'l . The Bers embedding of T(G)

=

T(l'l/G) represents T(G) in the space B of bound-

ed quadratic differentials ch for G in the exterior E of L'l. In the usual way we associate to each ch

f

B, the normalized solution DO

of the Schwarz ian differential equation

l frh, z!

=

ch. It is important to

note that frh, hence bn(rh) is a holomorphic function on B. Set Grh frh Gfrh-

1

and let i: T(G) .... B be the Bers embedding. If ch ET

=

=

i(T(G))

then frh is schlicht and Grh is a b-group. Let A(Grh) denote the limit set of Grh and m(c/J) be the area of A(Grh). We prove the following THEOREM. If c/J

E

ai(T(G))

and m(c/J)

=

0, then c/J

E

a Ext i(T(G)).

Proof. The tripartite classification of b-g;roups shows that if ch (a i(T(G))

then Grh is either totally degenerate or has accidental parabolic transformations. The two cases must be handled separately.

© 1980 Princeton University Press Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics Proceedin~s of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference 0-691-08264-2/80/000003-03$00.50/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000003-03$00.50/1 (paperback) For copying information, see copyright page 3

4

WILLIAM ABIKOFF

If Grh has accidental parabolic transformations, then there is some y rh

f

Grh so that r( rh) = tr 2 y rh = 4 , but r( rh) is a non constant holomor-

phic function on B . Thus near rh, r takes on all values sufficiently close to 4 . It follows that there are groups Gt/J arbitrarily close to Grh which have elliptic elements of infinite order. Such groups are not Kleinian and 1/J

I

ai(T(G)).

We proceed to the case where Grh is totally degenerate. Set

A : B .... [-oo, 11]

Since bn(t/J) is holomorphic on B, A is plurisuperharmonic. Further, Gronwall's Area Theorem says that if ft/J is schlicht then A(t/J) is the area of C \ft/J(E). Assume Grh

f

satisfies A(fb) ;::: (2rr)- 1

Int i(T(G)). Then any holomorphic map

J

A(h(eiO))dO 2: 0.

a/1 But we may choose a holomorphic disc h(/1) with center rh and intersecting i(T(G)) along a nontrivial boundary arc and such that h(/1) C i(T(G)). It follows from the above inequality that A(fb)

> 0. But for totally degen-

erate groups, A(fb) = m(ci>) and we have assumed m(ci>) = 0. We have the desired contradiction. SOME REMARKS

1) The theorem is a finite dimensional version of Gehring's theorem that the universal Teichmilller space is the interior of the Schwarzians of schlicht functions.

5

BERS EMBEDDING OF THE TEICHMULLER SPACE

2) At this conference, Thurston announced a proof that m()

=

0, for all

boundary groups of the Teichmiiller space. This result eliminates the need for our main hypothesis. 3) The second part of the proof may be repeated verbatim to prove the following statement. Given any holomorphic mapping of the punctured disc into Teichmiiller space (or equivalently, a holomorphic family of finite Riemann surfaces over the unit disc), then the puncture (or central fiber) cannot be filled in by a totally degenerate group whose limit set has zero area.

UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS AT URBANA-CHAMPAIGN

PLANE MODELS FOR RIEMANN SURF ACES ADMITTING CERTAIN HALF-CANONICAL LINEAR SERIES, PART I* Robert D. M. Accola**

1. Introduction Let Wp be a Riemann surface of genus p . In considering vanishing properties of the theta-function at half periods of the Jacobian associated with Wp, one is led naturally, via Riemann's vanishing theorem, to halfcanonical linear series on Wp, that is, to linear series whose doubles are canonical. A theorem of Castelnuovo assures us that a half-canonical grp_ 1

must be composite if p < 3r, and this leads directly to the exis-

tence of automorphism of period two on Wp [2, Part III]. In this paper we are concerned with surfaces where p = 3r and Wp admits a simple grp_ 1 (which must necessarily be half-canonical). We show that such surfaces exist for all r and we investigate the consequences. By another theorem of Castelnuovo it follows that, except for r

=

5, the existence of a simple

on W3 r insures the existence of a g 1 4 without fixed points. This in turn implies that such a Riemann surface has a plane model where the

grp_ 1

half-canonical gr 3 r_ 1 is easily seen. From these models one easjly calculates the dimension of such Riemann surfaces in Teichmtiller space. The methods developed here also allow us to characterize, for such surfaces, when the divisors of the g 1 4 are the orbits of an automorphism group which is non-cyclic of order four. *The author wishes to express his thanks to Dr. Joseph Harris for valuable discussions concerning the material of this paper. ** Research supported by the National Science Foundation

©

1980 Princeton University Press Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics Proceedings of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference 0-691-08264-2/80/000007-14$00.70/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000007-14$00.70/1 (paperback) For copying information, see copyright page

7

8

ROBERT D. M. ACCOLA

It turns out that these methods also apply to w3r+2 's admitting two

simple half-canonical gr 3r+l 's and to w3r+3's admitting four simple half-canonical gr 3r+ 2 's whose sum is bicanonical. We shall consider these cases in Part II of this paper.

2.

Notation, definitions, and preliminary results

A compact Riemann surface of genus p will be denoted WP. A linear series on WP of dimension r and degree n will be denoted grn. Such a series may have fixed points, may be simple or composite, and may be complete or incomplete. For x < WP, grn - x will denote the linear series of degree n -1 of divisors of grn passing through x, not counting x. If x is not a fixed point of grn, then grn- x

=

gr- 1n_ 1 .

For the convenience of the reader we include the following definitions

[6, p. 257]. A linear series g~* will be defined to be simple if for a general choice of x, grn - x is without fixed points. In this situation it is known that for a general choice of x, grn - x will also be simple. A linear series g~* will be defined to be composite if for any choice of x, grn -

X

has fixed points. In this latter situation wp is a t-sheeted cover-

ing of a surface of genus q, Wq, and a divisor of non-fixed points of grn is a union of the fibers of the map rb: WP -. Wq. In such a case Wq admits a g\n-f)/t where f is the degree of the divisor of fixed points of grn, and for x not fixed for grn , grn - x has t- 1 addi tiona! fixed points, the other points in the fiber of rb containing x . If grn is complete on wp' then so is gr(n-f);t on wq.

If grn is a linear series, a second series gsm is said to impose (linear) conditions on grn if there is a linear series gr-~-m so that g rn

=

s

g m+ g

r-t n-m ·

This means that if D is any divisor of gsm of m distinct points, then there are t points of D, x 1 , x 2 , ···, xt so that grn - (x 1 + x 2 + · · · + xt) *Without fixed points.

gr-tn-m + D - (x 1 + · · · + x t )

PLANE MODELS FOR RIEMANN SURFACES

9

has D - (x 1 + ··· + xt) among its fixed points. Also x 1 , x 2 , · · ·, xt impose independent conditions; that is, for each k there is a divisor in grn containing all the xi, i=1,2,···,k-1, k+1,···,t, butnotcontaining xk. If g 1m imposes one condition on g~, then grn = rg 1m + Dn-rm where Dn-rm is the divisor of fixed points of the composite grn; for whenever a divisor of grn contains a point x, it must contain all of the unique divisor of g 1m containing x. We will use the classical fact that since a g 1n (n :S p) without fixed points imposes n-1 conditions on the canonical series, it imposes at most n-1 conditions on any special linear series. The extension of this is that a simple special gSm without fixed points will impose at most m- s conditions on any other special linear series whose dimension is at least m-s. If grn is simple (r~2) and without fixed points, then wp can be realized as a curve in pr and the hyperplane sections cut out the divisors of grn. In such cases we will say that grn has a k-fold singularity if the curve in pr does. In case g~ is simple and without fixed points, WP admits a plane model of degree n. If d represents the number of double points suitably counted, then p

(n-1) (n-2) _ d

2

.

To compute the dimension R of all plane curves of degree n with s given ordinary singularities of multiplicities k 1 , k 2 , · ··, ks, we use the formula

R >

Often, this formula is precise. A singularity of multiplicity k will be called a k-fold point of the curve or linear series. A surface will be called q-hyperelliptic (q;:::O) if it is a two-sheeted cover of a surface of genus q' :S q. Thus rational and elliptic surfaces are q-hyperelliptic for all q.

10

ROBERT D. M. ACCOLA A divisor Dp_ 1 of degree p-1 on Wp will be called half-canonical

if 2DP_ 1 is canonical. We now discuss the preliminary results upon which the later sections of this paper depend. THEOREM 2.1 (Castelnuovo's Theorem [5) or [6, p. 295)). Let Wp admit

a simple g~ . Then p


[m/2]. Then m-t

wq and a gs(m-f)/t on wq which lifts to the non-fixed points of

gsm. Also g\ is lifted from Wq and we see that t = 2 or 4. If t = 4 then q = 0 and g\ imposes one condition on gsm. Consequently gsm=sg\+Df and m=4s+f. acontradiction. Suppose t=2. If

13

PLANE MODELS FOR RIEMANN SURFACES gs(m-f)/ 2 is special on Wq then by Clifford's theorem we have (m-f )/2 ~ 2s , a contradiction. If gs(m-f)/ 2 is not special then (m-f)/2- s ?:: q . But by Lemma 2. 6 q > r and by hypothesis r ~ s , so we arrive at the final contradiction (m-f)/2-s?:: s. q.e.d.

LEMMA 2.8. Suppose g\ and h 04 are complete linear series and g 14 is without fixed points. Suppose that 2g\ = g 28 is also complete. Sup-

pose finally that 2h 04 = 2g\. Then there are disjoint integral divisors ofdegreetwo, P and Q, sothat h 04 =P+Q and I2PI=I2QI=g\. Proof. Let h 04 =x 1 +x 2 +x 3 +x 4 and 2(x 1 +x 2 +x 3 +x 4 )=0 1 +0 2 , where I0 1 1 = 10 2 1 = g\ and 0 1 and 0 2 are disjoint. Now the result follows by examining the various possibilities for 0 1 and 0 2 . q.e.d. We conclude this section with some results on W3r's admitting r

g3r-1 ' s · LEMMA 2. 9. Suppose w3r admits a simple gr3r-1 . Then gr3r-1

IS

com-

plete, without fixed points, and half-canonical. Proof. That gr3r-l is complete and without fixed points follows from Castelnuovo's inequality since the inequality is now an equality. Also 2gr3 r-l = gR2 p_ 2 where R ?:: 3r -1 = p -1 . By the Riemann-Roch theorem R = p -1 and so 2gr3r-l is canonical. q.e.d. LEMMA 2.10. On W3r a simple gr3r-l is unique.

Proof. If hr3 r-l is a second half-canonical series then gr3 r-l imposes at most r conditions on hr3 r-l by Theorem 2.5. Consequently each divisor of gr3r-l is contained in a divisor of hr3r-l. It follows that gr3r-1

=

hr3r-1 · q.e.d.

LEMMA 2.11. If w3r (r?::2) admits a unique complete gr3r-l must be simple.

then gr3r-l

Proof. Suppose gr3r-l is composite. The only way that this can happen is for W3 r to be a two-sheeted cover of a surface of genus q and on Wq

14

ROBERT D. M. ACCOLA

there is a complete gr( 3r-l-f)/ 2 where f is the degree of the divisor of fixed points of gr3r-l. If gr( 3 r-l-f)/ 2 is special then by Clifford's theorem we have the contradiction (3r-1-f )/2- 2r > 0. This series is not special and so q

=

(r-1-f)/2. By [2, p. 51] it follows that the

q-hyperelliptic surface w3r admits at least 4q composite half-canonical gr3r-l 's. If q is zero the result also follows. q.e.d. THEOREM 2.12. W3r admits a simple gr3r-l if and only if gr3r-l IS unique. Consequently, W3r admits a simple gr3r-l if and only if the

theta-function for W3 r vanishes at precisely one half-period to order r + 1. The second statement of the theorem is just a translation of the first statement into the language of vanishing properties of the theta-function via Riemann's vanishing theorem.

3.

The plane models

LEMMA 3.1. Suppose W3r (r2:4) admits a simple gr3r-l and a g 1m

which imposes two linear conditions on gr3r-l . Then m Proof. If

X f

w3r' then gr3r-1 -

X

=

4.

has a singularity of multiplicity m -1 '

namely the other points in the divisor of g 1m containing x; for if y is one of these m- 1 points then (gr3r_ 1-x)- y has the remaining m- 2 points as fixed points. Now choose a divisor Dr_ 2 = x 1 +x 2 + .. ·+xr_ 2 of r-2 points in r- 2 distinct divisors of g 1m. Also assume that gr3r-l- Dr_ 2 (= g 22 r+l) is simple and without fixed points. g 22 r+l has r- 2 singularities of multiplicity m -1 corresponding to the r- 2 divisors of g 1m determined by Dr_ 2 . Also g 1m imposes two conditions on g 22 r+l, so g 22 r+l has a singularity of multiplicity 2r + 1-m. If Dr_ 2 is chosen in a general manner all these singularities are disjoint and so contribute (r-2)(m-1) (m-2)/2 + (2r+l-m)(2r-m)/2 to the double points of the plane curve determined by g 22 r+l. Consequently p

=

3r

=

(2r)(2r-l)/2- (r-2)(m-l)(m-2)/2(2r+l-m)(2r-m)/2- d'

PLANE MODELS FOR RIEMANN SURF ACES

15

where d' is the contributions of the other double points of the curve. Thus 2d'= -m 2(r-1) + m(7r-5) -12r + 4 = -(m-4)((r-1)m-(3r-1)). If m ;:: 5 we see that the right-hand side of this equation is negative which is a contradiction. Thus m = 4 and d' = 0. q.e.d. THEOREM 3.2. Let W3r be a Riemann surface of genus 3r(r;::4, r;t5)

admitting a simple gr3r-l . Then W3r admits a plane model as a curve of degree 2r + 1 with r - 2 singularities of multiplicity 3 and one singularity of multiplicity 2r - 3. Denote the plane curve of the theorem t' 2r+l . Now suppose that the r -1 singularities of t' 2r+ 1 are in general

position; that is' no ( e+ 1)( e+ 2)/2 of them lie on a curve of degree

e.

(This situation is to be expected, in general, but there are examples where it is not the case.) We can simplify the model by successive quadratic transformations. First transform with the (2r-3)-fold point and two triple points as fundamental points. Such a transformation transforms t' 2Hl into a curve of degree 2r-1, t' 2 r-l, with r-4 triple points and one (2r-5)-fold point. Second transform t' 2r-l with the (2r-5)-fold point and two trip~e points as fundamental points to obtain a e2r-3 with a (2r-7)-fold point and r-6 triple points. Continue.

If r is even, (r-2)/2 such transformations yield a curve of degree r + 3 , t'r+ 3 , with a single singularity of degree r -1 . The gr3r-l is cut out by curves of degree r/2 with a ((r-2)/2)-fold singularity at the (r-1)-fold singularity of t'r+ 3 .

If r is odd, (r-3)/2 such transformations yield a er+4 with a 3-fold singularity and a r-fold singularity. gr3r-l is cut out by curves of degree (r+1)/2 with a ((r-1)/2)-fold singularity at the r-fold singularity of t'H 4 and also passing through the triple point. It is worth remarking that in this case of r odd, these curves are the examples of Riemann surfaces for which equality is attained in the following classical inequality: p

fgf- 1

=

© 1980 Princeton University Press Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics Proceedings of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference 0-691-08264-2/80/000021-11$00.55/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000021-11 $00.55/1 (paperback) For copying information, see copyright page

21

g', where

22

B.N.APANASOV

f: Bn .... Bn is a quasiconformal automorphism of the ball, can be represented in the form g r-. AgA - 1 = g', where A { 9Hn , A(Bn) = Bn. In the planer case (n=2) the described situation does not occur. Moreover, it is well known that the set of all quasiconformal automorphisms of the disk B 2 compatible with a Fuchsian group G (identifying the conformally equivalent ones) forms the Teichmiiller space of the group G and has complex dimension 3p- 3 + m , where p is the genus of the surface B 2 /G , and m is the number of punctures of B 2 /G. As it may seem, after Mostow's result, that for n 2: 3 the Teichmiiller space of the Fuchs ian group G, V(Bn /G) < oo, degenerates into a point. However, our main result can be formulated in the following form. THEOREM A.

For any Fuchsian group G in Rn, n 2: 2 with compact

fundamental polyhedron Bn/G such that one side is orthogonal to all other sides that it meets there exists a homeomorphism

of the open m-dimensional cube, m 2: 1 , into Teichmiiller space for the group G.

We also enlist here some applications of this result connected with spatial quasiconformal mappings and Mostow's rigidity theorem to prove the following statement. THEOREM B.

The boundary of Teichmiiller space T(G) for the Fuchsian

group G C 9.}1 3 (where G is the same as in Theorem A), contains the Kleinian groups

r

with the following properties:

1) f(r) is connected;

2)

ncn = no u n1 '

where

no

and

n1

are the connectivity

components; 3)

4)

reno)= no' rcn1) I= n1; no is a quasiconformal image of the ball;

5) the fundamental group rr 1(n 1 ) is a free infinitely-generated group.

23

NONTRIVIALITY OF TEICHMULLER SPACE

This theorem shows once more the essential difference between the spatial case and the planar one (cf. [1]).

2. Notation and terminology For x

f

Rn we use the representation x

=

l xiei

=

(x 1 , .. ·, xn) where

e 1 , ... , en is an orthogonal basis. By Bn(x, r) we denote the open ball with center B 3 (x,

X (

r), S(x, r)

Rn and radius r > 0' sn-l(x, r) = aBn(x, r)' B(x, r) = =

S 2 (x, r), Hn

=

lx ( Rn: xn > O!. The hyperbolic measure

of a set M in Bn or in Hn is denoted by V(M). The closure M, the boundary aM of sets M C Rn will always be in Rn . A Mobius group G C 9Rn is said to be discrete if no sequence of distinct elements of G converges (pointwise) to 1 , or, equivalently, to any A f 9Rn . The limit set of the g~oup G C 9Rn is denoted by ~(G) and consists of the points of accumulation of the sets G(y) Its complement 11(G)

=

=

{g(y): g(Gl, y ( Rn.

(2.1)

Rn\~(G) is called the discontinuity set. The

group G is Kleinian if 11(G) -/. (2). In this case one can define the socalled fundamental domain F(G) which contains a representative from each orbit G(y) (2.1). The Kleinian group G C 9Rn is called quasifuchs ian if the Jordan surface ~(G) breaks 11(G) into two connected and simply connected components. A quasiconformal automorphism f of the space Rn is compatlble with the Kleinian group G ( f is a quasiconformal deformation of the. group G), if

(2.2) Two quasiconformal deformations f and f 1 of the group G are equivalent if there exists A f 9Rn such that the equalities:

hold. We factor the set of quasiconformal deformations of G with respect

24

B. N.APANASOV

to this equivalence relation to obtain the space of quasiconformal deformations of the Kleinian group G. The space T(G) of all the quasiconformal images of the group G (with the analogous equivalence relation) is naturally associated with it. The convergence of the group can be defined via the coefficients of their matrix representations in the Lorentz group [3]. The topology thus introduced is equivalent to the one determined by the usual TeichmUller metric [8, 12] -the dilatation logarithm of the quasiconformal automorphism f.

3.

Preliminary results The following statement is obtained from the well-known results [2] on

the groups generated by reflections in hyperbolic space. LEMMA 3.1. Let the group G C Wln be generated by a finite number of

involutions Ti = :fi o()i, where :fi is inversion with respect to the sphere sn- 1 (xi, ri), x~ = 0, and ()i is reflection with respect to the hyperplane Li which passes through the point xi, is orthogonal to the subspace Rn- 1 and is the plane of symmetry of the polyhedron P(G)CHn bounded by the spheres sn- 1 (xi, ri) and, perhaps, by the plane lx: xn=Ol = Rn- 1 .

Then G is discrete iff all the dihedral angles of the polyhedron P(G) are integral parts of rr. 3.2. Under the extension of the group G C Wln into the half-space Hn+l we understand the following. Each element g ( G is the superposition of reflections with respect to lower-dimensional planes Li C Rn and, perhaps, inversion with respect to some sphere sn-l(xg, rg) [4]. Consider n-planes Li the mappings

c

Rn+l' Li

g ( Wln+l

Rn' Lin Rn = Li' the spheres sn(xg, rg) and which are superpositions of reflections with re-

spect to Li and, perhaps, of inversions with respect to Sn(xg, rg). We obtain the group

GC Wln+l

which leaves the half-space Hn+l invariant

and the restriction of which to the subspace Rn coincides with the group G.

25

NONTRIVIALITY OF TEICHMULLER SPACE

-

If now the group G is discrete, then its extension G acts discontinuously in Hn+ 1 and the interior of the intersection int (P n Rn) = F(G) where PC Hn+l is some hyperbolically convex fundamental polyhedron

G is

of the group

(in case F(G) f Q)) the fundamental domain of the

group G. LEMMA 3.3.

Let G C 9J(n be a Kleinian group and F0 be the component

of its fundamental domain which contains a point x 0 . If for every generator A of the group G, the points x 0 and A(x 0 ) can be connected by a curve lying in rl(G), then the component 0 0

")

F0 of the discontinuity

set Q(G) is invariant. The proof of this lemma is simple and can be done in analogy with the planar case [1, 15].

4.

Proofs of Theorems A and B Though our method is independent of the space dimension we, for

simplicity, show it in the case n

=

3 , and by the example of a definite

Fuchsian group. It will be clear from the proof how to modify it in the general case. 4.1. Let Q

=

lx fR 3 : lxil C ~l be the unit cube. Circumscribe the

spheres Si , 1

:S i :S 8, of radius v3/3 from its vertices. They intersect

at the angles rr/3, and are orthogonal to the sphere S 0 Construct six more spheres Si, 9 ::; i

where r = 5/6,

p

=

S(O, v15/6).

:S 14:

= Jl0/6.

Denote as Li, 1

:=:;

i

:=:;

8, the planes passing through the points 0,

e 3 and the center of the sphere Si. Further, put

26

B. N. APANASOV

Consider the group G C 9R3 generated by the involutions Ai,

1 ::; i ::; 14, each of them being the superposition of inversion with respect to the sphere Si and of reflection with respect to the plane Li. The group G leaves the ball B(O, v15/6) invariant. It follows from Lemma

3.1 that G is a Fuchsian group of the first kind with the compact fundamental domain. Consider also the system of spheres lajCt)! 1 ::;i94 , which is obtained from the system lsi! by the substitution of the spheres sl3 and S 14 (with the centers ±~e 3 ) for the spheres a 1 it) and a 14 (t) with the centers ± t · e 3 and orthogonal to the corresponding spheres ajCt)

=

Si , 1 ::; i ::; 12 (and, consequently, having radii Jt 2 - t + 5/12 ).

The group G(t) C 9R 3 , t 0

=

5/12 < t < t 1

=

5(1 + ,/5/6) generated by

the involutions A1 which correspond to the spheres ai(t), 1 ::; i ::; 14, is a Kleinian one. It directly follows from consideration of the extended (see

3.2) group G(t) and from an application of Lemma 3.1. Hence, we obtain that the fundamental domain of the group G(t) has the form: Ft

n

=

(4.4)

ext ai(t)

l:S:i:S:l4

and decomposes into two components-the bounded one F~ and the unbounded one F{. The set of discontinuity components Q 0 and

n1 ,

n=

D(G(t)) decomposes into two invariant

both homeomorphic to a ball. This follows

from Lemma 3.3 and properties of Ft (see [6]).

4.5. Let F 0 and F 1 denote the polyhedra F~ and F{ with t

=

5/6

(that corresponds to Fuchs ian G). Using the uniform expansions along two families of circles, orthogonal to the spheres a 13 (t) and a 1 it) correspondingly, one can construct q(t)-quasiconformal mappings

(4.6) that map the sides of Ft onto the corresponding sides of F;, i

=

0,1.

27

NONTRIVIALITY OF TEICHMULLER SPACE

Here, q(t) is continuous and lim

t-> 5/6

q(t)

1 .

Using well-known facts concerning quasiconformal mappings ([9], [13], [14]), we can extend ff and

f:

periodically until we obtain the

mappings

(4.8) which, being compatible with G, will be equal to a restriction of a q(t)-quasiconformal deformation t of the Fuchsian group G. It follows from the properties of s::'(G) and s::'(G(t)) that for each t', t", t 0 < t' < t"' < t 1 , deformations t' and t" are not conjugate in the group

wen.

< E we can conjugate them with

Nevertheless, when lt'-t"l

the help of a a(e)-quasiconformal deformation which we can construct in the same way as above. Here we also have lim a(E)

E->0

=

1 .

Thus, the mapping

is a homeomorphic imbedding of the interval (t 0 , t 1 ) into the space T(G). Theorem A is proved. 4. 9. Our proof of Theorem B will be reduced to the clearing up of the structure of the groups G(t) (constructed in Section 4.4) for the parameter values t = t 0 = 5/12 and t = t 1 = 5(1 + ,/5/6). We consider the case of the group G(t 1 ). In case t

=

t 0 the situation is analogous and even

slightly simpler. First we note that the group G(t 1 ) is Kleinian. Its fundamental polyt

t

hedron has two components-the bounded F 0 1 and the unbounded F 1 1 . t

The polyhedron F 0 1 , like all FJ, t 0 < t < t 1 , is connected and simply

28

B.N.APANASOV

connected. At the same time the fundamental group

t

17 1 (F1 1 )

is a free

group on eight generators. It becomes clear if we note that the spheres a 1 it 1 ) and a 1 it 1 ) touch the corresponding spheres ai(t 1 ) = Si, i

=

9, .. ·, 12, where the points of contact pi, qi, 9

the spheres Sj, 1

:S i :S 12 lie outside

:S j :S 8, are the unique fixed points of some mappings

of parabolic type 1 and form five cycles. This gives us the direct calculation. The application of Lemma 3.3 gives us the discontinuity set of the tl tl group G(t 1 ) falling into two components D0 (t 1 ) :) F0 and D 1 (t 1 ) J F 1 which are invariant. At the same time, using the density of the fixed points of different classes of transformations from the group G(t 1 ) in its limit set [5] we obtain that ~(G(t 1 )) is connected. The quasiconformal equivalence of the domain D 0 (t 1 ) to the ball is proved, as in Section 4.5, by constructing the quasiconformal mapping

compatible with the group G and the last statement of the theorem on the fundamental group

1T 1

cnl (tl )) directly follows from the previous one and

from the density of parabolic points in ~(G(t 1 )) (see [5]). It is also obvious that the group G(t 1 ) cannot be obtained from G with the help of a quasiconformal automorphism of the space Rn, since the component nl (tl) is not simply-connected. Thus, G(tl)

I T(G), and, consequently,

lies on the boundary of Teichmiiller space of the group G . Theorem B is proved.

5. Some corollaries and remarks REMARK 5.1. From the proofs of Theorems A and B it is clear that the simultaneous deformation of the Fuchs ian group G by three parameters: by generating mappings, corresponding to the spheres a 13 (t) and a 1 it), a 11 (r) and a 1 /r), a 9 (s) and a 10(s), the variations corresponding to the parameters r and s, being built over t (see 4.1), is possible. In particular, if we consider the variations corresponding to s

=

t, t t >

NONTRIVIALITY OF TEICHMULLER SPACE

29

and r < ~ , and consider the boundary group G (~, t 1 , r 0) , then we obtain the following statement. COROLLARY 5.2. On the boundary of Teichmiiller space T(G) of the

Fuchsian group G C Wl 3 from Section 4.1 there exist Kleinian groups 1-. with the following properties: 1) f>(G) is connected;

2) n = no u ni where no and n1 are the connectivity components; 3) rcni) = ni' i = 0,1' i.e. the components no and n1 are

invariant; 4) The fundamental groups

77 1(n 0) and 77 1(n 1) of the invariant components no and n1 are free infinitely generated groups.

COROLLARY 5.3. The Mostow rigidity theorem [10] doesn't take place in

the case of discrete groups of isometries of the n-dimensional hyperbolic space Bn, n? 2, inducing discontinuous groups on asn = sn- 1 . In other words, for any n ? 2 there exist isomorphisms of Fuchsian groups of the second kind induced by quasiconformal homeomorphisms of Rn which cannot be continued up to the inner automorphism of the group

Wln. We recall that the hyperbolic volume for such groups is V(Bn /G)= oo. This corollary trivially follows from Theorem A (and in case n = 2, 3 is known even earlier). The above-mentioned phenomenon of "non-rigidity" takes place also in the case of discrete groups of isometries of hyperbolic space Bn, n:: 3, whose limit set is asn. One can find the details in [7]. REMARK 5.4. Due to the fact that the fixed points of loxodromic elements are dense in ~(G(t)), t 0 < t < t 1 , we obtain that our quasiconformal automorphism t of the space Rn maps the ball Bn onto a domain n 0 (t) which has no tangent plane at any of its boundary points (see [11]). REMARK 5.5. The described method (after some modification) can be applied in the case when all the faces of the fundamental polyhedron

30

B. N. APANASOV

Bn/G of the Fuchsian group G c9J?n of the first kind contain limit vertices. For an infinitely-generated group a result of such type was obtained by A. V. Tetenov, a student of mine (see [6]). INSTITUTE OF MATHEMATICS SIBERIAN BRANCH OF THE USSR ACADEMY OF SCIENCES NOVOSIBIRSK-90, USSR 630090

REFERENCES [ 1]

.!ccola, Jl.D.M., Invariant domains for Kleinian groups, Amer.

J. of Math.§§ (1966), pp. 329-336.

[2]

0 aanonHeHHH

AneKcaa~poB, A.~.

npocTpaac~Ba

uaororpaHHHKaMH,

BeCTHHK JleHHHI'pa,n;cKoro roc.YHHB., Cep. llaT.-!Plrl3.-XHII., 1954. II!> 2, CTp. 33-43.

[3]

AnaaacoB E.H. B~

rpynn waoroMepaoro

CCCP, [4]

06 o~HOII

~

(1975),

AnaHacoB E. H.

~I,

~

AH

R." • ~oKna,n;H

3, CTp. 509-5IO.

~

5, CTp. 89I-898.

AnaaacoB E.H., TereaoB A.B., 0 cymecTBOBaHHH ae~pHBHanDH~ ~oKna,n;~

AH CCCP,

~

KnetiHOBHX rpynn B npOCTpaHCTBe,

{I978),

~I,

crp. I4-17.

AnaaacoB E.H., K reopeMe xec~Koc~• Moc~oBa, ~o&n~Y AH CCCP, 243, {1978),

[8]

~oKna,n;~

CTp. 1I-14.

KBa3HKOHilJOpMH~ ~eiPOpMaUHti

[7]

npocTpaHCTBa,

AnaaacoB E.H. 0 KnetiHoB~ rpynnax B npocTpaacrBe, CH6.MaTeM. K., 1§, 1975,

[6]

aBKne~oBa

o~HOII Macae KnetiHOB~X rpynn B

06

AH CCCP, ill (1974),

[5]

aHanHTHqecKou MeTo~e B TeopHH Kne~ao­

Bers

~

4,

c~p.

1029-!032.

L., QU.asiconformal mappings and Teicl::llll.iiller's

theorem,

Anal.;rtic functions, Pr:l..nceton, 1960, 89-120.

[9]

Deny

J.,

loions T.L., Les espaces dl1 type de Beppo Le"rt, .ADD..

Inst • .Jourier, • 5(1955), PP• 305-370·

[10]

Mostow G. D., QUasicollfo:t'll81 aappings in

n -apaoe

and the

rigidity of hn>erbolic space forms, l'llbl.llath. de 1 'Inatitut• des Hautes Etudes Sc1ent1f1ques, • .)4, 1968.

31

NONTRIVIALITY OF TEICHMULLER SPACE

[11]

Ko~o3

A.n.

HoBe~eHHe npocrpaHcrBeHuoro KBaBBKOB~PIHOro

0!06pazeKIH Ha DXOCKHX ceqeHHHX o6naC!B

onpe~exeBBH. lOKX~H

!H CCCP, 1§1, (!966), lt!4, crp. 743-746.

[12]

Kpymxax& C.!. KBaBHKOH~PKHHe oro6pazeRBR • pBMa&OBH HOC!B, Hayxa, HOBOCH6HpCK, 1975.

noBe~

[13] Pe•e!HRK m.r. !oKanbHaR crpyxrypa 0!06pazeHBI c orpa..qeHHHK acxazeuBeM, Cz6.uareK.a., 1Q (1969), It! 6, crp. 13!9-134!.

[14] PemerHRK m.r. UpocrpaHcrBeHHHe oro6pazeHRR c orpaa.qeHHHK KCK8ZeHK6M, CB6.MaTeM.K., 1 (1967), It! 3, C!p. 629-658. [15]

topX !.P. AB!OKO~HHe ~HKnHH, OHTH HKTn CCCP, M.-!., !936.

THE ACTION OF THE MODULAR GROUP ON THE COMPLEX BOUNDARY* Lipman Bers To ProfessorS. E. Warschawski, on his 75th birthday.

Introduction The Teichmi.iller space T p, n of Riemann surfaces of genus p , compact except for n punctures, has a canonical topology, a canonical metric and a canonical complex structure, as well as a canonical group of automorphisms, the modular group Modp,n. It has, however, several "natural" compactifications and hence several boundaries. The present note, which develops the method of [6], deals with the complex boundary obtained by identifying T p,n with the Teichmiiller space T(G) of an appropriately (but not canonically) chosen Fuchsian group G. The space T(G) is canonically embedded into the universal Teichmi.iller space T(l) and T(l) is canonically identified with a bounded domain in a complex Banach space B. The modular group Modp,n becomes identified with Mod(G) which appears as a subgroup of the universal modular group Mod(l). The main results of this note are stated and proved in §4. They include the following statements.

There is a large class of points on aT(l) on which Mod(l) acts continuously, and there is a large subgrcup of Mod(l) which acts continuously

*Work

partially supported by the NSF.

© 1980 Princeton University Press Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics Proceedings of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference 0-691-08264-2/80/000033-20$01.00/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000033-20 $01.00/1 (paperback) For copying information, see copyright page 33

34

LIPMAN BERS

on the whole boundary aT(l). If dim T(G)

< "", then Mod(G) acts con-

tinuously on almost all points of aT(G), including all so-called totally degenerate points. (The latter result uses essentially recent theorems by Sullivan [13) and by Thurston [not published).) The essential work is done in §§2, 3; some results there may be of independent interest.

§1. Background and notations We begin by introducing some (mostly standard) notations and by recalling some known facts (see [2), [5), [10) and the references given there). The main properties of quasiconformal mappings are assumed (cf. [2), [11)). We denote by Q the group of all quasiconformal self-mappings of the upper half-plane U ; for a tension of w to R

=

w

f

Q, [w) = w IR denotes the continuous ex-

R U I"" l. A w

f

Q is called normalized if it (or

~

rather wiR) leaves 0, 1, "" fixed; the normalized w

f

Q form the sub-

group Qn which contains the subgroup Q 0 of those w which leave every x < R fixed. Every w < Q can be written uniquely as w where

w

f

=

a

ow

Qn and a is a real Mobius transformation, i.e. an element of

the group Qc of conformal self-mappings of U. Note that Qc = PSL(2,R). By a Fuchsian group G we mean, in this paper, a discrete subgroup of Qc. In particular, 1

=

Q(G) consists of those w

I id l f

is the trivial Fuchs ian group. The set

Q for which wGw- 1 is again a Fuchsian

group; we write Qn(G) = Q(G) n Qn. Let L 00 (U) 1 denote the open unit ball in the (complex) Banach space L 00 (U), and let L 00 (U ,G) 1 consist of those fJ.(g(z)) g'(z)/g'(z)

=

Every w < Q has a Beltrami coefficient

fJ.(z), /1.

/1. f

L 00 (U) 1 for which g G into < , >wGw-1 . The map w*: T(G)

-+

T(wGw - 1) is

called an allowable map. If w normalizes G, then w* is a selfmapping of T(G). Such w* form the modular group Mod(G) of G. (In [4] the definition of Mod(G) is somewhat different, for a few groups G; this difference is of no importance for what follows.) Now let B denote the complex Banach space of holomorphic functions c/J(z), z

f

L, with

For every Fuchsian group G, let B(G) be the closed linear subspace of B consisting of those ch

f

B for which

ch(g(z)) g'(z) 2 = ch(z),

g

f

G.

The map (1.1) is a homeomorphism of T(1) onto a bounded domain in B

=

B(1); the

restriction of this map to each T(G) is a homeomorphism onto a bounded domain in B(G). By abuse of language we shall identify each T(G) with its image under the mapping (1.1 ). Thus each Teichmliller space T(G) has a complex structure and also a boundary aT(G) C B(G) , and all allowable maps are holomorphic. With every ch z

f

f

B we shall associate a meromorphic function Wch(z),

L, defined as follows:

37

MODULAR GROUP ON COMPLEX BOUNDARY

where n 1 and n 2 are solution of the ordinary differential equation 2n"(z) + c/J(z) n(z)

=

0

subject to the initial conditions n 1 (-i) = n;(-i)

=

1,

11~ (-i)

= n/-i) = 0 .

An equivalent definition reads: W = Wc/J(z) has c/J as its Schwarz ian derivative: W(z)

=

(z + i)- 1 + o(1), z .... -i .

The dependence of Wc/J on c/J is holomorphic. We denote by

S

the set of those c/J

B for which Wc/J is schlicht

f

(i.e., injective); by the Kraus-Nehari inequality c/J

f

S

S

is bounded. For

it will be convenient to consider instead of Wc/J the schlicht

function

which has the Schwarz ian derivative c/J and takes (-i, -2i, -3i) into (0, 1, oo). The dependence of ncb on c/J

f

S

is holomorphic.

The Teichmiiller space T(1) consists of those cb

f

S

for which Wcb

(and hence also ncb) has a quasiconformal extension from L to C. This is equivalent to the requirement that nc/J(L) be bounded by a quasicircle, an image of a circle under a quasiconformal mapping. If cjJ then cP

cjJ/1 for some 11

=

f

L 00 (U) 1 and w 11(-2i)-w 11(-3i) w 11(-2i)- w 11(-i)

If cb

f

T(G), then the group

is a quasi-Fuchsian group with fixed curve a!Jc/J(L).

f

T(1),

38

LIPMAN BERS

It is known, and easy to verify, that T(1) U aT(1) C S. Gehring [8],

[9] proved that T(1) is the interior of T(1) U aT(1) in

S

S,

and that the complement of

is non-empty.

The Banach space B(G) and the Teichmiiller space T(G) are finite dimensional if and only if G is finitely generated and of the first kind, i.e., if and only if the Poincare area of U/G is finite, i.e., if and only if PSL{2, R)/G has finite volume. If so, and if G is torsion free, the quotient U/G is a Riemann surface of some finite genus p, compact except for n punctures, and 3p- 3 + n

~

0. In this case T(G) can be

identified with the Teichmtiller space T p ,n and Mod(G) with the Teichmtiller modular group Modp,n operating on T p,n. §2. Tame convergence A sequence !¢j! C B is said to converge weakly to a ¢ f B if ll¢jll

=

0(1) and lim ¢j(z)

=

¢(z) for every z fL. Every bounded se-

quence in B contains a weakly convergent subsequence. If lim ¢j

=

¢

weakly' then n¢. converges to n¢ normally (uniformly on compact sub)

sets of L ). The set dense in

S

S

is closed under weak convergence and T{1) is

with respect to weak convergence. The proofs of the above

statements are obvious.

S

A sequence !¢j! in

if lim ¢j

¢ weakly and if for almost every z / fJ¢(L) there is a

=

such that z quence in

will be said to converge tamely to a ¢ f

S

I O¢.(L) for

j

J

> J. Note that a convergent (in norm) se-

is always weakly convergent, but may fail to converge

tamely. PROPOSITION

2.1. If ¢



S

and

(2.1) then there is a sequence !¢j! C T(1) such that ¢ (Here and hereafter

a

S, J

=

lim ¢j tamely.

denotes the set-theoretical boundary.)

MODULAR GROUP ON COMPLEX BOUNDARY

Proof. Let 6.n, n

39

1, 2, ... , denote the disc

=

and fn(z) the function which maps L conformally onto 6.n and satisfies the conditions fn(-3i) Clearly, lim fn(z)

=

-3i,

=

f(-z)

=

-f(z).

z normally. Set ~\b of/z)-

Qc/J ofi(-i)

Qc/J ofi(-2i)- Qc/J ofjC--i) Then Vi is meromorphic and schlicht in L and takes (-i, -2i, -3i) into Q¢·, where ¢i ( S is the Schwarz ian derivative J of Vi. Since Vi converges to Q¢ normally, cPj converges to ¢

(0, 1, oo). Hence Vi

=

weakly. Since ancjJ.(L) is obtained from the real analytic Jordan curve J Q¢(6-j) by a Mobius transformation, Q¢· admits a quasiconformal extension to

C.

Hence

rPj

J

E

T(1).

Now let z 0 be a point exterior to Q¢(L). If i is large enough, the Mobius transformation

is arbitrarily close to the identity, so that

and, a fortiori,

Since the boundary of Q¢(L) is assumed to have measure zero, the convergence of

rPj

to ¢

is tame.

40

LIPMAN BERS

QUERY:

Is the conclusion of Proposition 1 valid without the assumption

(2 .1)? The result just proved does not, of course, imply that a

¢ < aT(G) is

a tame limit of elements in T(G), even if mes aW¢(L) = 0. A special result in this direction is, however, valid. Let G be finitely generated and of the first kind. Then the boundary points of T(G) are classified as follows (cf. [3], [12]). If ¢ < aT(G) and W¢(L) is dense in

C,

¢ and the group G¢ are called totally degenerate.

Almost all boundary points are of this nature. If ¢

is not totally degen-

erate, the region of discontinuity R(G¢) of G¢ is disconnected and R(GcP)jGcP is a disjoint union of Riemann surfaces. The group G¢ and

the boundary point ¢

are called either regular or partially degenerate

according to whether the Poincare area of R(GcP)jGcP is equal on less than twice the Poincare area of U/G. If dim T(G) > 0, aT(G) contains regular points and if dim T(G) > 2, aT(G) contains partially degenerate points. PROPOSITION 2.2.

Let G he finitely generated and of the first kind.

Every regular boundary point in aT(G) is the tame limit of a sequence in T(G). The proof is a modification of an argument due to Abikoff (see [1], pp. 224-231). The details are somewhat lengthy and will be presented elsewhere. §3. Formal translations The group Qn/Q 0 operates on T(1) as the group Modt of (right) translations. We will associate with every w < Qn, which has a continuous Beltrami coefficient in U, a map

S -> S,

called a formal translation,

which restricts on T(1) C S to the element of Modt induced by w. Throughout this section we consider a fixed continuous () < L 00 (U) 1 and set

MODULAR GROUP ON COMPLEX BOUNDARY

We extend the definitions of w and w(z)

=

e

w(z),

41

to L by setting O(z)

=

O(z).

cPj will denote elements of S. For every 0 and c/> set

The letters c/> and

(3.1)

(3.2)

(where

I lloo

denotes the L 00 norm). Hence there is a unique quasi-

conformal self-mapping AO,c/> of

C which satisfies

the Beltrami equation

and the normalization conditions

AO,c/> one/> ow(J 1 (-i) = 0, Ae,c/> one/> ow(/(-2i) = 1, Ae,cf> one/> ow(J 1 (-3i)

0

=

oo.

The function V(z) = Ae,cf> one/> ow 1 (z), z ( L, is injective by construction and takes (-i, -2i, -3i) into (0, 1,

oo).

Also, V(z) is meromorphic

since Vow 0 = Ae,c/>onc/> and one computes from (3.1) that in L the Beltrami coefficient of Ae,c/> one/> is 0. Thus V = nl/J where 1/J is the Schwarz ian derivative of V. This 1/J (

S;

and note that 1/J is defined by the relation

we write

42

LIPMAN BERS

(3.3)

e*

We must now verify that the restriction of

to T(l) is the element

(we\ of Modt. The following statement is a slight modification of a result by Gardiner [7, p. 475]. PROPOSITION 3.1.

Let Jl, v

f

L 00 (U) 1 be such that

and set

Then !/J = e*(¢), i.e., (3.3) holds. Note that the hypotheses of the Proposition mean that !/J = (we)*(¢).

Proof. Since ¢ and !/J are the Schwarzian derivatives of wlliL and wviL, respectively, there are Mobius transformations a , a J1

v

such that

in L. Using these relations we extend the definitions of f!¢ and f!!/J to all of

C.

Then the Beltrami coefficients of f!¢1U and f!!/JIU are 11

and v respectively. Let

be conformal bijections' chosen so that the maps qJl 0 n¢ and qv of!!/J keep O,l,oo fixed. Then q

of!,..~.= 11'+'

w , q of!, 1• = w J1

We define a homeomorphism a

V

a(z) is quasiconformal off the quasicircle n(R)' hence

everywhere. A direct calculation shows that the relation (Ja_ 0

az -

(),

(Ja

az

holds a.e. Also

so that a

takes the points n ow(/C-i), n owi(-2i) and

0

n

{}*(¢) weakly.

=

00

Proof. It will suffice to show that (3.13) holds under the additional hypothesis that the sequence lt/lj I= le*(¢j)l converges weakly to some

t/1.

We are now in the situation described by Proposition 3.2. Hypothesis (3.12) implies that for almost every z

o(}

A.. ( z) = ''!' J

0

I

Q¢(L) there is a

for

Together with (3.11) this implies that lim

j

J

such that

>] .

oe ''~-'] '"'. = o(} ,'/''"'

a. e. Hence the F

in the statement of Proposition 3.2 coincides with Ae,¢, so that

t/1

=

{}*(¢).

PROPOSITION

3.4. Assume that

(3.14)

Then {}*(¢>) depends only on

we\R

(and, of course, on ¢> ).

Proof. For ¢> < T(1) the conclusion holds, independently of hypothesis (3.14), in view of Proposition 3.1. Therefore, under this hypothesis, the conclusion follows from Propositions 2.1 and 3.3. QUERY:

Is the conclusion of Proposition 3.4 valid for all ¢>

f

aT(1)?

For all ¢> < S? PROPOSITION 3.5.

If

(3.15)

then (}* is continuous at ¢> with respect to weak convergence (i.e., if lim

rPj

=

¢> weakly, then lim {}/rf>j)

=

{}*(¢) weakly).

Proof. Note that, by (3.15), weak convergence to ¢> is tantamount to tame convergence and use Proposition 3.3.

46

LIPMAN BERS

PROPOSITION 3.6. If () has compact support in U (and hence also in U U L ), ()* is continuous with respect to weak convergence.

Proof. We may assume that we are in the situation described in Proposi-

tion 3.2. We note that n. converges normally to U l¢(u)l - !lull so that

II a II

la(u)l !lull

is bounded below.

By an observation of Thurston (see [3]), if M is a compact manifold of negative curvature, then the bounded part of H*(M) is all of the cohomology of M of dimension

~

2. Roughly speaking, there are three

components of this observation: (i) a geodesic k-simplex in hyperbolic space (constant curvature -1) has bounded k-dimensional volume, if

-

k > 1. (ii) In the universal covering space M of M, the complex of

SOME REMARKS ON BOUNDED COHOMOLOGY

61

geodesic simplices is (bounded) chain homotopic to the complex of all simplices, so that we may restrict our attention to cochains whose value on any simplex agrees with the value of the corresponding geodesic simplex. (iii) A standard comparison-theorem type argument allows one to conclude that if a is a deRham k-form of M , then its value on any geodesic simplex is bounded in terms of the curvature of M, the volume of a geodesic simplex in hyperbolic space, and, of course, the size of a. Since M is a K(rr 1 (M), 1), there is a natural map c/J: Aut(rr 1 (M)) -. AutH*(M). Ker(c/J) contains the group of inner automorphisms of 7T 1(M), but, perhaps, contains much more. THEOREM.

Let M be a compact manifold of negative curvature,

dim(M) > 2. Then, (a) Aut(rr 1 (M))/Ker(c/J) is a finite group. (b) The order of any element of Aut(rr 1 (M))/Ker(c/J) is bounded in terms of the Betti numbers of M. Proof. Let f be an element of Aut(rr 1 (M)).

Then there is a unique

homotopy class of homotopy equivalences, which we also denote by f, which realizes the given automorphism of rr 1 (M). Since both f and f- 1 are norm-decreasing, f* must be an isometry of the norm

II .

But f* also preserves the lattice H*(M, Z) in

H*(M, R). For k

~

2 , let e 1 , · · ·, er be a basis for the lattice of torsion-free

elements of Hk(M, Z). Then since f* is an isometry, there are only finitely many choices for f*(e 1 ), ·· ·, f*(er). Also, if f* is the identity on Hn- 1 (M), by Poincare duality, it is so also for H 1 (M). This then proves (a). To show (b), we use the fact that f* is an isometry to show that all eigenvalues are of absolute value 1. Since f* preserves a lattice, it also follows that all the eigenvalues of f* are algebraic integers. By Kronecker's theorem, it follows that all the eigenvalues are roots of unity -since each eigenvalue is the solution of an algebraic equation whose

62

ROBERT BROOKS

degree is bounded by the corresponding Betti number of M, there is a

number m which is bounded by the Betti numbers of M such that (fm) *

is unipotent. But (fm) * is an isometry, since f* is, and these two facts imply that (fm) * is the identity, proving (b). In the case where M is a hyperbolic manifold, the classical Mostow Rigidity Theorem asserts that Aut(rr 1 (M))/Inn(rr 1 (M)) is finite. Even in this case, I don't know much about the group Ker(¢)/Inn(rr 1 (M)). We may extend this discussion to arbitrary manifolds to some degree, in view of the results of §1. THEOREM. Let M be an arbitrary manifold, and f: M--> M a map which induces an isomorphism on rr 1 (M). Then f* restricted to the bounded part of H*(M) has all eigenvalues of absolute value 1 . Proof. This follows from the fact that [[fk[[ is bounded independently of

k, by the result of (b). One is tempted to apply Kronecker's theorem in this context. The problem is that

a priori, the bounded part of

H*(M), need not be a ration-

al subspace of M. Thus, in particular, it may happen that one eigenvalue of f* may occur in the bounded part of H*(M), and thus have absolute value 1, while its conjugate with respect to some automorphism of Q over

Q may fail to have absolute value 1.

One can show that this never happens, for instance, when rr 1 (M) has a Jordan-Holder decomposition in which each factor is either an amenable group or the fundamental group of a manifold of negative curvature. Intuitively, one feels that bounded cohomology detects only the "hyperbolic" structure of a group, so that there is at least some hope of the general statement being true. To sum up, we ask: QuESTION: Is it true, for all groups G, that the bounded part of H*(G) is a rational subspace of H*(G)?

63

SOME REMARKS ON BOUNDED COHOMOLOGY

An affirmative answer to the above question would sharpen the above theorem to read: f* is of finite order on the bounded part of H*(M), with the order bounded in terms of the dimension of the bounded part of H*(M). A negative answer would, of course, yield interesting examples of groups with non-trivial bounded cohomology. REFERENCES [1] Brooks, R., and Trauber, P., "The van Est Theorem for Groups of Diffeomorphisms," The Hadronic journal (1978). [2] Hochschild and Mostow, "Cohomology of Lie Groups," Ill. (1972). [3] Gromov, M., "Volume and Bounded Cohomology," preprint.

J. of Math.

THE DYNAMICS OF 2-GENERA TOR SUBGROUPS OF PSL(2, C) Robert Brooks* and J. Peter Matelski A classical result of Shimizu and Leutbecher (see, for instance [6], p. 59) asserts that if

(M)

(~~) generate a discrete subgroup of

and

PSL(2, C), then either c = 0 or

lei 2:

1. This has been strengthened by

T. J¢rgensen [4] as follows: j¢RGENSEN'S INEQUALITY. If X and Y generate a discrete, nonelementary subgroup of PSL(2, C), then

In this paper, we will show the existence of a sequence of inequalities, generalizing J¢rgensen's inequality, which X and Y must satisfy in order for , the group generated by X and Y, to be discrete. These conditions are mutually independent in the sense that, for given X and Y, at most one can fail to hold. These conditions arise from the Shimizu-Leutbecher process defined below. For convenience, consider the upper half space model of hyperbolic 3-space. We denote a directed geodesic E by the ordered pair of its endpoints; so E =(a, b)' a, b

*Partially

£

c'

at

b. The complex distance

supported by NSF Grant #MCS 7802679.

©

1980

Princeton University Press

Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics Proceedin~s of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference

0-691-08264-2/80/000065-07$00.50/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000065-07$00.50/1 (paperback)

For copying information, see copyright page

65

T

= o(£1, £2)

66

ROBERT BROOKS AND]. PETER MATELSKI

between two directed geodesics E1 = (a 1 , b 1 ) and E2 = (a 2 , b 2 ) is defined as follows: r

C ; Re(r) ;::: 0 is the hyperbolic distance between the

l

geodesics; lm(r) is the angle made by the geodesics along their common perpendicular and is determined modulo 2rr unless Re(r) = 0, in which case ± Im(r) is determined modulo 2rr. One may compute the complex distance by the formula:

where (z 1 ,z 2 ,z 3 ,z 4 ) is the usual cross ratio, as can be checked if El

=

(-1, 1) and

e2

=

(-er, eT).

Let X be a loxodromic element of PSL(2, C) and axis(X) the directed geodesic in hyperbolic space joining the fixed points of X . If E is a perpendicular to axis(X), then the complex distance r between E and X(E) is called the complex translation length of X. In fact X translates Re(r) units along axis(X) and rotates hyperbolic space by lm(r) about axis(X). We have

which makes sense even if X is not loxodromic. Given X loxodromic with complex translation length r, and Y in PSL(2, C), one may check the formula: tr((YXY- 1 )X- 1 )-2

=

-(1-cosh(r))(1-cosh(/3)),

for {3 the complex distance from axis(X) to axis(YXY- 1 ); this follows by normalizing X

=

(cosh(r/2) sinh(r/2)

vxv- 1 = ( cosh(r /2)

e-f3sinh(r/2)

sinh (r/2)) cosh(r/2) ef3sinh(r/2)). cosh(r/2)

2-GENERATOR SUBGROUPS OF PSL(2,

C)

67

Given X and Y elements of PSL(2, C) with X loxodromic, we define the Shimizu-Leutbecher sequence inductively by:

Let r be the complex translation length of X, and let f3i be the complex distance between axis(X) and axis(Y i). A necessary condition for the group generated by X and Y to be discrete is that the set lcosh(f3i)l should form a discrete subset of C. The following lemma allows one to compute cosh(f3) inductively: LEMMA. cosh(f3i+ 1)

=

(1-cosh(r))cosh 2(f3i) + cosh(r).

This follows from the hyperbolic law of cosines: if E0 , E1 , E2 are given, the law of cosines gives a formula for w T1 =

8(Eo, e1)'

T2 =

aero, E2)

=

8(E 1 , E2 ) in terms of

and a which is the complex distance from

the perpendicular between E0 and E1 to the perpendicular between E0 and £2 . The formula is:

The lemma follows by setting

r1

= r2 =

f3 i

and

a

=

r .

One way to check

the law of cosines is to normalize so that eo= (0, oo)' e1 = (t1, t! 1)' and e2 = (et2, et; 1) where t1 = tanh(r 1/2)' t2 = tanh(r 2/2)' and e = ea; then compute cosh 2(w/2) = (t 1 , et 2 , et;- 1 , t! 1). Note that E2 does indeed have complex distance Now let zi

T

e0

2 to

With (-ea, ea) as COmmon perpendicular.

(1-cosh(r))(cosh(f3)). We may rewrite the above induc-

=

tive formula as: zi+1

=

zr +

c'

where

c

=

(1- cosh(r))(cosh r) '

and we have that if X and Y generate a discrete group, then lzi I forms a discrete subset of C . The dynamical behavior of C under a quadratic polynomial is well understood from the work of Fatou-Julia ([1], [5]; see also [2]). Let

68

ROBERT BROOKS AND

J. PETER MATELSKI

fi(z) = fof ··· of(z), where f(z) = z 2 + C; a solution p of the polynomii times al equation fi(z) = z will be called a stable periodic point of period i if Jd~ fi(p)J < 1 . Then fi is contracting on any disk Be= lz: lz-p\ < el on which Jd~ fiJ < 1. The theorem of Fatou-Julia ensures that, for any choice of C , there is at most one stable periodic orbit. Further results of Fatou-Julia allow one to draw by computer the region E of C defined by E = lz: fi(z) converges to the stable periodic orbit l (see Fig. 1), and the region of C defined by IC: z 2 +C has a stable periodic orbit} (see Fig. 2). To obtain the above-mentioned inequalities, let p be a stable periodic point of f of period n; we may assume that fn(z)

=

I

IPI < 1/2.

Expanding

2n

ai(z-p)i as a Taylor series about p, we have i=O

I

2n

lfn(z)-pl

=

lz-pl

ai(z-p)i-l

:S lz-p\(2n-1)m [max(1, lz-p\ 2 n-l]

i=l

where m = max(\ai\). Setting K < -

1-J~fn(p)J ~z , we see that on the disk (2 -1)m

J-!!. fn(p)J , then lz-p\ < min(K, 1), fn is a contracting map. If also K < dz n m · (2 -1) fn(z)-p has no roots other than p in the disk lz-p\ < K. In the case n = 1, the fixed points of f(z) = z 2 + (1-cosh(r))(cosh(r)) are cosh(r), 1-cosh(r). If \1-cosh(r)\ < ~' we may set p

:S 1-cosh(r),

and ~~ (p) = 2(1-cosh(r)), m = 1. We thus have the inequality: If 0 < 1(1-cosh(r))(cosh(/3)-1)\ < min(1-2icosh(r)-1\, 2icosh(r)-1\), then is not discrete. In view of our expressions for cosh(r) and cosh(/3) given above, this becomes Jr&rgensen's inequality. In the case n are

=

2, the periodic points of order 2 of f(z)

-1+ y1- 4(C+1) d 2 , and dz f (p) .2

=

=

z2 + C

4(C+1). Using the estimates

2-GENERA TOR SUBGROUPS OF PSL(2, C)

t,

i,

69

1

we find m :S 4, so that 0 < lz-pj < 1 min(1-4IC+1i, 4IC+11) implies is not discrete. IPI
0 define (see [9]) (3.1)

A

~

(

a {32/a

({32+:)/a)'

8=({3

~{3

~a2 /{3 ) (a 2+1)/{3

then for y = (a2+{32)( 1 +a2+{32)/a2{32, (3.2)

[A~1' 8~1]

=

A~1g~1AB

=C~ ~~}

The matrices A, B generate a free group on two elements. The above parametrization is of the most general type described by (3.3) 1 = C SL 2(R), trace [A,B] = ~2, [trace A[ > 2, \trace B[ > 2 at least to within equivalence (S~ 1 rs, S < SLiR)), with a possible sign change of A or B. We abbreviate C = AB and write

79

GEODESICS ON FRICKE'S TORUS-COVERING

(3.4)

a = trace A , b = trace B , c = trace C .

Then these relations hold:

Thus 1

is parametrized by a and

f3,

i.e., a= b/c,

f3 = a/c,

(but

not uniformly so, see [12]). The fundamental domain for

1 acting on }{, the upper half-plane, is

drawn in usual fashion as :DA,B in Figure 1, showing the action of A and B on geodesics with vertices at -1, 0, a 2 / {3 2

,

oo. For our pur-

poses we need to construct :D A the special domain for A. Let ~w denote the geodetic arc (w 1 , w 2 ), the axis of W, a hyperbolic element of 1

with fixed points w 1 and w 2

~A= arc(a 1 ,a 2 ) the center a 0

=

.

We assert that for

(a 1 +a 2 )/2 satisfies

-1 < a 0 < 0

(3.7)

if we use some automorphism of 1

to obtain (compare [17])

00

-1

Boo

0

ABoo

=

BAoo

a2

Fig. 1. Formation of the special :!)A from the fundamental domain :DA,B in the upper half z-plane :JC.

80

HARVEY COHN

(3.8)

Then the vertical arc (a 0 , oo) has a portion arc (z 0 , oo) which is normal to

~A at z*. Likewise its image arc (Az 0 , Aoo) is normal to ~A at Az*. These arcs, together with arc(O, Az 0) are the new boundary of :DA as shown in Figure 1. We next introduce an abelian integral of the first kind for :D A, B (or for :D A), namely u, to transform the z half-plane to cover a lattice in the u-plane. Obviously, the covering is multivalued to the extent that each z has the same image as Xz (for X f

r' ).

In the classical modular

case (2.13), du = dJ/(J-1) 112 ] 213 for J(z) the (Klein) modular invariant, (see [1] and [8]). The lattice of the covering is determined by the doublyperiodic images of z

= oo.

g) A

lA

2

z*

I •

I I

I

I I

Fig. 2.

Lattice covering of torus by :DA in the u-plane. Labels refer to the

z-plane (see Figure 1), and images of (z =) oo are heavy dots denoting lattice points. The complete transversals are partly dotted but all lines are geodesics. True right angles occur only along SA. Here w0 = [A- 1 , B- 1 ]A-l and w1 = AB- 1 AB are nonprimitive, (see §4).

81

GEODESICS ON FRICKE'S TORUS-COVERING

The geodesic arcs normal to ~A (but lying in

transversal field uniquely covering the image of

:D A)

:D A.

emerge as a

In Figure 2, we

label the u-plane by the preimages in the z-plane when multivaluedness does not interfere. We see that these normals extend outside

:D A

and

there they lose their uniqueness as they wrap themselves about the lattice points (images of z

=

oo ). It is, however, the nature of noneuclidean

distance that two nonintersecting, nonparallel geodesics have one common perpendicular at the mutually closest point of approach. Thus the distance in

TA

between arc (z 0 , oo) and arc (Az 0 , a 2 ! (3 2 ) is measured along arc

(z*, Az*). (The metric ds

=

ldzl/Im z is of course transferred to the

u-plane.) 1

(U

'

Consider next all geodesics Hw for W = AX or A- X, (X< 1 ). Under the action of W, ~w has a period which is measured from arc (z 0 , oo) to arc (Az 0 , Aoo), using suitable lattice translations in the u-plane (see [3]). Nevertheless unless W =

s- 1 AS

or

s- 1 A- 1 S,

then

~w cannot be wholly interior to '])A , by the uniqueness of the geodesics

in the field. There are many ways a geodesic can wind around the lattice points. In Figure 2 we see ~w

0

for

w0 = [A- 1 , B- 1 ]A- 1 = A- 1 B- 1 ABA- 1 .

In the

u-plane it must intersect itself because in the z-plane it covers the full range z-->z-y of [A- 1 ,B- 1 ]tf'', (note(3.2)). Wealsoseethe geodesic ~w

1

for W1 = AB- 1 AB. It merely covers two periods of ~A

but does not intersect itself. (These cases occur in (1.4c) and (1.4b) above.) §4. Trace and distance The geodetic distance is related to trace as follows: THEOREM 4.1.

Let A be hyperbolic in SL 2 (R), acting on J{, and let

§A join its fixed points. Let z be a point on §A. Then if s is the noneuclidean distance on the arc(z,AZ) and a= ltrace AI, (4.2a)

a

=

2 cosh s/2

82

HARVEY COHN

(4.2b) If z isnotapointon ~A' thecorrespondingdistance a

on arc(z,Az)

satisfies a < 2 cosh s/2, or s > 2 cosh- 1 a/2. Conjecture 1.1 then becomes the following (with M

=

A):

CONJECTURE 4.3. The shortest (periodic) geodesic between arc (z 0 , oo) and arc (Anz 0 , Anoo), i.e., through n replicas of ~A as laid out horizontally in Figure 2, is the corresponding portion of ~A. We do not prove this, but what is apparent from Figure 2 is that only a finite number of homotopy classes of the punctured covering surface can have geodesics of length below a given bound. (One must incidentally check that repeated circuits about oo do increase the length unboundedly .) From this, Theorem 1.3 follows. (Note that when b

=

c there are hori-

zontal and vertical reflectional symmetries in Figure 2, so that if W is in the same r ;r~coset as An, ~w can be reflected into

:D A

for compari-

son with ~A.) THEOREM 4.4 (Triangular inequality). Let (4.5) for a, b, c positive, then (4.6) For proof we construct the corresponding r let z 1 be the intersection of ~A and elegant construction). Then if z 0

=

§8

=

as in §3, and

(see A. Schmidt [18] for an

B- 1 z 1 , consider the triangle formed

by arc (z 0 , Bz 0 ) on ~B, arc (Bz 0 , ABz 0 ) on ~A, and arc (z 0 , ABz 0 ) which is not on ~c, (C

=

AB). Nevertheless, the inequalities are just

right for using Theorem 4.1.

GEODESICS ON FRICKE'S TORUS-COVERING

83

§5. Markoff numbers Actually, despite the appearance of Table I, the geodesic for A uBv is not much longer than its equivalent for (A, B)u,v even when lui+ lvl is large. This is like saying that the semi-perimeter of a rectangle is of the same order as its diagonal, and indeed the logarithms are asymptotic! This idea tells us the order of magnitude of Markoff numbers.

If we return to (2.14), we write the matrices (see [3]) (5.1)

M = (V

1•

V )u,v 2

'

M' = (V

1•

V )u',v' 2

'

M" = (V

1•

V )u+u',v+v' 2

where u, u', v, v' ~ 0 and uv'- vu' = 1. Then for the Markoff triple (5.2)

m =(trace M)/3, m' =(trace M')/3, m" =(trace M")/3

The triangular inequality (4.6) yields 3m'+ (9m' 2 -4)y,

(5.4)

2

By repeated uses (writing M" now as M = (V 1 , V2 )u, v ), we have 3m+ (9m 2 -4)y, \I, v 2 < (3+5\l,)u -2. (3+8 ) '

(5.5)

if we note for V 1 we have m = 1 and for V 2 we have m = 2. In logarithmic terms, for m large, (5.6)

log 3m+ a(1)::; u log(3+5 71 )/2 + v log(3+8 71 ).

If we let mN be the Nth Markoff number, an easy consequence of (5.6) is a count of relatively prime lattice points in a triangle as a method of estimating mN : (5. 7)

84

HARVEY COHN

A "lim in£" is also seen to exist by the analogy of the rectangle cited earlier in this section, but we omit details since, recently, Christopher Gurwood [10] showed a limit to exist by direct methods. The limit has not been calculated, but the constant in (5. 7), namely 2.36247 .. ·, seems close. MATHEMATICS DEPARTMENT COLLEGE OF THE CITY OF NEW YORK NEW YORK, NEW YORK 10031

REFERENCES [1]

Cohn, H., Approach to Markoff's minimal forms through modular functions, Ann. of Math. 61 (1955), pp. 1-12.

[2]

, Representation of Markoff's binary quadratic forms by geodesics on a perforated torus, Acta. Arith. 18 (1971), pp. 125-136.

[3]

pp. 8-22.

, Markoff forms and primitive words, Math. Ann. 196 (1972),

[4]

, Some direct limits of primitive homotopy words and of Markoff geodesics, Discontinuous Groups and Riemann Surfaces, Princeton, 1974, pp. 81-98.

[5]

, Ternary forms as invariants of Markoff forms and other SL2(Z)-bundles, Linear Alg. and Appl., 21 (1978), pp. 3-12.

[6]

Fenchel, W., and Nielsen,

[7]

Fricke, R., Uber die Substitutionsgruppen, welche zu den aus dem Legendre'schen lntegralmodul k2(w) gezogen Wurzeln gehoren, Math. Ann., 28 (1887), pp. 99-119.

[8]

, Die Congruenzgruppen der sechsten Stufe, Math. Ann., 29 (1887), pp. 97-123.

[9]

, Uber die Theorie der automorphen Modulgruppen, Gott. Nach., (1896), pp. 91-101.

J.,

Discontinuous Groups, (to appear).

[10] Gurwood, C., Diophantine approximation and the Markov chain, Dissertation, N.Y.U, 1976. [11] Horowitz, R. D., Characters of free groups represented in the two dimensional special linear group, Comm. Pure Appl. Math., 25 (1972), pp. 635-649. [12] Keen, L., On Fricke moduli, Advances in the Theory of Riemann Surfaces, Princeton, 1971, pp. 205-209. [13] Magnus, W., Karrass, A., Solitar, D., Combinatorial Group Theory, New York, 1966.

GEODESICS ON FRICKE'S TORUS-COVERING

85

[14] Markoff, A. A., Surles formes binaires indefinies, I, Math. Ann., 15(1879), pp. 381-409; II, Math. Ann., 17 (1880), pp. 379-400. [15] McKean, H. P., Selberg's trace formulas as applied to a compact Riemann surface, Comm. Pure Appl. Math., 25 (1972), pp. 225-246. [16] Pick, G., Uber gewisse ganzzahlige Substitutionen, welche sich nicht durch algebraische Cohgruenzen erkliiren lassen, Math. Ann., 28 (1887), pp. 119-124. [17] Schmidt, A. L., Minimum of quadratic forms with respect to Fuchs ian groups, I, J. reine und angew. Math., 286/287 (1976), pp. 341-368. [18]

, Minimum of quadratic forms with respect to Fuchsian groups, II,]. reine und angew. Math., 292(1977), pp. 109-114.

[19] Zieschang, H., Vogt, E., Coldeway, H.-D., Fhichen und ebene diskontinuierliche Gruppen, Lecture Notes in Mathematics, #122, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, New York 1970. Added in proof: Dr. Gerald Myerson kindly communicated a direct proof of Theorem 4.4.

ON VARIATION OF PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES Clifford J. Earle*

1.

Introduction The purpose of this paper is to derive a new variational formula for

the monodromy map associated with (varying) projective structures on (varying) Riemann surfaces of genus p

2:

2.

The monodromy map was investigated in a series of papers by D. A. Hejhal [6, 7, 8]. Hejhal used a cutting-and-pasting technique in [6] and [7] to show that the monodromy map defines a local homeomorphism from the space of projective structures to the space of monodromy groups. He obtained a variational formula in [8], but that formula is too complicated to be useful for studying the Jacobian of the monodromy map, although it has other interesting applications [9]. In contrast, our formula implies easily that the monodromy map has nonzero Jacobian and is therefore a local homeomorphism. The formula also suggests a close relationship between the tangent space to the space of projective structures and certain Eichler cohomology groups. That relationship is explored more deeply in J. H. Hubbard's paper [10]. The survey article [5] by R. C. Gunning contains much useful information and background material about projective structures. Gunning has

*This research was partly supported by a grant from the National Science Foundation. © 1980 Princeton University Press Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics Proceedings of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference 0-691-08264-2/80/000087-13$00.65/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000087-13$00.65/1 (paperback) For copying information, see copyright page 87

88

CLIFFORD J. EARLE

independently obtained a variational formula quite similar to ours and observed a relationship with Eichler cohomology (unpublished notes).

2.

Projective structures 2.1. Let X be a closed Riemann surface of genus p:;; 2, and let

rr: D

->

X be a holomorphic universal covering of X by the bounded

Jordan region D C C. We shall assume that the group of cover transformations is a quasifuchsian group 1

(with invariant domain D).

As usual, the holomorphic function ¢: D

->

C is called a quadratic

differential (for 1) if (2.1)

¢(yz)y'(z) 2

=

¢(z)

for all

y E 1, zED.

The space of all quadratic differentials is denoted by Q(i). Given ¢ E Q(l), let f be any meromorphic solution in D of the Schwarz ian differential equation lf, z!

=

¢(z). Then f is a local homeo-

morphism from D into the Riemann sphere P 1 , and there is a homomorphism p from 1

into the group PL(l, C) of Mobius transformations

such that

(2.2)

f(yz)

=

p(y)f(z)

for all

y E 1, z ED .

We say that f determines a projective structure on X, and we call p the monodromy homomorphism determined by f. The merom orphic functions g on D with l g, z! the functions g

=

=

¢(z) are precisely

A of, A E PL(l, C). The effect of replacing f by A of

is to replace p by the homomorphism y ~ Ap(y)A- 1 . The projective structures determined by f and A of are called equivalent; equivalent projective structures determine conjugate monodromy homomorphisms. Thus each ¢ E Q(i) determines an equivalence class of projective structures and a conjugacy class of monodromy homomorphisms p: 1

->

PL(l, C).

2.2. In order to study what happens when we change the Riemann surface X, we introduce the Teichmuller space T p of closed Riemann

ON VARIATION OF PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

89

surfaces of genus p 2; 2. T P is a complex manifold of dimension d = 3 p-3 and can be embedded in cd as a bounded contractible domain of holomorphy. The Bers fiber space (see [1]) over T P is a region Fp C T P x C with these properties:

1 acts freely and properly discontinuously on Fp as a group of

(i)

biholomorphic maps y(t, z) = (t, /(z)) (ii) every

for all

y < 1, (t, z) < FP ,

D(t)=lz PL(l, C) so that !f, z! = ¢(z) and (2.3)

f(/z) = p(y)f(z)

for all

y < 1, z < D(t).

It is the dependence of the conjugacy class of p on (t, ¢) that we wish

to study. 2.4. To study the variation of p we need local coordinates in T p. Fix t 0 < TP and put D = D(t 0 ), I'= f'(t 0 ). Let W be the vector space of functions f1: C --. C such that (2.4)

(2.5)

fl(Z)=O

forall

ziD

11(z) = A(zr 2 r/>(z) for some ¢ < Q(f') and all z < D ,

where ,\(z) ldz I is the Poincare metric on D.

90

CLIFFORD

J.

EARLE

Let W0 be the set of p. f W with supllp.(z)l; ZfDI < 1. For each fJ. f W0 there is a unique quasiconformal map w

=

wP.(z) of P 1

onto itself satisfying the Beltrami equation

in C and having the behavior w(z) = z + 0(1/z) For each p. f W0

,

as

z ....

oo •

wfl.(D) is a bounded Jordan region and the group of

Mobius transformations yfl.

=

wfJ. o yo (wP.)- 1 , y f [', is quasifuchsian

with invariant domain wfl.(D). There is a neighborhood W1 of zero in W0 which provides a coordinate system at t 0 in such a way that for each p. f W1 , D( p.) is the region wfl.(D) and f'( p.) is the group of Mobius transformations y fJ.. For fJ.

f W1 and

c/lf Q(f'(p.)),

(2.3) says that foyfl.

= p(y)of

in D(p.) if lf,zl = ¢(z). Therefore, in D we have p(y)ofowfl. = foyfl.owfl. = fowfl.oy. Put h (2.6)

=

fowfl.: D--> P 1 . Then h is a C"" local homeomorphism, and h(yz)

=

p(y) h(z)

for all

y f f'

and

z fD .

2.5. It will be convenient to normalize so that each ¢ f Q(f'(p.)) determines a unique function g

= ~ with l g, z I = cf>(z) in D( p.) . For

this purpose we choose z 0 f D and choose W1 so small that z 0 f D( p.) for all fJ. f W1 . We define g: D(p.)--> P1 to be the unique meromorphic function satisfying

91

ON VARIATION OF PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

(2.7) g(z 0 ) = g"(z 0 ) = 0, g'(z 0 ) = 1, and {g,zl = ¢(z) for all z

f

D(/L).

The most general function f with {f, z I = cp(z) is again f =A o g for some A

f

PL(1, C), and the function h in (2.6) has the form

h =A o g owiL. The monodromy homomorphism p: [' --> PL(1, C) in (2.6) is thus a function of A , IL , and ¢ . 3.

The variation of h 3.1. In order to study the dependence of h and p on A, IL, and ¢,

we assume that (A, /L, ¢) = (Ar, ILr' ¢r) depends on a complex parameter r in such a way that A

f

PL(1, C) , IL

f

W1 , ¢

f

Q(f'( IL)) for all r , and

Our first goal is to find the variation of h . Now h=AogowiL, where g: D(IL)-->P1 satisfies(2.7). The theory of the Beltrami equation (see for instance [12]) gives (3.2)

wiL(z) = z+rw(z)+o(r),

where w(z) is given explicitly by

(3.3)

w(z) = -}

ff it(()((-z)- d~d7J. 1

D

The most important properties of w are that w_ = z and only if it = 0 .

it and that w = 0 if

Since the solution of the equation {g, z I = ¢(z) is the ratio of two independent solutions of the linear equation u"(z) = - ~ ¢(z)u(z) , it is evident that (3.4)

g(z) = g 0 (z) + rg(z) + o(r) ,

92

CLIFFORD

I g0 , z I = ¢ 0 .

where of course

J. EARLE

Therefore

h(z) = h 0 (z) + rh(z) + o(r) ,

(3.5)

3.2. It will be useful to be slightly more explicit. If we write f=A 0 g, then lf,zl=r/>(z) in D(tt), f 0 =h 0 , and

(3.6)

f(z) = f 0 (z) + rf(z) + o(r) ,

with (3.7)

f

The function

is meromorphic in D , with possible poles at the poles of

f 0 , but since all poles of f are simple, the function (3.8)

is holomorphic in D . Now h(z) = f(w(z)), so (3.2) and (3.6) give h(z) = f(z) + h 0(z)w(z) .

(3.9)

3.3. The following lemma summarizes the above observations. LEMMA

1. If A,

(3.5) with

h

tL,

and ¢ satisfy (3.1), then h = A o ~ owtL satisfies

given by (3.9). In particular h*(z) = h(z)ho(z)-l

(3.10)

=

f*(z) + w(z)

is a C 00 function in D.

3.4. For our main purpose the explicit form of

h

is unimportant. We

need to know merely that h* is a C 00 function with h~ z this additional fact. LEMMA

2. h*

=0

in D if and only if

A= jJ. = ¢ = 0.

=

w_ = jJ.' and z

93

ON VARIATION OF PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

w= 0 ,

Proof. If /1. = 0 , then

h = h*

A = /1. = ~ = 0.

= 0 if

and if ~ = 0 , then

g= 0 .

Therefore

Conversely, if h* = 0, then (since f* is

holomorphic in D )

w_ z

0 = h*

z

so

/1 = w= 0.

Therefore, by (3.8) and (3.10)

f = f*

= 0, so c/J(z) =

¢ = 0.

g = 0,

and (3. 7) gives

lf, z! = !f 0 , z! + o(r), and

A=

IJ.,

Therefore

0 . The lemma is proved. 3.5. For future reference we wish to give the precise relationship be-

tween ¢. and f * .

¢=

LEMMA 3.

(f*)"' + 2c/J(f*)' + ¢ 0f*.

The proof is merely a computation. One method is to put a a 0 +ra+ o(r), with a 0

Since

f=

=

0 0.

f' /f

=

f"/f' =

Then

f 0f*, the derivatives of

f

can be expressed in terms of f 0

and f*. That gives

Finally, ¢

4.

=

a'- ~ a 2

,

so

¢

=

a'- a 0 a.

The lemma follows.

The variation of the monodromy map 4.1. Our main result describes the variation of the monodromy homo-

morphism p in terms of h*. THEOREM 1. Let A , 11, and ¢ let p: (4.1)

r-. PL(1, C)

satisfy (3.1), let h

=

A o g¢ o wll, and

satisfy (2.6). Then

p(y) = p 0 (y) +r p(y)+ o(r)

for all

y

=

4> 0 +

t~ in (3.1),

4> t: Q(r) represents a variation along the fiber Q(r). Then

f* is holomorphic in D , and

(5.6) by Lemma 3. Theorem 1 and (5.2) give

(5.7)

ay 1 to the kernel of the resolvent for D on L~ [9]. Since Qs is the Laplace transform of the fundamental solution to the heat equation on H, the reasoning in [4, §4] can be applied to give:

for all s. In order to extend (5)- (8) to non-unitary

x,

we again denote by L~

the Hilbert space of all functions f on H satisfying (2) (where the norm is now dependent on g)); then D is a non-self adjoint operator on a dense subspace of L~ and one has: THEOREM

1.1. With respect to the rmrking (1),

T()()

has a unique

analytic continuation from (S 1 ) 2 g to a weii-defined holomorphic function of

x

f

(C*) 2 g satisfying T(x) = T(x- 1 ) = T()?)

x.

for all

On (C*) 2 g, T(x) has a divisor of zeroes V consisting of ail representations

x

for which 0 is in the (discrete) spectrum of D on L~. +1

+1

Proof. Suppose the values of lx(AjW , lx(Bj)l-

and write any y (

r

are bounded by M1 ?: 1,

N

in the form y =

l

N

B/ 1 and with ni ?: 0 and

II Yi ni

with Yi one of the A/ 1 '

1

ni a minimum. Then an elementary esti1

mate of the length r(z 0 , yz 0 ) of the non-Euclidean segment joining any basepoint z 0

f

g) to y z 0 shows that r(zo, yzo)?: C! 1

C 1 > 0 depending only on

r

(see [2] or [5]). Thus

l

N

ni for some 1

111

ANALYTIC TORSION AND PRYM DIFFERENTIALS

=IT \x(yi)\ni < M1 c1r(zo,yzo) N

\x(y)\

for any

zo ( 9) ;

1

and since \Qs(z, yz')\ = O(e-(Res)r(z,yz')) as r-."" uniformly for Re s 2:

E

> 0, it follows that the series (7) converges uniformly for x

with entries bounded by M1 , for z' bounded away from z in for Re s > 1 +C 1EnM 1 . Now

9J

9J

and

is compact and Gs has only the singu-

larity 21 rn \z '-z I in ']); so Gs (z' z ', x) is a (generally non-self"

0

adjoint) compact integral operator on L~ for s 0 > > 0 satisfying (9)

Gs(z, z', x)- Gs (z, z', x)

(s-s 0 )(s+s 0 -1)

JJ

0

=

Gs(z, z#, x) Gs 0 (z#, z', x) ldz"l

T

Thus from the Fredholm theory [8, Ch. IV] we conclude that Gs(z,z',x), the kernel for [D- s(s-1)]- 1 on L~, has a simultaneous meromorphic continuation through the s-plane and the representation space (C*) 2 g. At a pole s 0 of order v, Gs has a Laurent development

l

+oo

Gs(z, z', x)

=

Rk(z, z')(A 0 -A)k,

A0

=

s 0 (s 0 -1)

k=-v

m

A = s(s-1), where the Rk satisfy:

as integral operators on L~. Choosing any basis e 1 (z,x), ···,em(z,x) for the (necessarily finite-dimensional) A0 -subspace, with (D-A 0 )ej ( span le 1 ,

···,

ej-l! for each j 2: 1, we can write

112

JOHN FAY

for a dual-basis lt\(z, x- 1)1 of the /\ 0 -subspace of D in (10) and (11) then, (12)

trace R_ 1 (z, z') = m, trace Rk(z, z') = 0

for

Kind k < -1.

Now let x' be any fixed non-trivial unitary representation of

J

r,

and set

+oo

T(x) = exp T(x')

(13)

(2s-1) trace[Gs(z,z',x)-Gs(z,z',x')]ds

1

where the integral, taken over the positive real axis say, is convergent near

since

oo

-(Re

!im[Gs(z,z',x)-Qs(z,z')]=O(e

s)r

0)

as

S->+oo,

z -> z

with r 0 = inf lr(z, yz)lz £~, yf_ II the "neck" of ~. Then T(x) is well-

x

defined in

as any point in the discrete spectrum crosses (1, + oo)

since the integral only changes by 2rrim, m V

f

(C*) 2 g

Z as in (12). Moreover, if

f

is the analytic subvariety given by the polar divisor of

G 1(z,z',x), T(x) will by (12) tend to 0 as

x

approaches

x0

f

V and

so, by the Riemann removable singularity theorem, can be made holomorphic near V. Thus, from (5)- (8), (13) gives the unique analytic continuation of torsion from (S 1 ) 2 g to (C*) 2 g; the symmetries of T(x) follow from the reflectibn principle and the fact that T(X) = T(x) = T(x- 1 ) for X

f

(S1)2g.

If

x

f

(C*) 2 g- V, Gs(z, z', x) is analytic at s = 1 and one can write 4rrG 1 (z,z',x)

(14)

=en P(z,z',x) P(z,z',x)

where, for fixed z, the "prime-form" P(z, z', x) is analytic in z' with only a simple zero at z'= z in

~.

B(z,z',-v)

"'

=_!.Len P(z,z',x) " azaz'

is the Bergman kernel for the holomorphic Prym differentials with multipliers

x,

while

113

ANALYTIC TORSION AND PRYM DIFFERENTIALS

(15)

O(z I z ', X)

=

2 ; fn P(z aaa z z

z ', X)

I

= - 1(z~z)2

+ S(z' X) + O(z ~z)

is orthogonal (under principal value) to the Prym differentials. The Riemann-Roch duality then takes the following form: if ai f C, z 1 , ... ,zm are distinct points on M and

x

f (C*) 2g- V,

m

l

aj O(zj, z, x) is an exact differential with multipliers x and double

j=l

l

m

poles at z

=

zj if and only if

aj B(z, zj, x- 1 ) = 0 for all z f

:D.

j=l

In the elliptic case M = C/Z+Zr, Im r > 0, Kronecker's second limit formula applied to the M-P zeta function for D

[6]: T(x) = \17(r)i-2

()~~- x~ -+X

2

=

4

a2 azaz

2 gives on LX

2

(0)

' x(A)

=

e2rrix and x(B)

=

e2rrix

T

where 71(r) is Dedekind's function, A and B are the transformations z

->

z + 1 and z

(16)

->

z + r , and

e[~] (z)

=

l

explrri(n+a)r(n+a)t+2rri(z+/3)(n+a)t!

n(Zg

r

for a, /3 ( Rg, z f Cg (here g = 1). The analytic continuation of T(x) to (C*) 2 : T(x)

for (x(A), x(B)) Z +Zr or

\.,.,(r)\-2 e-2rrs2 Imr

=

=

()[~ (ii-n 1 , it is seen that V always contains the (anti-) analytically trivial representations V0 of the form: (e

or

2rris·

l, e

2rri(rs)j

)

for some s ( cg. PROPOSITION

x

1.2. V- V0 is the (open) subvariety of all

< (C*) 2 g- V0

for which the cup-product pairing (17)

is degenerate (here representation

x

is the flat line bundle on M determined from the

x ).

Proof. Let wi(z, x) (resp. wi(z, x)) for i H 1 • 0 ( x)

the Prym differentials

=

H 0 • 1(

(resp.

1, ···, g-1 be a basis for

x )) ;

by Grauert 's Theorem,

we may assume that these bases vary local-analytically with

x

< (C*) 2g- V0 . Now if

x

< V- V0 , there is a single-valued harmonic

function f(z) with multipliers x such that df

WtH 1 • 0 (~), 1'/tH 0 • 1 (~) and w, 0

=

J

f w/z, x- 1 )

a~

det D(x)

w(z, x)+ T/(z, x) for

xiVo.

bothnon-zerosince

JJ

w(z, x)

A

Thus

wi(z, x- 1 )

~

for any differential wj(z,

(17)'

=

17

=

x- 1 ) so that

~ del ([Jw;(z, x) Awpi, X-t~

in this case. Conversely, if x

0

I V , Gs (z, z ', x) is analytic at s

=

1;

hence 1:Si,j:Sg-1

for suitable aij < C will be a reproducing kernel for H 1 • 0 (~) and so det D(x) cannot vanish in this case. Thus holds-that is, the pairing (17) degenerates.

x < V- V0

if and only if (17)'

115

ANALYTIC TORSION AND PRYM DiFFERENTIALS

From (17)' one can give an equation for V in terms of the Riemann (;l-function (16) and the Schottky-Klein prime form E(z, a) used for constructing bases for H 1 ' 0 ( x) over Zariski-open sets in (C*) 2 g; thus if b, a 1 , ... , ag_ 1 are generic points on M, V is contained in the subvariety of e

2rris 1. 2rris1. 2 ,e ) in (C*) g defined by

Here ~

=

(g-1) p + kP

f

Jg- 1 (M) is the divisor class for the Riemann con-

stants kP for any base point p

f

M, lifted to Cg so that the above

integrand is a well-defined form in H 1 ' 1(M); observe that V0 lies on this variety since (;lr(~-~)

=0

for any positive divisor ~ of degree g-1

by Riemann's theorem. THEOREM 1.3.

The divisor of zeroes V C (C*) 2 g of T(x) determines

the period matrix of M for the marking (1) of M defining T(x). Proof. For s, s ( Cg corresponding to the representation (x(A), x(B)) =

(e2rris,e2rris), let ui(z,s,s) i

=

=

ui(z,x) (resp. ui(z,s,s)

=

ulz,x)) for

1, .. ·, g be a basis for the meromorphic (resp. conjugate meromorphic)

Prym differentials with multipliers some fixed point p

f

x

and with at most a simple pole at

M; by Grauert's theorem, we may assume that this

basis varies analytically over all of (s,s) ( C 2 g covering (C*) 2g. Now if

x

f

V, there is some harmonic function f on

and we can write

:D

with multipliers

x

116

JOHN FAY

g

g

~ a.s. = ~ b.s-:- = 0

for some constants ai, hi, C with

""-

1 1

""-

i=l

1 1

'

i=l

The dimension of the space of such f is thus the column nullity of the matrix

J J

J J

uj(z, x)

uj(z,x)

A.

A.

1

D(x)

1

uj(z, x)

=

uj(z, x)

B.

B.1

1

Si

(the condition on

x (V~ ¢==::::;>

Now consider

is then redundant here); and so

T(x) = 0

~

" det D(x) =0

X

0

0

sj

det D(x) = 0 or

~

x ( V0

G 1 (z,z', x') has a pole at x' =X.

near the identity with 1- x(Ai) = Ei' 1- x(Bi) = ei;

changing the basis of uj if necessary so that

the tangent cone to det D(x) = 0 at

x =I

has the equation (up to a

constant):

l

g

g

g

~~

E-E- TT· • -

1 J 1J

2

l

i,k,j=l

eiek "ij Re Tjk +

l

i,j,k,f=l

EkEfTTij rie"ijk

=

0

117

ANALYTIC TORSION AND PRYM DIFFERENTIALS

where "ij is the matrix of cofactors of Im r. Thus "ij is determined up to a constant from the coefficients of eiej and then Re rij is uniquely given from the ~ g(g+l) coefficients of eiej since "ij is a positive definite matrix; the ambiguity in "ij (corresponding to some positive multiple of Im rij) is eliminated by consideration of the coefficients of eker and thus the period matrix for the given marking is uniquely deter,, mined from the tangent cone to det D(x) = 0 at x = I. §2. Differential of torsion on the moduli space Suppose 11 is a Coo -Beltrami differential on M0 = M ""' 1 \H and w(z)

z + e cf>/z) + o(e)

=

is a quasi-conformal mapping of H onto H fixing 0, 1, oo and with dilitation EIJ.

=

~I

rz

for E near 0. From the explicit construction of

the mapping function [1, p. lOS]:

-~,.

'~'11

(z)

-1,.

= '~'11

(z)

-1

= Ti

rr (~')

JJ

11

z(z-1)

s ,(,-1)(,-z)

dl"dT/ r,

'

J' =

s

c_

/z) is an Eichler integral with lc/> 11(z)l = O(lzlfulzl) as z ~ oo and with real quadratic period polynomials: (18)

If MEIL is the compact Riemann surface rEIJ.\ H formed from the Fuchsian group rEIJ.

=

1

wrw- ' then the metric

gives rise to the metric on M0 :

where

yldzl

on MEIJ. pulled back by w

118

JOHN FAY

a(z)

is a real automorphic function on M0

.

If

is the Laplacian for this metric, then the spectrum of D on L 2 for M0 Ell. y is the same as the spectrum of D on L 2 for M , and the eigenfuncy Ell. tions of D on M0 are the pullback under w of the eigenfunctions of Ell. D on ME/J.. So if G~ and G~ll. are the respective resolvents for a

r

representation y of

r Ell.

and

(compatible with w ):

G~(z,z',y)=G~(w(z),w(z'),y), z,z'f1l=f'\H.

(20)

To describe the perturbation of the spectrum of D we make use of a "weighted-mean" of eigenvalues as in [3]: THEOREM

2.1. For fixed y

f

(C*) 2 g, let ,\111., · · ·, ,\~ be the eigen-

values (not necessarily distinct) of DEll. near the eigenvalue ,\ of D with multiplicity m, and

~uppose

R_ 1 (z, z') is the reproducing kernel

(11) for the ,\-subspace. Then the weighted mean of eigenvalues has an expansion:

(21)

+4

~ ~ ,\~11

ry J... L

= ,\

+

~ {-A .[f

a(z)

R_

1 (z,

.1J

rll.(z)

~ (z, z') + 11(z) a2 R_! ozoz

~

dzdz

(z,

z)



z)J z ,=z dxdy

}

+ O(E) .

Proof. For any C 00 -function f(z) automorphic under 1 0 with multipliers y-l , (19) gives (D-s(s-l)+EA)

JJG~(z,z',y)f(z')(l+ea(z')) 1l

ldz'l =f(z)+o(E)

119

ANALYTIC TORSION AND PRYM DIFFERENTIALS

as

E ~

0; expanding this out using Green's theorem and (19) we find

JG JG l -4Jryr. . . rcz') JGaz~ cz.z',x) JGaz~ cz',z",x)+ JL(z') az~ cz,z',x) az.~ (z',z",x)J dxay'

:D for all z" ,£ z in

:D.

Now if R~ (z, z ') is the sum of the reproducing

kernels on M0 for the eigenvalues of DEll near A = s(s-1),

for

I;=

s'(s'-1) and

o,

equation with respect to

sufficiently near 0. Differentiating this

E

E,

~ ,

and taking the trace with respect to

(22) gives

i (A~11-A) . 1=1

= -e

lJ ,

R,es

:D

s ( s -1 )=A

(s'(s'--1)-A)Hs'(z,z")l " z =z

~

+ o(e)

which is the right-hand term in (21 ); here the higher order terms in the Laurent expansion of Gs do not appear by virtue of the relations (10). A Poincare-type series for the variation of the resolvent can be given in terms of the period polynomials (18): thus expressing (22) as an

120

JOHN FAY

integral over H (or differentiating (7) in e), (20) gives

# GEIL(z, z', x)l = -1 m S E=O y

~

~ Yfl

x(y)-1 dQs (z, yz') lm p ~

~1

(z)e-i0(yz',z)

with absolute convergence for Re s > 2 + C 1 en M1 from the growth condition on c/> 11 (as in the proof of Theorem 1.1); the series has a meromorphic continuation through the s-plane with poles at those of Gs(z, z', x) with twice the corresponding order. From the (anti-) holomorphic part of (21) for Beltrami differentials of the form 11(z) = y 2 Q, Q a holomorphic quadratic differential, one can note also the following remark. For fixed

x,

let '\ (r ), .. ·, Ap(r) be dis tinct eigenvalues of multiplicity 1 with reproducing kernels ei(z,x- 1)ei(z',x), i=1, .. ·,p onRiemannsurfaces M7 for r in some open set

'U

in Teichmiiller space Tg; then a differentia-

ble function c/>(.\ 1 , · · ·, Ap) is a holomorphic function of moduli on

'U

if

and only if the Beltrami differential

on each surface M7 is orthogonal to the holomorphic quadratic differentials on M7 (a "stationary differential" in the sense of [1]). For fixed

x,

the differential of torsion T(x) on the moduli space

can now be computed from Theorem 2.1, using (21) to give a variation of the heat-kernel in (3) as in [7, p. 194]; alternatively, proceeding directly from (22), one has: THEOREM

2.2. For x, x' f (C*) 2 g- V,

~ - 2 m. ~

y-Ln - - ,

1 0 occur when g

=

1

or 0, [16]. Let L(R) be the set of all Beltrami differentials on R. By this we mean that if 11 is in L(R) and z is a local parameter for some open set V in R, then IJ.(Z) is a measurable function on V, bounded in the su,p norm and the global differential 11 behaves in such a way that ll.(z)dz/dz is invariant. Furthermore, for the function 1111 on R, we require that the quantity ll11\l.,.,, which is the essential supremum of lll(z)l over all z in R , be bounded. Let M(R)

=

!11 E L(R); ll11ll"" < 11. Given any 11 in M(R) there will be

a Riemann surface RIJ. and a quasiconformal homeomorphism w: R which satisfies the Beltrami equation (2)

See [3]. We will denote a homeomorphic solution w to (2) by w 11 •

->

R 11

QUASICONFORMAL RIGIDITY FOR RIEMANN SURFACES

125

Now suppose h is a quasiconformal homeomorphism of R onto R. Let h*(IL) be the Beltrami coefficient of wIL o h, that is, h*(J.L)

(3)

If a(z)

=

=

(w oh)....../{w oh)z . j.L z j.L

~/hz, the explicit formula for h*(IL) is a(z) + J.L(h{z))t9(z) 1 + a(Z)J.L(h(z))t9(z)

(4) where t9(z) = (hz)lhz.

Since a, IL, and h *(IL) are the Beltrami coefficients of quasiconformal mappings with domain R, one sees that they are all elements of M(R) and formula (4) shows how the group of quasiconformal homeomorphisms of R , D(R), acts on M(R). Let D 0(R) be the group of quasiconformal homeomorphisms of R which are homotopic to the identity. Explicitly, h is homotopic to the identity if there is a continuous mapping g: R xI .... R such that g(p, 1) h(p) and g(p, 0)

=

=

p for every p in the interior of R. It follows that

for such a homeomorphism h, its quasiconformal extension to the boundary of R must preserve boundary components but it may move points along each component. DEFINITION. The reduced Teichmiiiier space of R, T#(R), is the set of orbits in M(R) under the action of D 0(R). For IL in M(R), the orbit of IL under D 0 (R) is caiied the Teichmiiller class of IL and is denoted by [J.L].

A theorem of Ahlfors and Bers and extended by Earle shews that T#(R) is a manifold, [2, 5, 6]. Moreover, the natural mapping (5)

is differentiable and each fiber at the point 0 in M(R). Hence, the tangent space to T 11(R) at the origin is L(R)/N and, under the pairing (6)

(f.l, (j:J) 1-+ Re Jff.l(j:Jdxdy ,

the cotangent space is Q(R).

QUASICONFORMAL RIGIDITY FOR RIEMANN SURFACES

2.

127

The variational method The importance of the following lemma was first pointed out by

Hamilton, [11]. It is a consequence of the differential structure of the mapping (5) and the implicit function theorem. LEMMA 2.1 (Hamilton). Let

which is

C1

Jl. f

N. Then there exists a function a(t,z)

with respect to t uniformly in z for sufficiently smaii t

and such that a(t, z) is in M0 (R) for each t and a(t, z) = t JJ.(Z)+ o(t) uniformly in z . Lemma 2.1 can be extended in the following way. Let S be a finite Riemann surface and R a nonempty open subset of S and M1 (R, S) be the subset of M0 (S) consisting of elements whose support is contained in R. Let N(S)=IJJ.EL(S):JJJ1.¢dxdy=0 forall ¢in Q(S)!. Here the double integral is taken over S . LEMMA 2.2. Let

Jl. f

N(S) and suppose the support of

R. Then there exists a function a(t, z) which is

c1

Jl.

is contained in

with respect to t

uniformly in z for sufficiently smaii t and such that a) a(t, z) is in M1 (R, S) for each t and b) a(t,z)=tJJ.(z)+o(t) uniform/yin z. This lemma is proved in [10]. The method is to look at the natural mapping

(7) where M(R) consists of elements of M(S) whose support is contained in

R. In showing F has surjective derivative at each point, one uses the finite dimensionality of Tit(S). Then one uses the differentiability of (7), as developed by Ahlfors and Bers, and the implicit function theorem. It is possible to prove a version of Lemma 2.1 by using the main in-

equality of Reich and Strebel, [14], and this approach will be investigated in later work. Lemma 2.2 seems to defy this approach.

128

FREDERICK P. GARDINER

Now let R be connected and of finite type and notice that restrictions of elements of M(S) to R are Beltrami differentials on R . The boundary of R in S may not be analytic. Nonetheless, by the uniformization theorem, it can be realized as a subsurface with analytic boundary curves contained in a larger surface. Thus Tit(R), Q(R), and N can be defined just as in section 2. Let f : Tit(R) -. R be a differentiable function. Then f o

R such that

fo in S which does not lie in the closure

of T. The domain D in Theorem 2 can be described in a very explicit manner. Namely, D = C- y, where y is the arc y

and a

i

(o, 8~).

=

lz = ± ie(-a+i)t: t dO,

oo)l

U

IOI

Hence it is not difficult to derive an analytic expression

for the conformal mapping g of L onto D, and cf>

=

Sg turns out to be

a rational function. The idea behind the proof of Theorem 2 is quite simple. For a let

i

(0, oo)

SPIRALS AND THE UNIVERSAL TEICHMULLER SPACE

147

Then a 1 and a 2 are logarithmi~ spirals in D which converge onto the point 0 from opposite sides of aD. Next suppose that f is any conformal mapping of D which fixes the points 1, -1 ,

oo.

As 11Sfll 0

approaches 0, f converges to the identity in D. Hence for 11Sfll 0 small, f maps a 1 , a 2 onto a pair of disjoint open arcs a 1 *, a 2 * which spiral onto f 1(0), fiO.), the points which f(z) approaches as z

-->

0 from the two sides of

ao.

Now the rate at which a 1 and a 2 , and hence a 1 * and a 2 *, spiral depends on a. If a is sufficiently small, then a 1 *, a 2 * will spiral very slowly onto f 1 (0), fiO). Since a 1 *, a 2 * are disjoint, the points f 1 (0), f 2 (0) will either coincide or be separated by a distance greater than a positive constant d. Finally if we make 11Sfll 0 still smaller, we can arrange that f 1 (0), f 2 (0) lie near 0 and hence within distance d of each other. Then f 1 (0) and f 2 (0) will coincide and f(D) will not be a Jordan domain. Complete proofs for Theorem 2 and its corollary are given in [7]. UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN ANN ARBOR, MICHIGAN

REFERENCES [1] L. V. Ahlfors, Quasiconformal reflections, Acta Math. 109(1963), pp. 291-301.

[2] L. Bers, On boundaries of Teichmiiller spaces and on Kleinian groups I, Ann. of Math. 91 (1970), pp. 570-600. [3]

, Universal Teichmiiller space, Analytic methods in mathematical physics, Gordon and Breach (1970), pp. 65-83.

[4]

, Uniformization, moduli, and Kleinian groups, Bull. London Math. Soc. 4 (1972), pp. 257-300.

[5]

, Quasiconformal mappings, with applications to differential equations, function theory and topology, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 83 (1977), pp. 1083-1100.

148

F. W. GEHRING

[6] F. W. Gehring, Univalent functions and the Schwarz ian derivative, Comm. Math. Helv. 52 (1977), pp. 561-572.

[7]

, Spirals and the universal Teichmi.iller space, Acta Math. 141 (1978), pp. 99-113.

[8] Z. Nehari, The Schwarz ian derivative and schlicht functions, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 55 (1949), pp. 545-551.

INTERSECTION MATRICES FOR BASES ADAPTED TO AUTOMORPHISMS OF A COMPACT RIEMANN SURFACE Jane Gilman and David Patterson

1.

Introduction Consider a conformal automorphism h of prime order p with t fixed

points on a compact Riemann surface of genus g (g 2: 2). In [2] ] . Gilman describes an integral homology basis (called the basis adapted to h) with respect to which the matrix of the automorphism h has a particularly nice form. For many applications we are interested not only in this homology basis, but also in the intersection matrix of this basis. Whereas the matrix representation for h depends only on the numbers p, g, and t , the intersection matrix also depends on the conjugacy class of h in the mapping class group of the surface. This conjugacy class is determined by a (p-1)-tuple of integers. For an automorphism with fixed points, only part of this intersection matrix was obtained in [2]. The purpose of this paper is to obtain the complete intersection matrix. In recent discussions with M. Tretkoff, the authors have discovered that he has devised a similar method for constructing a basis for surfaces that are branched coverings of the sphere and for computing intersection numbers of such curves [6].

2.

Notation We now fix some notation and terminology to be used throughout the

paper. For h, p, g and t as above, let H be the cyclic group

©

1980 Princeton University Press

Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics Proceedin{5s of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference

0-691-08264-2/80/000149-18 $00.90/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000149-18 $00.90/1 (paperback) For copying information, see copyright page

149

150

JANE GILMAN AND DAVID PATTERSON

generated by h . The quotient surface W/H will be denoted by W0 and its genus by g 0

.

We assume that t > 0. At each fixed point Pk (1 :S k:::; t)

of h, we can assign a rotation number qk (1 :S qk :S p-1). The rotation number is characterized by the fact that there is a local coordinate system z near Pk such that the action of h is z

1->

exp(2rriqk/p)z. (Here we

adopt the convention that a positive rotation is one in the counterclockwise direction.) Associated with each rotation number qk, there is a complementary rotation number sk (1 :S sk Sp-1) satisfying qk · sk = 1 (mod p). For 1 :S s :S p-1 , let ns be the number of sk is equal to s. It is known [4], [1] that the (p-1)-tuple of integers (n 1 , ···,np_ 1 ) deter-

mines the conjugacy class of h in the mapping class group of the surface W. We introduce further notation that will simplify many of the formulae that follow. Let

q

s

be the smallest integer s such that ns ~ 0 and let

be the integer satisfying 1

S q S p -1

and

q · s =1 (mod

p). We may

assume that the fixed points are ordered so that the complementary rotation numbers are in increasing order. In this case we have

s= s1

and

q=

q 1 . For any integer m, let [m] denote the least nonnegative residue

of

q· m

mod p. Thus the integer [m] satisfies 0 :S [m] :::; p -1 and

s · [m] = m 3.

(mod p).

The main result

Before we state the main result we shall describe the basis adapted to h. The following result was suggested by the work of

J.

Nielsen [4].

THEOREM 1 (J. Gilman [2]). The surface W has an integral homology basis consisting of the homology classes:

(1) hj(Aw), hj(Bw)

(1::; w:::; g 0 , 0::; j:::; p-1)

(2) h k(Xi)

(3 :S i :S t, 0 :S k :S p-2) .

The elements of the first set are permuted cyclically by h :

h(hj(Aw)) ~ hj+l(Aw) h(hp- 1 (Aw)) ~ h 0 (Aw)

(1::; j:::; p-2)

151

BASES ADAPTED TO AUTOMORPHISMS

(with similar equations for the classes involving the Bw's ). The elements of the second set are mapped as follows: h(hk(Xi)) ~ hk+ 1 (Xi)

(1Sk

Ka C C can be extended to an isomorphism a: L -> L. It is known that 2 77i 2 rrix

the isomorphisms of L are induced by maps e t

1->

e

t

, where x is

an integer relatively prime to t. Thus, the isomorphisms a: K

->

Ka C C

are induced by maps: COS

:!I. a

t-> COS 7TX

COS

:!I. b

1-> COS 7TX

COS

:!I. c

1-> COS 7TX

a

b

c

where (x, 2a) = (x, 2b) = (x, 2c) = 1. THEOREM

3. Let Fg denote the fundamental group of a surface of genus

g. Then there exists an injection Fg C

Proof. It is well known that F 2

:;

S0(3).

F g, and is easily seen that

F 2 C T(2, 8,8). (Consider F 2 as a Fuchs ian group, whose fundamental domain D is a regular, non-Euclidean octagon. The lines from the center to the vertices and the perpendicular bisectors of the sides divide D into 16 congruent triangles, with angles 77/2, rr/8, rr/8. The group generated by reflections in the sides of any of these triangles is R(2, 8, 8). From this we see that F 2 C R(2, 8, 8), and so F 2 C T(2, 8, 8) .) For T(2,8,8), the corresponding field is K = Q(cos [}, and t=16. If we take x = 3, we obtain an isomorphism a: K

->

Q (cos

1

77 )

,

and

176

LEON GREENBERG

1

-COS

cos 377 8

-cos 377 2

1

-cos 377 8

-cos 377 8

1

-cos 377 2

Ma

377 2

Since (77/2, 377/8, 377/8) are the angles of a spherical triangle, Ma is positive definite. Therefore T(2, 8, 8) can be injected into S0(3), and so this is also true for Fg C T(2, 8, 8). THEOREM 4.

q.e.d.

The homomorphism ea,{3,y: T(a, b, c)-> T(if,

duced by a field isomorphism a: K __, Ka (and consequently

€. t)

1s m-

ea,tJ, a y

is an

isomorphism) if and only if the following two conditions are satisfied: (1) (a, 2a)

(/3, 2b)

=

=

=

(y, 2c)

=

1,

/3 mod 2(a, b) a { (2) /3:y mod2(b,c) y =a

mod 2(c,a),

or if conditions analogous to (1) and (2) are satisfied when the triple (a, /3, y) is replaced by (a, b-/3, c-y), (a-a, /3, c-y) or (a-a, b-/3, y).

/377 y77 . Proof. Let ~ be the circular triangle with angles a77 a• b' c' wh1ch determines the homomorphism ators of T (if.

f t) .

ea,FJ,Y a ,

and let

If we extend the sides of

x , y, z

6:

be the gener-

to complete circles,

we obtain a configuration containing several triangles, whose vertices are fixed points of

x, y and z. (There are 8 triangles in the spherical and

hyperbolic cases, and 4 triangles in the Euclidean case. See the figures in Remark 2, following Theorem 2.) All of these triangles determine the

e

same homomorphism. ( a,fJ, Q y is really determined by the reflections in the circles, rather than the triangles.) These triangles have angles ( a 77 /3 77 y 77) a ' b ' c '

(aa77 '

(b-/3) 77 (c-y) 77) ((a-a) 77 /3 77 (c-y) 77) d an b ' c ' a ' b ' c

77 (b-/3) 77 y 77 ) Thus 8 is induced by a field isomorphism, ( (a-a) a ' b ' c · a,/3,y if and only if one of the following maps a extends to a field isomorphism of K:

HOMOMORPHISMS OF TRIANGLE GROUPS INTO PSL(2,

cos

11 b' cos

g:.)

( cos aa• 11 cos (311 c ' b' cos Y11)

(cos~.

cos

11 b' cos

g:.)

11 ( cos aa' 11 cos (b-{3) -b-

(c-y) 11) cos --c- ,

11 ~. cos b' cos

g:.)

(cos (a-a)11 cos (311 b a '

(c-y)11) cos --c- ,

a 3 (cos a4

177

~.

a 1 (cos a2

C)

( cos 11a• cos b' 11 cos c 11)

11 y 11) (cos (a-a) 11 cos (b-{3) --b-' cos c a '

0

We consider the case a= a 1 . From the previous discussion on field isomorphisms, we see that the map

a(cos~.

cos~·

cos

E-)= (cos ~11 ,

cos (3b11 , cos Yc11 ) extends to a field isomorphism of K, if and only if there is an integer x, such that (x, 2a) congruences

=(x, 2b) =(x, 2c) =1,

and the

mod 2a

mod 2b mod 2c admit a solution. By the Chinese remainder theorem, these congruences have a solution if and only if

'a= (3

is an isomorphism only if it is

Ka.

is an isomorphism, then a, (3, y

cannot all be even. For consider the spherical, Euclidean or hyperbolic · 1e tnang

17 ~ Wit· h ang 1es a (3 17 a, b,

y 17 L et R C.

generated by the reflections in the sides of

A.

(aa• b, fi Cy ) b e t h e group T(~. ~· t) is the sub-

group of index 2 in R( ~. ~·

t) , consisting of the orientation-preserving

transformations. Let A,

v be the angle bisectors in ~ , and

11.,

e,

m,

178

LEON GREENBERG

n the reflections in A, 11, v. If a, {3, y are even, then R(\i-.

~· ~)

, and the products

bisectors A, 11,

E, m, n

E

Em, mn, nEE T(\i-. ~· ~) . Since the angle

v meet at a point, the products Em, mn, nf have the

same fixed points, so they commute. But the corresponding products in T(a, b, c) do not commute, because in this case, the corresponding reflection lines lie outside the triangle, and do not meet at a common point. Thus if a , {3 , y are even, then T(\i-. not satisfied in T(a, b, c), and

ea, {3 ' y

~· ~)

has a relation which is

is not an isomorphism.

Since a , b, c are pairwise relatively· prime, at most one of these integers is even. The argument now proceeds by considering various cases where a , b , c , a , {3 , y are even or odd. In each case, a suitable replacement of (a, {3, y) by (a, b-{3, c-y), (a-a, {3, c-y) or (a-a, b-{3, y) transforms the situation to one of the cases: (i) a, {3, y are all odd, or (ii) a, {3, y are all even. In case (i), Theorem 4 shows that ea,{3,y is induced by a field isomorphism. In case (ii), ea,{3,y is not an isomorphism. We illustrate the argument with a typical case: Suppose that a, a, {3 are even, and b, c, y odd. Replacing (a, {3, y) by (a-a, {3, c-y)' we obtain 3 even integers, so e isomorphism.

{3 y is not an a, '

q.e.d.

It may be true that Theorem 4 is valid more generally, and that all isomorphisms ea,{3,y are induced by field isomorphisms. There is a good deal of evidence for this. An interesting case study is the group T(6, 9, 18), which has three field-isomorphism classes of non-Euclidean homomorphic images: T (6, 9 , 18)

Tl

~

T2

~

T

T3

~

T

c e

1 18 7) 6'9' 1 18 5) 6'9'

~

~

~

T T T

c c

5) 6' 49' 18 1) 6' 49' 18

c

2 1) 6'9' 18

~

T

~

T

~

T

c

7) ' 6' 29' 18

c

7 18 5) ' 6' 9'

c

5 18 7) . 6' 9'

HOMOMORPHISMS OF TRIANGLE GROUPS INTO PSL(2,

T

(~, ~' 1~)

and T(t•

~' { 8 )

C)

179

are spherical groups, and the others are

hyperbolic. T 1 is not isomorphic to T 2 , because there are 3 reflection lines through the vertices of the

(~· ~77 ,

fs)

triangle, which are concur-

rent. I don't know if T 1 is isomorphic to T 3 .

4.

Quadratic differentials We shall now calculate some quadratic differentials F(z)dz 2 , which

are invariant under T(a, b, c) and induce the homomorphisms

ea, (3 ' y.

Let 11 be a hyperbolic triangle (in the unit disc D) with angles

Jf

~' ~,

at its vertices A, B, C. Let 11 be a circular triangle with

angles aarr,

~ 77 ,

ycrr at its vertices A,

B, C.

(We assume the triangles

have the same orientation.) There exists a conformal map f: 11 that f(A) = A , f(B) =

B

and f(C) =

->

11

such

C.

The function f(z) = fa, (3 ,y(z) can be extended by reflection to a meromorphic function in D , such that f(17z) = 8a,{3,y(17)f(z), for 17 < T(a, b, c). We shall compute F(z) = Fa,{3jz) =If, z l.

Let H denote the upper half-plane. We consider conformal maps w: 11

->

H, v: H -. 11 and u: H -. 11, such that w(A) = 0, w(B) = 1,

w(C) = oo, u(O) =A, u(1) = B, u(oo) = C, and v = w- 1 . The map w(z) can be extended by reflection to a meromorphic function, defined in D. It then becomes an automorphic function, which generates the field of

automorphic functions of T(a, b, c). Geometrically, w(z) is a ramified covering of D over the extended plane

C.

It is the projection map from

D to the quotient D/T(a, b, c). Any quadratic differential in D, invariant under T(a, b, c), is the w-lift of a quadratic differential on

C,

and

we shall describe them in this way. The conformal map f: 11

->

~ can be expressed: f = u ow= u ov- 1 .

The Schwarzian !f,zl = lu,w!

(~;) 2

0=lv,w!(~;) 2 +lw,z!, or

lw,z!=-lv,w!(~;) 2 .

+ lw,z!. Since z = v(w(z)), Usingthevariable

w = w(z) in H, so that ~; · ~: = 1, we now have Cayley's identity:

180

LEON GREENBERG

!f, zl

(1)

!u,w!- !v,wl

(~:)2

Formulas for the Schwarz triangle functions u(w), v(w) are known, and can be found, for example, in Schwarz [2] or Caratheodory [1]. These formulas are the following

(2)

!v,wl

(3)

!u,w!

1-_l _..!.. +1... a2 b2 c2 2w(1-w)

When !1 is suitably normalized,

(4)

K

dv dw aw

1-!.

a(l-w)

1-!.

bF(f,m,n;w) 2

where F(f, m, n; w) is the hypergeometric function, (5)

(6)

K

l(n) ['{1- f) ['{1-m) a

['{2-n) l{n-f) l{n-m)

'

(7)

a Y(z) Summing up these equations, Fa,f..J,

=

!f,zl satisfies:

HOMOMORPHISMS OF TRIANGLE GROUPS INTO PSL(2,

{1

(8)

F a (z) a,,._,,y

=

[

~2\

~

2a 2w2 2

x!!._w k2

+

C)

1_-_b~-2

1-:-;-2 + + y-:-;-1 + --""---__;:__ _....::...__ 2b2(1-w) 2 2w(1-w) (1-{32)

2-~

a(1-w)

181

J

2-~

bF(e,m,n;w) 4 .

The quadratic differential Fa,{3,y(z)dz 2 is the w-lift of Ga,{3,/w)dw 2 , where

(9)

The homomorphism ea,{3,y: T(a, b, c)--. T

(~· ~· t)

is induced by the

quadratic differential w a,,._,,y a = Fa,,._,,y a (z)dz 2 . Summing up our results, we have the following. THEOREM

6. The homomorphism 8 a,,._,,y a is induced by the quadratic

differentials w a,,._,,y a , w a, b-a a c- y and wa_a, b-a ,._,, c- y , wa- a,,._,, ,._,,y . These are ail obtained from the Schwarzians of conformal maps. DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS UNIVERSITY OF MARYLAND COLLEGE PARK, MARYLAND 20742

REFERENCES [1] C. Caratheodory, Theory of Functions of a Complex Variable, vol. 2, Chelsea Publishing Company (1960). [2] H. A. Schwarz, Ueber diejenigem Falle in welchen die Gaussische hypergeometrische Reihe eine algebraische Function ihres vierten Elementes darstellt, Jour. Reine und Angew. Math. 75, 292-335. [3] E. G. Van Vleck, On the Combination of Non-loxodromic Substitutions, Trans. A.M.A. 20(1919), 299-312.

HYPERBOLIC MANIFOLDS, GROUPS AND ACTIONS M. Gromov 0. Introduction This lecture gives an outline of basic geometric notions and ideas associated with the conception of hyperbolicity. Very little is said here about the hyperbolic space itself (the main source of knowledge is Thurston's lectures [21]), but it is shown how the phenomenon of hyperbolicity appears in Riemannian geometry, topological dynamics, combinatorial group theory and geometrical theory of mappings. Our presentation is expository, proofs are only sketched, but constructions and definitions are illustrated by examples. The comprehensive theory of hyperbolicity is yet to be built and my purpose here is to provide motivation for future research. (Questions and conjectures are italicized.)

1. Length Spaces 1.1. Riemannian spaces with singularities Our main example is the following. Take a piecewise smooth polyhedron X C RN. The space X carries the metric d induced from RN. We get another metric if we use the length function on curves in X and define R(x, y), x, y d and the equality holds iff X is a convex set.

© 1980 Princeton University Press Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics Proceedings of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference 0-691-08264-2/80/000183-31 $01.55/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000183-31 $01. 55/1 (paperback) For copying information, see copyright page

183

184

M. GROMOV

DIGRESSION. The quantity sup (R(x,y) · d- 1 (x,y)) measures the distortion of X. One can easily show that the distortion of any topological circle is at least rr/2 and consequently, Distortion (X) < rr/2 implies that X is simply connected. Probably this inequality implies that X is contractible, but I can show it only under the stronger assumption Distortion (X) < rr/2v2. * A different approach to the distortion can be found in [10]. DEFINITION. A length structure in a space X is given by a metric and a length function on curves, such that the distance between any two points is equal to the length of the shortest curve (supposed to exist) joining these points. We shall also assume all metric spaces to be complete unless stated otherwise. FURTHER EXAMPLES. Let V be a Riemannian manifold with boundary. Its length structure is more complicated than that of a manifold due to the fact that the shortest curves between interior points can touch the boundary. Take a Riemannian manifold and divide it by a group of isometries. When the action is not free then the natural length structure again has new features. DEFINITIONS. A map from one length space (space with length structure) to another is called isometric if it preserves the distance function. Such maps are always embeddings. A map preserving the lengths of the curves is called path-isometric. Isometric maps from [a, b], R+, R into X are called straight segment, ray and straight line correspondingly. A locally isometric map R -. X is called a geodesic. There is a natural R-action in the set of all geodesics called the geodesic flow.

1.2. Horofunctions and the ideal boundary Let X be a complete metric space. The distance function determines an isometrical embedding x -. dist (x, y) from X into the space C(X) of

*Unpublished.

185

HYPERBOLIC MANIFOLDS, GROUPS AND ACTIONS

the continuous functions on X . Consider the factor space C' = C(X)/(constant functions) with the topology of uniform convergence on bounded sets in X. The space X is now embedded into C' and we can define the closure Cf(X) and the boundary

ax =

Cf(X) \ X . The

space X is assumed further to be countably compact. In this case, Cf(X) and a(X) are compact. A function h ( C(X) that projects into a point b ( horofunction centered at b.

ax C C'

is called a

The sets h- 1 (- oo, c) C X are called (open)

horoballs centered at c; the levels h- 1 (c) C X are called horospheres and the sets h- 1 (c, oo) are called horospaces. The limit set

ax 0

(or the set of the limit points) of a closed X 0 C X

is defined as the intersection of its closure in Cf(X 0 ) with

ax.

When X is a length space, every ray has exactly one limit point. (We identify rays and straight lines with their images.) The corresponding horofunction is called the ray function or the Busemann function.

1.3. lsometries With an isometry y: X .... X , one associates the displacement function oy: X .... R+, oy 0, is unbounded. Every such isometry has, obviously,

a fixed point at

ax .

(All isometries can be continuously extended to

CfX.)

1.4. The word metric Consider a group r

generated by {31' ... ' f3k and denote by

II Yll

the

186

M. GROMOV

length of the minimal word (in {3i and

lly\1

=

IIY- 1 11

f3i 1 )

IIY1 Y2 II:S IIY 1 11 + l\y2 11. The invariant metric IIY1 1 Y2 11 on f'.

to the left

and

representing y. Obviously length function gives rise

Quasi-isometry. A map f from a metric space X to Y is called quasi-isometric if the ratio dist(x 1 ,x 2 )/dist(f(x 1 ),f(x 2 )) x 1 ,x 2 pinched between C and

c-

f

X, is

1 . Sometimes one specifies C and calls

such an f a C-quasi-isometric map. Obviously, two different word metrics, corresponding to different choices of generators, are quasi-isometric. Coarse quasi-isometries. A coarse quasi-isometric map X .... Y is a map f 0 from a subset X 0

C

X to Y such that X0 is e-dense * in X

(i.e., its e-neighborhood coincides with X) and f 0 is C-quasi-isometric. We call f 0 a coarse equivalence if its image is e-dense * in Y . This is an equivalence relation if the constants C and e are allowed to vary. The following obvious fact plays an important role in connecting geometry of a space with its fundamental group. Let X be a compact length space and X be its universal covering. Then X (with the induced length structure) is coarse equivalent to the fundamental group rr 1(X). (We suppose here X to be topologically a polyhedron or a more general space admitting covering space theory.)

1.5. Convex sets A set A in a length space is called convex if its intersection with every geodesic segment is connected. A set is called locally convex if for any a

f

A there is an e such that the intersection of A with any

geodesic segment of the length e passing through a is connected. 2. Convex Spaces

2.1. Definition A length space X is called convex if the distance function is convex; namely, for any two geodesic segments x: [a, b] .... X, y: [c, d] .... X dist (xH 1 ), y(t 2 )) is convex on [a, b] x [c, d].

*In

this paper E is positive but not always small.

187

HYPERBOLIC MANIFOLDS, GROUPS AND ACTIONS

X is called locally convex if it can be covered by open Ui such that

dist(x, y) is Convex when

X,

y belong to Ui.

EXAMPLES. A Riemannian manifold is locally convex iff K sectional curvature

~

0 ). It is convex iff K

~

0 and

rr 1 =

~

0 (i.e.,

0. In the

context of length spaces one has by adapting the classical arguments, THE CARTAN HADAMARD THEOREM. A simply connected locally con-

vex space is convex. Every convex space is straight (any two points can be joined by the unique geodesic segment) and hence contractible. QUESTION. Are there convex length spaces which are topological mani-

folds different from Rn? 2.2. Manifolds with boundary Let V be a Riemannian manifold with smooth boundary B. The boundary is called convex when the second quadratic form is non-negative; it is called concave when this form is non-positive. The boundary is called k-convex if the second quadratic form looks infinitesimally as

I

n-1

aixi2 , n-1

=

dim B ,

1

where among ai there are at least k non-negative numbers. When k

=

n-2, we call B next-to-convex. ( k

=

n-1 corresponds to convexity.)

REMARK. Riemannian manifolds with K < 0 and with next-to-convex

boundary B have locally convex length structure. For example, surfaces with boundary are locally convex when k

~

0.

More generally, take a 2-plane r tangent to B and denote by K'r the sectional curvature of the induced metric in B. The following property is necessary and sufficient for local convexity of V (viewed as a length space): K

< 0 and for any r where the second quadratic form is negative

is non-positive. The proofs of all these points are straightforward.

K~

188

M. GROMOV

2.3. Digression: k-convex hypersurfaces in Rn Let V C Rn be a compact domain with smooth boundary B. The classical fact stating convexity of a locally convex connected set can be formulated in the following fancy fashion: B is (n-1)-convex iff for any straight line ~ < Rn the homomorphism H 0{e n V) -> H 0 (V) is injective. By using rudimentary Morse theory one generalizes this theorem: B is k-convex iff for any (n-k)-dimensional plane P C Rn the homomorphism Hn-k- 1(P n V) -> Hn-k- 1 (V) is injective. In this case V has the homotopy type of an (n-k)-dimensional polyhedron. The most regular behavior is shown by V's with the next-to-convex boundary: Let V have unit volume. Denote by A the (n-1)-dimensional volume of its boundary and by b 1 the first Betti number of V. Then V

contains a ball of radius e > F(A, b 1 , n), where for F one can take exp (- exp (A+b 1 +n).

Sketch of the proof. We actually find a cube C of the size e contained in V : moving an e-cube by parallel translation, we first inscribe its 1-skeleton cCl) into V such that the homomorphism H 1(cCl))-> H 1(V) is trivial. Because V is next-to-convex, the inclusion c 2 in£ oy(x) ; XtX

X£X

Y

this implies the theorem. COROLLARY.

If y is fixed point free and o~ = 0, then y Is

parabolic.

2.7. Straight subgroups and asymptotic torsion Let [' be any group and 1°

c ['

be a finitely generated subgroup.

We call 1° straight in [' if for any finitely generated ['' c 1°' the inclusion 1° c__.

r'

to the word metrics in [' 0 and

['

containing

is a quasi-isometric imbedding with respect

r'.

We call a y < [' an asymptotic torsion element if for some finitely generated

r'

containing y' we have fim n-> oo

it llYn II

=

0. This happens

exactly when the group generated by y is finite, or when it is infinite cyclic but not straight.

An example. Let f' be a nil-potent group without torsion. Then [' has asymptotic torsion unless it is Abelian. Combining this with the theorem from the previous section, we conclude. THEOREM.

Let f' be a group of isometries of a convex space. If ['

has no elliptic or parabolic elements, then every nil-potent subgroup in f' is Abelian.

191

HYPERBOLIC MANIFOLDS, GROUPS AND ACTIONS

An analogous argument shows:

If there is an

E

> 0 such that 0 y (x) > - E.

X f

X' y

r*

f

(= I'\ identity)

then any Abelian subgroup in

r

Abelian group with oyCx)::::

must be finitely generated and torsion free.

E

is straight. Observe also that an

As a corollary, we get a generalization of the Gromoll-Wolf-Lawson-

y au theorem (see [5]):

r

Let oyCx) ::::

E

be a soluble group of isometries of a convex space X. If

> 0'

y (

r*'

X (

X' then

r

contains an Abelian subgroup of

finite index. Proof. If every Abelian subgroup in a soluble group

r

is finitely gener-

ated and straight, then I' obviously contains the required Abelian subgroup. Observe that for the branched torus the subgroup

17 1 (F)

C

17 1 (V)

is

usually not straight.

2.8. The uniformization problems Let X be a finite dimensional polyhedron of K(77; 1) type. Does there exist a locally convex space (non-compact but preferably finite

dimensional) homotopy equivalent to X? The Thurston theory [21] says "yes" for a vast class of 3-manifold containing all the known examples. Let X be any finite dimensional polyhedron. Does there exist a con-

vex space X and a discrete group (with fixed points)

X

such that

X/I'

r

is homeomorphic to X? When dim X

of isometries of =

2 , we have

an easy "yes''. 3. Strict Convexity

3.1. Definition We shall assume below that our length space X satisfies the following property: for any x < X there is an e such that every sphere centered at x of radius

~

e contains no geodesic segments. (This is always so

for Riemannian manifolds.) When X is convex, the above property implies that large spheres contain no geodesic segments as well.

192

M. GROMOV

o-convexity. We call a convex X strictly o-convex if there is a

positive v such that for any convex set A C X the normal projection P:X

-->

A ( P sends x to the nearest point from A ; this is a well-

defined map due to the absence of geodesic segments in spheres) satisfies: for any curve C C X with dist (C, A)~

o,

we have length (P(C)) ::;

(1-v) length (C).

Observe that (O+O 1 )-convexity follows from 8-convexity. X is called strictly convex if it is o-convex for a positive o.

EXAMPLE. A simply-connected Riemannian manifold (possibly with nextto-convex boundary) with K ::; actually 8-convex for all

-K,

K

> 0, is strictly convex (it is

o > 0 ).

We call X locally o-convex (strictly convex) if its universal covering is o-convex (strictly convex). This is really a "local" notion, because o-convexity follows from 8-convexity of the balls of radius 0. The double construction from section 2.4 gives a strictly convex

space when the underlying manifold has K ::;

-K ,

example, take a manifold X with

-K 2

-K 1

::; K::;

K

> 0 . As a pleasant

< 0 and with finite total

volume. In this case, one can find a locally convex A C X such that the complement X\ A is bounded and homeomorphic to X itself. The double space Y in this case has the same homotopy type as the usual double of X'= X\ Int A. When X has constant curvature, the double of X' can be

itself equipped with a metric of non-positive curvature. This metric can be chosen real analytic and with negative Ricci curvature (The last possibility was pointed out to me by Ernst Heintze.) Observe that there are compact manifolds that have C 00 -metrics with K::; 0 but have no real analytic metrics with K < 0 . The proofs of these facts are easy (see also

[11]). 3.2. Closure Let X be strictly convex. In this case every horofunction is a ray function. Moreover, there is a natural one-to-one correspondence between

193

HYPERBOLIC MANIFOLDS, GROUPS AND ACTIONS

the points from

ax

and the rays starting from a fixed point Xo ( X .

Intersection between any two horoballs with different centers is compact, and thus we have the V-property: any two distinct points from

ax

can

be joined by a straight line. For any straight line f C X, the normal projection X

-->

f can be

continuously extended to C f{X) and the only fixed points of the extension are the "ends" f + ' f-

c ax

of this line.

All these facts are classical for Riemannian manifolds and the classical proofs work in our case with no problems. When X is the hyperbolic space (K = -1), there is another important property: Let A C ax be a closed set and C be its convex hull. Then the limit set of C is equal to A . This feature is probably shared by all strictly convex spaces, but I could prove it only when X is a Riemannian manifold with K '5 -1 and A

c ax

is a finite set. (Recall that the convex hull of A is defined as

the minimal set C C C fX containing A such that An X C X is a convex set.)

3.3. Isometries Let X be strictly convex and y: X .... X be an isometry. There are only three possibilities: a) y is elliptic. In this case it has a fixed point and the topological group generated by y (in the group Is(X) of all isometries) is compact. b) y is parabolic. Then y has no fixed points in X but has a

unique fixed point

X

in

ax .

This point is called the center of y.

All horospheres centered at x are invariant under y. The group generated by y is isomorphic to Z and its action in C f(X) \{xI is discrete. c) y is hyperbolic. In this case y has two fixed points y+ and y in

ax '

it generates

z

that acts freely and discretely in

194

M. GROMOV

C f(X)\ !y+, y-1. The point y+ is an attractor for y; moreover, for every compact set A, A C Cf(X)\Iy-1 and any neighborhood U C C f(X) of y + there is an n such that yn(A) C U. The point y- is an attractor for y- 1 . This classification is well known for Riemannian manifolds, and the proof depends only on the properties stated in the previous section.

3.4. Special groups of isometries X is again supposed to be strictly convex. Consider a group ing by isometries on X.

r

r

act-

is called special when one of the following

three cases occur: 1)

r

keeps fixed a point

X (

X. In this case the closure of

r

in

the group Is(X) of all isometries is compact. This is a Lie group when X is a Riemannian manifold (possibly with boundary). When X is a polyhedron, this closure is usually a profinite group; this is always so when X is one-dimensional. 2) There is a straight line f C X invariant under X . In this case

r

r' . . r . . re . . 0' where r' c r is the subgroup keeping f fixed and r e is a subgroup in Is( f) . 3) r keeps fixed a point ax . The group r can be very compli-

factors as follows: 0 ....

X (

cated even when X is a Riemannian manifold, but when the curvature is pinched, i.e.,

-Kl ~

K(X) ~

-K2

< 0' the closure of

r

is isomorphic to

an extension of a soluble group by a compact Lie group. This follows from the Margulis lemma (see [11]).

3.5. Non-special groups

r

Let

be a discrete non-special group of isometries of a strictly

convex space X. THEOREM.

a) L

There is a closed set L C C f X with the following properties:

is an infinite set without isolated points;

b) the action of

r

closed subsets;

in L is minimal, i.e., there are no invariant

195

HYPERBOLIC MANIFOLDS, GROUPS AND ACTIONS

c) the action of

r

in C f(X) \L is discrete.

Denote by L ( 2 ) the set of distinct pairs f 1 , f 2 f L. Such a pair is called axial if there is a hyperbolic isometry from r keeping this pair fixed.

r

d) Axial pairs are dense in L( 2 ), unless ail isometries from

are

elliptic. Denote by L( 3 ) the space of pair-wise distinct triples from L.

r

e) The action of

in L ( 3 ) is discrete. If the action of

r

is

uniform in X (i.e., the translates of a compact set cover X) then L

=ax

and

r

acts uniformly in L( 3 ).

r

All these properties are well known when

is a Kleinian group.

(Many of them I have learned from Dennis Sullivan.) Classical proofs use only the properties stated in sections 3.3 and 3.4. (See [6] for more information.) There is another important property of

r

that can be established by

Klein's argument: Let y 1 , · · ·, Ym C

r

be hyperbolic elements where no two of them are

powers of a third element from k.

r.

Then there is a number k such that

powers yi 1 for ki ;:: k, i = 1, · · ·, m, generate a free group of rank m . To complete the list of basic properties of

r,

we must mention

another one, obvious but quite important: Every hyperbolic y (

r

can be uniquely written as y~ where y 0 is

not a proper power.

3.6. Remarks on not strictly convex manifolds There are some conditions weaker than strict convexity that lead to the conclusions analogous to the theorem from 3.5. Consider first the case when X is a Riemannian manifold of nonpositive curvature. We suppose that X is simply connected and the group of isometries Is(X) acts on X uniformly, for example, X is the universal covering of a compact manifold. Then X shares all global

196

M. GROMOV

properties of a strictly convex space (in particular Theorem 3.5) iff it contains no flats. (A flat is a totally geodesic submanifold isometric to

Rk, k ~ 2 .) As an example, one can take a not flat surface with K

~

0 . When

this surface has a closed geodesic such that in a neighborhood of this geodesic curvature vanishes, then the universal covering has no strict convexity (because some horospheres contain geodesic segments). The "no-flats" condition is also satisfied by the universal coverings of branched tori from 2.5 when V0 intersects all 2-dimensional flat subtori in V. Though V is not a Riemannian manifold, its metric can be smoothed to a Riemannian metric with K < 0 and with no flats in the universal covering. It is unclear whether in the "no-flats" case V carries a Riemannian metric with K < 0. QUESTION.

Let V be a compact Riemannian manifold with K < 0 and

its universal covering contains a flat. Does it follow that

rr 1 (V)

con-

tains Z + Z? When the universal covering of V has no flats, the periodic geodesics are dense in the unit tangent bundle (because Theorem 3.5, in particular, d) is applicable to the universal covering of V ), but if there is a flat, it is unclear whether V has more than one simple closed geodesic. The positive answer to the question would provide infinitely many such geodesics. Of course, there are many compact manifolds with K < 0 where the density of closed geodesic in the unit tangent bundle is established. This is the case when V is compact and locally symmetric (see [17]). Another (very easy) example is provided by compact connected manifolds having a tangent vector such that the sectional curvature is negative on all tangent 2-planes containing this vector. Observe in the end that the whole discussion can be extended to a certain general class of locally convex spaces.

HYPERBOLIC MANIFOLDS, GROUPS AND ACTIONS

197

4. Isoperimetric Inequalities

4.1. Openness at infinity Consider a domain Q in an n-dimensional Riemannian manifold V. We denote by Vol(Q) its volume and by Vol(aQ) the (n-1)-dimensional volume of the boundary. V is called open at infinity (see (19]) if there is a constant C such that any Q

cV

satisfies Vol(Q) 'S C Vol(aQ). When V is orientable,

openness at infinity is equivalent (see (19]) to any one of the following three conditions: a) The volume form in V is the differential of a bounded form w (i.e., llwllv.C:const, VfV). b) Any bounded n-form on V is the differential of a bounded form. c) There is a bounded vector field on V such that its divergence is greater than a fixed positive number. EXAMPLES. A closed manifold is not open at infinity. Rn is not open at infinity. Strictly convex Riemannian manifolds (possibly with boundary) are open at infinity. THEOREM (Avez (3]). Let V be a simply connected manifold (without

boundary) of non-positive curvature such that the group Is(V) acts uniformly in V. If V is not open at infinity, then it is isometric to the Euclidean space.

4.2. Amenable groups A group

r

is called amenable if any action of

r

on a compact

space has an invariant measure. Basic properties of such groups can be found in (9]. Here are a few simple facts: A finite extension of a soluble group is amenable. If a group then

r

r

contains a free subgroup of rank :::: 2,

is non-amenable. Every finitely generated non-amenable group

has exponential growth: the number N of words with N ~~ (const)R.

II I 'S

R satisfies

198

M. GROMOV

The following simple fact gives a geometric interpretation of amenability:

Let V be a compact Riemannian manifold with fundamental group 1.

-

This group is non-amenable iff the universal covering V is open at

infinity. We shall use this fact in a slightly more general situation: take a submanifold V0 C V. If rr 1 (V \ V0 ) is non-amenable, then the universal ~

covering V \V0 is open at infinity.

4.3. Quasiconformal maps Let V be a complete Riemannian manifold of dimension n. Take a point v 0

f

V and denote by s(r) the (n-1)-dimensional volume of the

radius r sphere centered at v 0

.

J

00

AHLFORS' LEMMA.

If the integral

1

(s(r))- n- 1 dr diverges, then V

1

cannot be made open at infinity by any conformal change of metric. Proof. Take an arbitrary function f > 0 on V, multiply the metric by f, and show that there is a ball 0 (with respect to the old metric) such that Volnew(O)!Volnew(aO) becomes arbitrarily large. When 0 =Or is a ball centered at v 0 of radius r, we have

HYPERBOLIC MANIFOLDS, GROUPS AND ACTIONS

199

A straightforward calculation shows now that the divergence of

J oo

(s(r))

n~1

n makes the ratio

Approachable

1

Let V, W be two orientable Riemannian manifolds of dimension n, where V is complete and W is open at infinity. Let h : V

-->

W be a map

with the following properties generalizing the notion of quasiconformality: a) The map h factors as

where V 1 is a Riemannian manifold, the map g is a conformal equivalence and h' is a path-quasi-isometric map, i.e., for any curve const < b) Consider the balls Ur

ec v1 '

we have

e

length < consC 1 . length h'(f)

cV

as above and denote by w* the pull-

back h*(w) of the volume form in W. Our second condition is the following:


as a subgroup of the Teichmtiller modular group (Earle (3], Harvey (9], Earle-Kra (4]). We have to study the local behavior of T and T' near the fixed points. Let 11 = exp (2rri/6). The rotation constant at the fixed point of T is either 11 or 11 5 (primitive sixth roots of 1 ), the rotation constant at the fixed points of T 2 is either 11 2 or 11 4 (primitive cubic roots of 1 ), and the rotation constant at the fixed points of T 3 is 11 3 (primitive square root of 1 ). Topological restrictions (Harvey (9] Lemma 6, Guerrero (7] Lemma 1.2) reduce the possibilities to 11 , 11 2 , 11 3 and 11 5 , 11 4 , 11 3 for the rotations at the fixed points of T , T 2 and T 3 respectively. Note that if the rotation constants for T, T 2

,

T 3 are 11, 11 2 , 11 3 , then the rotation constants

for V=T 5 , V 2 , V 3 are 11 5 , 11'4 , 11 3 andfurther =. Of course the same analysis is valid for T'. It follows that < T~ > = < T'~ > with T and T"' having the same rotation constants at corresponding fixed points (T"'= T' or (T') 5 ). We conclude that and are conjugate (see Harvey (9]). Our family

0

-->

3" has a holomorphic section s : 3"

fixed point of TT: MT .... MT. Define strass point!. Locally we can write

rn ltJ

-->

0,

s(r) = the

= {u3"[s(r) is an ordinary Weier= {u3"[w(r,s(r))=O!. Here,

w(r, z) is a holomorphic function determined by the representation in local coordinates of the Wronskian of a basis for the space of holomorphic differentials on Mr (see Bers [2]). It is clear now that there are three possibilities: (1) of codimens ion 1 .

rn

= Ql' (2)

rn

= j"' (3)

rn

is an analytic subset of j"

220

IGNACIO GUERRERO

Let p be the fixed point of T: M --. M and p' the projection of p on M/< T >. If p' is an ordinary Weierstrass point, there is a holomorphic differential w' with ord p ,w' > - g'. The lift w of w' satisfies ordpw 2: 6g' + 5 > g, thus p is an ordinary Weierstrass point. If we start with a Riemann surface M' of genus g' and a Weierstrass point p' on it, we can construct a Riemann surface M with an automorphism T such that M/< T > ""' M' and the covering M --. M' has the same branch structure as the members of our family

G--.

j". Further, we require the

fixed point of T to be over p'. To construct M, first we uniformize M' by a Fuchsian group 1 of signature (6, 3, 2; g') (the points over which branching occurs can be arbitrarily prescribed) and then apply Harvey's theorem (Harvey [8], Theorem 4). The fixed point of T must be an ordinary Weierstrass point. This shows that ill We have been unable to show that l~

f 0.

I j"

(we believe that this is the

case) i.e. to establish the existence of automorphisms fixing a single point which is not an ordinary Weierstrass point.

3.

Automorphisms with two fixed points

3.1. Let T: M--. M be an automorphism fixing two points p 1 and p 2 . Assume that T has prime order N and that M/< T > has genus 1 . The Riemann-Hurwitz relation shows immediately that M has genus g = N. Denote by w the lift to M of a nonzero holomorphic differential on M/< T > (unique up to a constant). The divisor of w is (w)

(N-1)p 1 + (N-1)p 2 (g-1)pl + (g-1)p2.

Suppose p 1 is a q-fold Weierstrass point. By definition, there is a holomorphic q-differential r whose divisor is of the form (r)

o

=

[(2q-1) (g-1) +a] p 1 + {3p 2 +

o.

is a divisor not containing p 1 or p 2 . Of course, a + {3 + dego = g-1. We can choose r to be an eigenvector for Tq, Tqr = Ar. Here

221

AUTOMORPHISMS OF COMPACT SURFACES

This implies that the divisor

o

is invariant under T and therefore deg

is a multiple of N = g. Since deg

o< g

we must have

o= 0 .

o

Hence

(r) = [(2q-1) (g-1) +a] p 1 + {3p 2 , a + {3 = g-1 Now, f = r/wq is a meromorphic function on M and (f)

[(q-1)(g-1)+a]p 1 + [{3_:_q(g-1)]p 2 [(q-1)(g-1)+a](p 1 -p 2 ).

The function fN is invariant under T , so it projects to a function h on M/

where ai is the image of Pi under the projection M .... M/< T >. Using Abel's theorem (identify M/< T > with its Jacobian) we conclude that a 1- a 2 is a rational point. Conversely, assume that a 1 -a 2 is a nonzero rational point in M/. Then, there exists a meromorphic function h with (h)=k(a 1 -a 2 ), k:: 2. Let f be the lift of h to M, (f)= kN(p 1 - p 2 ). Consider = f(g-l)WkN

T

(r) = 2kN(g-1)p 1 . therefore, p 1 is a kN-fold Weierstrass point. The above arguments are of course valid for the fixed point p 2 . Thus we have shown that p 1 and p 2 are q-fold Weierstrass points for some q if and only if a 1 - a 2 is a nonzero rational point on the torus M/< T >. Now it is clear how to construct examples of automorphisms fixing two points which are not q-fold Weierstrass points for any q :: 1. Simply construct suitable coverings of a torus with branch points over a 1 and a 2 with a 1-a 2 not rational. 3.2. Let M be the hyperelliptic Riemann surface defined by the equation

222

IGNACIO GUERRERO

Choose n = 2g' +1, then M has genus g = 2g'. Define T: M --. M by z --. -z , w

-->

w . T is an involution fixing the two points over 0 and

M/ is a Riemann surface of genus g'. Note that the two points over are not fixed by T, actually the Riemann-Hurwitz relation shows that

oo

a Riemann surface of even genus cannot have an involution with four fixed points. We will show that it is possible to choose a 1 , ···,an so that the fixed points are not Weierstrass points of any order. It is not hard to see that the space of holomorphic q-differentials on M has a basis lzjw-qdzq, zkw-q+ldzq I, j k

=

0, · · ·, (q-1)(g-1)- 2 (except for q

=

=

0, · · ·, q(g-1) and

1 and q

=

2, g

=

2. Then the

differentials zjw-qdzq are sufficient). The points over z

=

0 are not ordinary Weierstrass points (for any

choice of a 1 , ···,an), so assume q 2 2. By definition a point over z =0 is a q-fold Weierstrass point if and only if there is a relation

Here P and Q are polynomials of degree s

=

q(g-1) and t

respectively, S(z) is a power series convergent near z d

=

=

=

(q-1)(g-1)-2

0 and

(2g-1)(g-1). Note that we have two expressions for w(z), corre-

sponding to the two points over z

=

0. From now on assume that one of

these has been chosen and write

We have P(z) + Q(z)w(z)

=

zdS(z)wq(z).

Substituting the expression for w(z) and comparing coefficients one sees that the existence of P and Q (not both zero) is equivalent to the vanishing of

w

AUTOMORPHISMS OF COMPACT SURFACES

223

Now w(z)=(z 2 n-s 1z 2 n- 2 +· .. +sn_ 1 z 2 -sn)'h where s 1 , .. ·,sn are the elementary symmetric functions in a

f, ···,a~ .

The coefficients of the

power series for w(z) are of the form

for a polynomial F . We conclude that the vanishing of W is equivalent to the vanishing of a polynomial in s 1 , .. ·, sn or, equivalently, to the vanishing of a polynomial in a 1 , .. ·,an . A careful analysis of the expansion of w(z) shows that W is not identically zero as a function of a 1 ,

... ,an.

In fact, the leading coeffi-

cient in sn_ 1 will be a determinant involving binomial coefficients. This determinant can be shown to be nonzero. It will be crucial the fact that g is even. We have shown that the points over z = 0 will be q-fold Weierstrass points when a pair of polynomials P~(a 1 , .. ·,an) vanish. Choosing a 1 , ···,an off the zero set of the countable collection of polynomials

!P~\q:::: 21 we obtain the example sought. DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS UNIVERSITY OF GEORGIA ATHENS, GEORGIA 30602

REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] (6] [7]

Accola, R. D. M. On generalized Weierstrass points on Riemann surfaces (to appear). Bers, L. Holomorphic differentials as functions of moduli, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc., 67(1961), 206-210. Earle, C. J. Moduli of surfaces with symmetries, Advances in the Theory of Riemann Surfaces, Ann. of Math. Studies 66(1971), 119-130. Earle, C. J. and Kra, I. On sections of some holomorphic families of closed Riemann surfaces, Acta Math., 137(1976), 49-79. Eichler, M. Introduction to the theory of algebraic numbers and functions, Academic Press, New York-London, 1966. Farkas, H. and Kra, I. (Forthcoming book on Riemann surfaces.) Guerrero, I. On Eichler trace formulas (to appear).

224 [8]

[9]

IGNACIO GUERRERO

Harvey, W. J. On cyclic groups of automorphisms of a compact Riemann surface, Quart. J. Math. Oxford (2), 17(1966), 86-97. . On branch loci in Teichmi.iller space, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc., 153(1971), 387-399.

[10] Kuribayashi, A. On analytic families of compact Riemann surfaces with non-trivial automorphisms, Nagoya Math. J., 28(1966), 119-165. [11] Lewittes, J. Automorphisms of compact Riemann surfaces, Amer. J. of Math., 85(1963), 732-752. [12] Olsen, B. On higher order Weierstrass points, Ann. of Math., 95(1972), 357-364.

AFFINE AND PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES ON RIEMANN SURF ACES R. C. Gunning 1. Let M be a compact Riemann surface of genus g > 0, represented as

-

the quotient of its universal covering space M by the group of covering translations ['. A projective structure on M is described by a complex

-

analytic local homeomorphism f : M --> P 1 with the property that for any

T

f

f', f(Tz)

(1)

for some pT

f

=

pT(f(z ))

PL(1, C); here P 1 is the one-dimensional complex projec-

tive space (the Riemann sphere), and PL(1, C) is the group of projective transformations (linear fractional transformations) acting on P1

.

The

mapping f can be viewed as describing a special complex analytic coordinate covering of the Riemann surface M. The coordinate transformations of this coordinate covering are not merely complex analytic mappings but actually projective mappings; so this coordinate covering determines a projective structure on M , in a manner analogous to the determination of a complex structure by a coordinate covering with complex analytic coordinate transformations. If f is any complex analytic local homeomorphism satisfying (1) and a is any element of PL(1, C) then the composition f' = a of is also a complex analytic local homeomorphism, and satisfies a condition of the form (1) with pT replaced by p 'T = a opT o a~ 1 ; th e

© 1980 Princeton University Press Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics Proceedings of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference 0-691-08264-2/80/00022 5-2 0$01.00/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000225-20$01.00/1 (paperback) For copying information, see copyright page

225

226

R. C. GUNNING

mappings f and f' are considered as describing equivalent projective structures. It is clear from (1) that the mapping T phism from the group

r

-->

pT

is a homomor-

into the group PL(1, C); this homomorphism p

is called the representation of the projective structure described by the mapping f. Note that the representations of equivalent projective structures are also equivalent, in the sense of being conjugate representations. The study of projective structures on Riemann surfaces is of course closely related to the study of Fuchsian and Kleinian groups, a currently very active field of research; but it involves a slightly different point of view, and suggests a different set of problems for investigation. The aim of this paper is to survey some of these problems and to describe some of the results known about them. First, however, to indicate what a complete theory of projective structures on Riemann surfaces might look like, the corresponding theory for the much simpler case of affine structures will be sketched; things are so simple in that case that very explicit results are easily obtained. Some results about the natural extension to branched structures will also be included. 2. An affine structure is described by a complex analytic local homeomorphism f: M .... C with the property that for any T form (1) holds for some pT

f

f

r

an equation of the

A(1, C); here A(1, C) is the group of affine

transformations on C, so that pT(z) = aTz + bT for some complex constants aT, bT with aT~ 0. The notions of equivalent affine structures and of their representations are the obvious ones. If M admits an affine structure then it has a coordinate covering for which the Jacobians of the coordinate transformations are constants, hence for which the canonical bundle is flat, using the terminology of [4 ]; and that implies that g

=

1 , which both simplifies and limits the theory

of affine structures. To be more explicit, consider therefore a marked Riemann surface M of genus g

=

1 ; the fundamental group

r

of M is

a free abelian group of rank 2, and a marking is merely a choice of two free generators A, B for the group

r.

The universal covering space M

227

AFFINE AND PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

can be identified with the complex plane C in such a manner that A(z) z + 1, B(z)

=

=

z +w, for some complex number w having positive imagi-

nary part; the Teichmiiller space of all such marked Riemann surfaces can be identified with the upper half plane H , with the point w

f

H repre-

senting the given marked Riemann surface. An affine structure on M is described by a complex analytic local homeomorphism f : C

-->

C such that

(2) The derivative f' is nowhere zero; and it is apparent from (2) that the quotient function f"/f' is a holomorphic r-invariant function on is hence a constant 2rric . If c

=

c'

and

0 then f is itself an affine transforma-

tion; and of course any affine transformation f clearly describes an

f- 0 then f(z) = ae 277icz + b for some complex constants a, b with a f- 0; and it is clear that any such mapping

affine structure on M. If c

also describes an affine structure on M. By passing to an equivalent affine structure, by replacing f by the composition a of for some affine transformation a, it is clear that when c

=

0 the function f can be re-

duced to the form f(z)

=

z, while when c

f- 0 the function f can be re-

duced to the form f(z)

=

e 277icz; and no further equivalences are possible.

Thus in this manner the set of equivalence classes of affine structures on the marked Riemann surface M can be put into canonical one-to-one correspondence with the complex plane C. Using this explicit form, note that the mapping f: C

-->

C describing

an affine structure on M is always a covering mapping; indeed, in the normal form chosen above, f is the identity mapping for the affine structure parametrized by c image f(C) any c

=

C*

=

=

lz(C:

0 , while f is the universal covering of the

zf-Ol for the affine structures parametrized by

f- 0. The image p(r) of the representation of the affine structure

parametrized by c is a group of affine transformations acting on the image f(C); indeed p(r)

=

r

for c

=

o,

affine transformations on C* generated by

while p(r) is the group of

228

R. C. GUNNING

(3)

for c

f-

0. It is easy to verify that the group p(r) is a properly discon-

tinuous group of affine transformations on f(C) if and only if c = r/(p+qw) for some integers p, q, r ; hence for general parameter values c the group p(1) is not discontinuous. If p(1) is discontinuous the quotient space f(C)/ p([') is also a compact Riemann surface of genus 1 , and f induces a covering mapping f* : M -> f(C)/ p([') . The order of this covering mapping f* is easily seen to be equal to the number of distinct pairs ({vp/rl, lvq/rl) as v ranges over all the integers, where c

=

r/(p+qw)

and lx I = x- [x] is the fractional part of x; thus if p, q, r are coprime the order of this covering is equal to lrl whenever r

f-

0.

To describe some further properties of the representations p

w, c of the affine structures associated to the parameter values c £ C, the =

p

representations given explicitly by (3), note that the set Hom (1, A(1, C)) of all homomorphisms from 1 into the affine group A(1, C) can be given a natural complex structure. Indeed viewing 1 as the free abelian group generated by two elements A, B, any p £Hom (1, A(1, C)) is completely described by the affine transformations pA(z) a 8 z + b8 PsPA.

;

=

aAz + bA and p 8 (z)

=

and these can be any affine transformations satisfying p APB =

Thus the set Hom (1, A(1, C)) can be identified with the three-

dimensional complex analytic subvariety

This subvariety has only one singular point, the point (1, 1, 0, 0) corresponding to the identity representation; the remaining points of V form a connected three-dimensional complex manifold. Actually of course the principal interest is not so much in the set of all affine structures as in the set of all equivalence classes of affine structures; and hence it is more interesting to consider in place of Hom (r, A(1, C)) the set of all equivalence classes of affine representations of

r,

thequotientspace Hom(r,A(1,C))/A(1,C) where A(1,C)

AFFINE AND PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

229

acts by conjugation on the representations in Hom (1, A(1, C)). If a(z) = az + b < A(1, C) and if p

f

Hom (1, A(1, C)) is described by the coordi-

nates (a A, a 8 , b A' b 8 ) then the conjugate representation p' = ao p o a- 1 is described by the coordinates

This exhibits A(1, C) as a group of analytic automorphisms of the complex analytic subvariety V, and leads to the question whether the quotient space W = VI A(1, C) can also be given a complex structure. Note first that the singular point (1, 1, 0, 0) tions a

f

f

V is left fixed by all transforma-

A(1, C) as of course it must be. Note next that the orbit under

A(1, C) of any point of the form (1, 1, b A, b 8 ) is the set of points l (1, 1, ab A, ab 8 ): at C*!, hence is an analytic submanifold of V isomorphic to C*. Note finally that the orbit under A(1, C) of any point of the form (a A, a 8 , bA, bB) where a A f. 1 is the set of points l(aA, a 8 , z, (a 8 -1)(aA-1r 1 z):ztC!, hence is an analytic submanifold of V isomorphic to C; and similarly for any point for which a 8

I=

1 . Thus there are

three categories of points of V , corresponding to the three types of orbits under the action of the group A(1, C) on V. However upon restriction to the open subset (6)

each orbit of A(1, C) in V except for the singular point (1, 1, 0, 0) itself is a submanifold of V1 isomorphic to C*. These orbits are moreover just the fibres of the complex analytic mapping r:f;: V1 --. C* x C* x P1 definedby r:f;(aA,aB,bA,bB)=(aA,aB,[bA,bB]) where [bA,b 8 ] isthe point of P 1 having homogeneous coordinates (bA, b 8 ). Therefore, excluding the singular point of V, the remainder of the quotient space W = VI A(1, C) can be identified with the two-dimensional complex submanifold wl (7)

c

wl

C* c c* X pl ' where -

=

!(aA, aB, [bA, bB]tC*x C*x pl: (aA~1)bB = (aB-1)bA!.

230

R. C. GUNNING

Note that the restriction to this submanifold natural projection C* XC* X p1

->

w1

c

C* XC* X p1 of the

c* XC* is a complex analytic mapping

!{l:W1 -.C*x_C~ suchthat !{l- 1 (aA,aB) isasinglepointwhenever (a A, a 8 ) -J- (1, 1) but !{1- 1 (1, 1) = P 1 ; thus W1 can be described as the complex manifold arising from C* x C* by applying a quadratic transform at the point (1, 1), blowing up the point (1, 1) to P 1 . Now the representation p w, c = p w (c) described by (3) for c t- 0, when considered as a point p (c), V, has coordinates (e 277ic, e 277icw, w 0, 0); and the orbit of A(1, C) through this point is the subvariety

!(e2rric, e 277icw, b(1-e 277ic), b(1-e 277icw)) : b f duce to the singular point (1, 1, 0, 0) pw(c)

(8)

f

Pw

w1;

f

C!. This orbit does not re-

V, hence represents a point

and indeed that point is

( c) - (e2rric e2rricw [e2rric_1 e2rricw_1]) ' ' c ' c '

w c c* X C*x p 1

1

On the other hand the representation of the affine structure parametrized by c = 0, when considered as a point pw(O) < V, clearly has the coordinates (1, 1, 1, w). The orbit of A(l, C) through this point does notreduce to the singular point of V either, so represents a point pw(c) < W1 ; and indeed that point is also given by (8), when extended to the value c = 0 by analytic continuation. The mapping Pw: C -. W1 thus defined is clearly an injective mapping; so distinct equivalence classes of affine structures have distinct representation classes. The mapping p w is moreover a nonsingular holomorphic mapping; thus the set of representation classes of all affine structures on M is the one-dimensional complex analytic submanifold pw(C) C W1

,

isomorphic as a complex manifold to C.

Finally considering the mapping Pw as a function of the point w

f

H,

note that whenever w , w' are distinct points of H there are infinitely many pairs of parameters (c, c') such that p w (c)= pw -(c'); indeed this equality holds precisely when c = (mw' + n)/(w'- w) for some integers m, n, not both of which are zero. Thus although on any fixed Riemann surface distinct affine structures have distinct representation classes, none-

231

R. C. GUNNING

theless for any pair of distinct marked Riemann surfaces there are affine structures having the same representations. The mapping p: H x C .... W1 taking any points w f H, c f C to the point pw(c) f W1 given by (8) is thus not an injective mapping. On the other hand it is easy to see that p is a nonsingular holomorphic mapping; thus the image p(H x C) is an open subset of W1 . Whenever c I= 0 the image pw(c) the natural projection

f

W1 is a point at which

1/1: wl --> C* XC* is a local homeomorphism; and the

composite mapping 1/J o p: H x C* --> C* x C* has the explicit form 1/fop(w,c)

= (e 277ic,e 277icw). It is easy to see that the image of this map-

ping is precisely the complement of the subset {(x, y) Indeed whenever (x, y)

f

c* XC* write

are integers m, n such that c

=

X

l:"+ m I=

=

e 277icf' y

0 and w

=

f

C*x C*: lxl = IYI = 11.

= e 277i77; then there (7J+n)/((+ m) satis-

fies Imw > 0 precisely when not both l;, 77 are purely real. On the other hand when c

=

0 the image pw(c)

f

W1 is in the subset

1/f- 1 (1, 1) C W1 ,

hence can be viewed as a point in P 1 ; and as such, clearly pw(c)

=

(1' w). Thus altogether the image p(H X C) is a proper open subset of

wl'

the union of the two sets just described. This provides an explicit determination of precisely which homomorphisms p

f

Hom (1, A(1, C)) can be

the representations of some affine structures on some compact Riemann surfaces of genus 1. Note that this provides a solution to the purely topological problem of determining for which homomorphism p

f

Hom(1,A(1, C)) there exists a local homeomorphism f: C--> C, not

necessarily complex analytic, satisfying (2); a more direct, purely topological solution of this problem might be interesting. 3. Turning then to the case of projective structures on compact Riemann surfaces, there is a unique such structure on P1 , and it is easy to verify that any projective structure on a surface of genus 1 is equivalent to an affine structure; hence it can be assumed that M is a marked Riemann surface of genus g > 1. The universal covering space M can then be identified with the unit disc tl in the complex plane; and 1 then becomes a group of projective transformations acting on tl with .tl/1

=

M.

232

R. C. GUNNING

The Schwarz ian differential operator O(f) = (f"/f')'- 1/2(f"/f') 2 plays the role for projective structures that the differential operator f"/f' played for affine structures. The characteristic properties of the Schwarzian differential operator are that O(f) = 0 precisely when f is a projective transformation, and that O(f o g)= 0(f)(g') 2 + O(g). From these properties it is easy to see that a complex analytic local homeomorphism f satisfies (1) precisely when O(f)(Tz). (T'(z)) 2 = O(f)(z), hence precisely when f/J(z) = O(f)dz 2 represents a quadratic differential on ~/1 = M; and conversely any quadratic differential on the form

O(f )dz 2

~/['

= M can be written in

for some complex analytic local homeomorphism f

satisfying (1), the most general such function f being a of for any projective transformation a. Thus the set of equivalence classes of projective structures on M can be put into one-to-one correspondence with the (3g-3)-dimensional space of quadratic differentials on M. The quadratic differentials f/J(z) on M cannot be considered as being very explicitly known, and solutions f of the Schwarzian differential equation O(f )dz 2 = f/J(z) are even less explicitly known; and that complicates the study of projective structures. Nonetheless some interesting general properties of the mappings f:

~ -->

P1 can be established.

The mapping f is not always a covering mapping; indeed it is a covering mapping only for a set of projective structures corresponding to a compact subset of the vector space of quadratic differentials, [10], [11]. The following three conditions are equivalent: (i) f is a covering mapping; (ii) the image

is a proper subset of P 1 ; (iii) the group p(f') is a properly discontinuous group of transformations acting on the image f(~), f(~)

[5], [10]. As in the affine case, whenever p(f') is a properly discontinuous group of transformations on f(~) the quotient space f(~)/ p(f') is a compact Riemann surface, and f induces an analytic mapping f* : M --> f(~)/ p(f'); and again this is not necessarily a one-to-one mapping, [11]. Most of the further questions one can ask about these mappings f and f* remain open.

AFFINE AND PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

233

Turning next to the representations of these projective structures, the set Hom(f', PL(l, C)) can be given the structure of a complex analytic variety just as was done for the corresponding set in the case of affine structures. If A 1 , ... , Ag, B 1 , ... , Bg are the standard generators of f', subject to the relation C 1 ... Cg =I where Cj = AjBjAj 1 Bj 1 , then an element p f Hom (f', PL(l, C)) is determined by the 2g elements Xj = p(Aj), Yj = p(Bj) of PL(l, C); and these can be arbitrary elements of PL(l, C), subject to the condition imposed by the defining relation. Thus Hom (f', PL(l, C) can be identified with the complex analytic subvariety

of the complex manifold PL(l, C) 2 g; this is a subvariety with singularities. The affine transformations A(l, C) can be viewed as forming a complex submanifold of PL(l, C); and the subset V0 = IZ(Xj, Yj)z-l: Xj, Yj f A(l, C), Z f PL(l, C)l is an analytic subvariety of the product manifold PL(l, C) 2 g, with the property that the complement V1 = V-V0 is a (6g-3)-dimensional complex analytic manifold. Furthermore the quotient space W1 = V1 /PL(l, C), where PL(l, C) acts as a group of analytic automorphisms of vl by conjugating all the elements xj ' y j simultaneously, has the natural structure of a (6g-6)-dimensional complex analytic manifold, [6], [7]. Identifying the vector space of quadratic differentials on M with C 3 g- 3 , it follows readily from well-known properties of the Schwarzian differential operator that the mapping

PM:

C 3g- 3

->

V, which associates

to each quadratic differential the representation of the associated projective structure, is a complex analytic mapping. The image must lie in the open subset V1 C V, since any

p f

V0 is equivalent to an affine repre-

sentation and M admits no affine structures; so this mapping actually extends to a holomorphic mapping

pM :

C 3 g- 3

->

W1 . Using the properties

of the Schwarzian differential operator again, it is not difficult to see that this mapping p is a nonsingular injective holomorphic mapping, [4], [9].

234

R. C. GUNNING

Thus distinct projective structures on M have distinct representation classes; and the image p(C 3 g- 3 ) is probably a complex submanifold of wl

isomorphic as a complex manifold to C 3 g- 3 ' although it is not yet

known to be a closed subset of wl . The set of all marked Riemann surfaces of genus g is parametrized by the Teichmiiller space Tg, a (3g-3)-dimensional complex manifold; and there is a natural complex analytic vector bundle Q of rank 3g-3 over Tg such that the quadratic differentials on a marked Riemann surface M can be identified with the fibre of Q over the point representing M, [2]. There is a complex analytic mapping p: Q .... W1 such that the restriction of p to the fibre over the point representing M is just the mapping pM ;

and it can be demonstrated that this mapping p is a nonsingular

complex analytic mapping, [3]. Thus the image p(Q) C W1 , the set of all those equivalence classes of homomorphisms p f Hom (r, PL(1, C)) which are representations of some projective structures on some compact Riemann surfaces of genus g, is an open subset of W1 . As in the affine case this mapping p: Q .... W1 is not injective; perhaps the most interesting illustration of this is provided by the simultaneous uniformizations described by L. Bers, [1]. The problem of determining the image p(Q)

c W1

is really the purely

topological one of determining for which homomorphisms pfHom(r,PL(1,C)) there exist local homeomorphisms f : L\ .... P1 , not necessarily complex analytic, satisfying (1 ); but analytic methods provide several partial results. First, since Q is connected the image p(Q) C W1 must be contained in a connected component of W1 ; and this is a nontrivial result, since W1 is not connected. To analyze this situation more closely, recall that every projective transformation can be represented by a 2 x 2 complex matrix of determinant 1 , leading to the exact sequence of groups

cP PL(1, C)---.... 0 ; 0---.... Z/2Z ---.... SL(2, C)---.... and the homomorphism c/J induces a mapping

AFFINE AND PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

~:

235

Hom (1, SL(2, C)) -. Hom (r, PL(l, C)) .

The set Hom (r, SL(2, C)) can be given the structure of a complex analytic subvariety

v* c SL(2, C) 2 g,

paralleling the imposition of the com-

plex structure V on the set Hom (1, PL(l, C)); and in these terms the mapping ~ :

v; =

g- 1 (V1 )

v* -. V

is a complex analytic mapping. The inverse image

is the set of irreducible linear representations in

Hom (1, SL(2, C)), and it has the structure of a (6g-3)-dimensional complex manifold. The quotient space

w; vt /SL(2, C), =

where SL(2, C)

acts by conjugation, has the structure of a (6g-6)-dimensional complex manifold, [6], [7]. It is not hard to see that

w;

is a connected complex

manifold; the traces of the appropriate elements give coordinates by means of which this can be demonstrated, following the approach of [8] extended naturally to the complex case. Now using yet again the properties of the Schwarz ian differential operator, it can be seen that p(Q) C ~(W;) C W1 , [4], [5]; thus each p

f

Hom {r, PL(l, C)) that is the representation of a

projective structure on M lifts to a representation p* t: Hom(1, SL(2, C)). That is the essence of the connectivity condition. The condition that each representation of a projective structure on M lifts to a linear representation provides a connection between the projective structures on M and the complex analytic vector bundles over M, since each p*

t:

Hom (1, SL(2, C)) determines a complex analytic vector

bundle of rank 2 over M; and that leads to some interesting further results, the statements of which do not require any knowledge of the properties of complex analytic vector bundles. These results principally involve an analytic invariant of p* called the divisor order which can be defined as follows. There are infinitely many pairs of meromorphic functions f 1 , f 2 on f':... such that the vector-valued meromorphic function F =

(!~)

satisfies F(Tz) = p*T F(z) for all T

t:

f'. For each such func-

tion F it is clear that there are complex analytic functions g, h on f':... having no common zeros on f':..., such that gf/h, gf 2 /h are also complex

R. C. GUNNING

236

analytic functions on L'1 having no common zeros on L'1 ; and orderMF

=

orderMh - orderMg is independent of the choice of these functions g, h, where orderMg is the total number of zeros of g, counting multiplicities, in a fundamental domain for the action of 1 on L'1 • The divisor order of p* is defined to be div p* = maxF orderMF; and it can be shown that it

is a finite integer, in the range [l;gJ < div p* < g-1 , where [x] is the greatest integer ;; x, although these inequalities are not needed here. Then the representations p*

f

Hom (1, SL(2, C)) corre-

sponding to projective structures on M are precisely those representations for which div p*

=

g-1, [5]. The explicit determination of the

divisor order of p * is as yet generally impossible, since few relations between the divisor order and any other invariants of the representation are known. However it is easy to see that div p*;; 0 whenever p* is a unitary representation; and that implies immediately that no unitary representation can correspond to a projective structure on any Riemann surface, [6]. It should be mentioned in passing that the most spectacular result about the divisor order is the rather deep converse assertion that div p* ~ 0 implies p* is analytically equivalent to a unitary representation, [15]. It is tempting to conjecture that all equivalence classes of representa-

tions p*

f

Hom (1, SL(2, C)) correspond to some projective structures on

some compact Riemann surfaces of genus g, except for those representations already shown to be excluded; the excluded representations are the reducible representations and the unitary representations, and any representations that become reducible or unitary when restricted to any subgroup of finite index in 1 . 4. The preceding discussion can be extended to cover structures with possible branching. A branched projective structure on M is described

237

AFFINE AND PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

-

by a complex analytic mapping f : M .., P 1 , not necessarily a local homeomorphism, satisfying (1); and a branched affine structure on M is described correspondingly by a complex analytic mapping f: M -> C satisfying an equation of the form (1) but with pT

f

A(1, C). Thus the only

difference between regular and branched structures is that in the latter case the mapping f is allowed to have branch points. The notions of equivalent structures, and of the representations of structures, are introduced just as in the case of unbranched structures. These branched structures were studied by Mandelbaum in [12], [13], [14]. (It should be pointed out though that Mandelbaum uses a slightly different terminology when considering affine structures. What are here called branched affine structures he calls regular branched affine structures; his branched affine structures are the more general ones for which f is a mapping to P 1 rather than merely to C . ) To discuss the branched affine structures an approach rather different from that used by Mandelbaum will be followed here.

-

If f: M -> C is a complex analytic mapping such that for any T < 1 (10) for some constants aT

C*, bT

f

f

C, then the differential ¢(z) = df(z)

is a complex analytic differential form on M such that for any T

f

1

(11)

such a differential is called a Prym differential on M associated to the representation a

E

Hom (1, C*), where

a

assigns to any T

f

1 the

value aT ( C*. Conversely if is a Prym differential on M associated Hom (1, C*) then there are holomorphic functions

to the representation a

f

f on M such that df

0. The zeros of the Prym differential c/J

=

df are precisely

the branch points of f, and the total order of the differential c/J on M is just the total branching order of the restriction of f to any fundamental domain for the action of the group r 2g-2 for any representation a

f

on M ; and that order is equal to

Hom{r, C*), [4]. Thus when g = 1 a

branched affine structure always reduces to an unbranched affine structure; so further consideration can be limited to Riemann surfaces of genus g > 1 . The situation is rather more complicated than that for the case g

=

1. Although the mappings f:

easy to see that the image

~

f(~)

.... C can be somewhat complicated, it is is either all of C or all of C except

for a single point; and this illustrates a recurrent dichotomy in the discussion of these structures. First, if

f(~)

is all of C except for a single

point then after replacing f by the composition of f with an affine transformation it can be assumed that f(~) serve C*, all the transformations and hence f(Tz) sentation a

f

=

aT f(z) for all T

pT f

=

C*. Since p(r) must pre-

reduce to the form

pT(z) =

aTz;

r. That implies that the repre-

Hom (r, C*) is analytically trivial; and moreover f(z)

=

exp w(z) where dw(z) is an abelian differential on M , viewed as a r -invariant differential form on

~

. Since w(z) is readily seen to take

on all values, it follows that f(C) does equal c*, so this possibility does exist. Next, if

f(~)

omits at least two points of C then the family

of complex analytic functions !f(Tz): T f r! is a normal family in ~;

239

AFFINE AND PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

and consequently the image group p(l) is a subgroup of A(1, C) having compact closure. It is easy to verify that the only compact subgroups of A(1, C) are finite cyclic subgroups or are conjugates of the subgroup

lz -.az: Ia I= 11; hence after conjugation all the transformations pT reduce to the form pT(z) = aTz. However this reduces to the case con-

c*'

sidered before, in which f(!i) =

contradicting the assumption that

f(!i) -f, C*. Thus the only case in which f(!i) I= C is that in which a

f

Hom (1, C*) is analytically trivial and f is equivalent to the function

exhibiting this triviality, that is to say, f(z) = ag(z) + and g(Tz) =aT g(z) for all T

f

f3 where

a

I= 0

1; and in this exceptional case f(!i) is

the complement of a single point in C . This exceptional case is also the only one for which the branched affine structure is not uniquely determined by its representation class. For if f 1 , f 2 are two complex analytic mappings fj : 1'1 -> C such that fj(Tz) = aTfj(z) + bT then the difference g = f 1 -f 2 is a complex analytic function such that g(Tz) =aT g(z); thus a

f

Hom (1, C*) is analyti-

cally trivial and g exhibits this triviality. Conversely whenever a

f

Hom (1, C*) is analytically trivial and g exhibits this triviality, then

the branched affine structure determined by any mapping f: 1'1 -. C for which f(Tz) = aTf(z)+ bT has the same representation as the branched affine structure determined by the mapping f + g; but these are not equivalent branched affine structures. Of course it is possible to modify the notion of equivalence to avoid this exception; but the modified notion is less natural while the exceptional case is exceptional in many other ways as well. Turning next to the question whether p(1) is a properly discontinuous group of transformations, it is convenient to consider three separate cases. The general classification of properly discontinuous groups of complex analytic automorphisms of C or of C* is simple and will be assumed known; details can be found in L. R. Ford's Automorphic Functions, for example. (i) The first case is that in which f(!i) = C and p(l) is the lattice subgroup of C generated by the translations z -. z + 1 , z -. z + w, where Imw > 0; the mapping f : 1'1

->

C exhibits M = 1'1/1 as a branched

240

R. C. GUNNING

analytic covering of the to.rus Cl p(f'), and the function f is an abelian integral. Note that in this case the representation a (Hom (1, C*) is the identity representation. The condition that there exists such a mapping is of course readily expressed in terms of the period matrix of the abelian differentials on M. (ii) The second case is that in which

f(~) =

C* and p(f') is a purely multiplicative group, as in the case of unbranched affine structures; again f: ~ .... C* exhibits M = ~If' as a branched analytic covering of the torus C* I p(f'), and f = exp w where w is an abelian integral. Note that in this case the representation a ( Hom(f', C*) is analytically trivial. The condition that there exists such a mapping is again readily expressed in terms of the period matrix of the abelian differentials on M . (iii) The third case is that in which f(~)

= C and p(f') is the extension of a lattice subgroup of C by a

cyclic group of order v, where v = 2, 3, 4, or 6; thus p(f') consists of transformations of the form z .... ekz + m + nw for arbitrary integers k , m , n, where ev = 1 and w = e if v > 2 . The mapping f : ~ -. C exhibits M =

~If'

as a branched covering of the one-dimensional projec-

tive space P1 = Cl p(f'). Note that in this case the representation a ( Hom (f', C*) is never analytically trivial, indeed is a homomorphism for which the image a(f') is a cyclic subgroup of C* of order v. There is a subgroup 1 0

C

f' of finite index for which the restriction p(f'0 ) is a

lattice subgroup, so the induced branched affine structure on M0 = ~110 is of the type considered in case (i); and M is the quotient of M0 by a cyclic group of order v. In all other cases, in particular whenever the representation a (Hom (1, C*) is not analytically trivial and the values aT are not v-th roots of unity for v = 2, 3, 4, or 6, the group p(f') does not act discontinuously on

f(~).

Letting Aj , Bj be the canonical generators of f' corresponding to the marking of the Riemann surface M , the set Hom (f', A(l, C)) can be given the structure of a complex analytic variety as in the other cases considered before. Indeed associating to any p (Hom (1, A(l, C)) the coordinates (aj,aj,bj,bj) where PA.(z)=ajz+bj,Ps.(z)=ajz+bj, J

J

241

AFFINE AND PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

establishes a one-to-one correspondence between the set Hom(r,A(1, C)) and the complex analytic subvariety

contained in (C*)g

X

(C*)g

cg

X

X

cg; this is an irreducible analytic

subvariety of dimension 4g-1 , the only singularity being at the point aj = aj = 1 , bj = bj = 0 corresponding to the identity representation. This reduces to the subvariety (4) when g by an element a

f

=

1. Conjugation of Hom(r, A(1, C))

A(1, C) of the form a(z)

=

az + {3 has the effect of

transforming (aj, aj, bj, bj) to

and this e11hibits A(1, C) as a group of complex analytic automorphisms of V. To describe a complex structure on the quotient space it is convenient to introduce the auxiliary 2 x 2g complex matrix a 1 -1 I ··· 1 a g-1 I a'1 -1 1 ... I a'g-1) (14)

M =

( bl

and to decompose

v

,· .. ,bg

'b~

into the three subsets

,···,bg

v = vou vl u v2

where

Vv = {(aj, aj, bj, bjhV: rank M= vl; note that each subset Vv is mapped to itself under the action of any automorphism a

f

A(1, C). Here V0 is

just the singular point of V, a separate orbit by itself. The discussion of the subset

vl

:xactly parallels that in the case g

=

1 ; thus the orbit

space W1 = V1 I A(1, C) can be described as the complex manifold of dimension 2g arising from (C*) 2 g by blowing th~ point aj

=

aj = 1 up

to the projective space P2 g-l of dimension 2g-1. On the subset V2 each orbit is a complex submanifold of V2 of the form {(aj, aj, abj- {3(aj -1), abj-f3(aj-1): a£C*,{3ECI, hence as a complex manifold is equivalent to C*x C; the orbit through any point (aj, aj, bj, bj) is the product of the

242

R. C. GUNNING

point (aj, ap f (C*) 2 g with a two-dimensional linear subspace L C C 2 g containing the complex line joining the point (ar1, aj-1) ( C2 g to the origin. Note that when (aj-1, aj-1) = (1, 0, · · ·, 0) ( C2 g each such twodimensional linear space L can be described by a point (O,z 2 ,···,z 2 g)fL for which not all of the coefficients z 2 , ···,z 2 g are zero, and two such points (O,z 2 , ···,z 2 g) and (O,z;, ···,z;g) describe the same linear subspace precisely when (z;, ···, z;g) = (cz 2 ,

···,

cz 2 g) for some c f C*;

thus this. set of linear subspaces is parametrized by the complex projective space P2 g_ 2 of dimension 2g-2. Since the points (aj-1, aj-1) can be reduced to the form (1, 0, · · ·, 0) by nonsingular linear changes of coordinates in C2 g, and these changes can moreover be taken to be complex analytic functions of the variables aj , W2

=

aj

locally, it follows that

V2 / Aut (1, C) can be described as an analytic subvariety of dimen-

sion 4g-3 contained in a complex analytic P2 g_ 2 -bundle over (C*) 2 g. The identity homomorphism p f V0 cannot be the representation of any branched affine structure on M, since C/ p(r) is not compact. For a homomorphism p f V1 either pT is a pure translation for each T ( r (in case aj = aj = 1 ), or after suitable conjugation pT(z) = aTz for each T ( r . In these cases ture f: L\

->

p

is the representation of a branched affine struc-

C on M only when f(z) = w(z) or f(z) = exp w(z) for some

abelian differential dw on M; thus the possible representations p can be determined explicitly from the period matrix of the abelian differentials on M . "The only homomorphisms

p

f V1 that can be the representations

of some branched affine structures on some Riemann surfaces M are those for which the quotients C/ p(r) or C* I p(r) are compact; but it is not clear that enough is yet known about the possible period matrices of Riemann surfaces to show that all these homomorphisms can be representations of some branched affine structures. Determining which homomorphisms p f V2 are representations of branched affine structures on M leads to the difficult problem of determining the period classes of Prym differentials on M. Again it is tempting to conjecture that all

p (

V2 for

which C/ p(r) is compact are representations of some branched affine structures on some Riemann surfaces.

243

AFFINE AND PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

5. Mandelbaum's approach to these branched structures involves examining the meromorphic functions f"/f' or O(f), and leads to interesting results about the branch points of the mapping f; details can be found in his papers [12], [13], [14]. Let it suffice here, in conclusion, to report that he demonstrates that any p

f

Hom (r, PL(1, C)) is the representation of some

branched projective structure on some Riemann surface. What is much more interesting, though, is his result that on a fixed compact Riemann surface M of genus g > 1 , any irreducible homomorphism p

f

Hom(r, PL(1, C)) for which div p

=

k is the representation of a

branched projective structure with branching order 2g - 2 - 2k ; and conversely, if p is irreducible and is the representation of a branched projective structure with branching order 2g- 2 - 2k then div p ;:; k, and this is actually an equality if k ;:; 0, [14]. REFERENCES [1]

L. Bers. Simultaneous uniformization. Bull. American Math. Soc. 66 (1 %0), 94-97.

[2]

. Fiber spaces over Teichmiiller spaces. Acta Math. 130 (1973), 89-126.

[3]

C.

[4]

R. C. Gunning. Lectures on Riemann Surfaces. Princeton University Press, (Mathematical Notes 2), 1966.

[5]

. Special coordinate coverings of Riemann surfaces. Math. Annalen 170(1967), 67-86.

[6]

. Lectures on Vector Bundles over Riemann- Surfaces. Princeton University Press, (Mathematical Notes 6), 1967.

[7]

. Analytic structures on the space of flat vector bundles over a compact Riemann surface. Several Complex Variables II, Maryland, 1970. Springer Lecture Notes 185(1971), 47-62.

[8]

H, Helling. Diskrete Untergruppen von SL 2 (R). Invent. Math. 17 (1972), 217-229.

[9] [10]

J. Earle. On variation of projective structures. This volume.

I. Kra. On affine and projective structures on Riemann surfaces.

J. d'Analyse Math. 22(1%9), 285-298.

. Deformations of -Fuchs ian groups, I, II. Duke Math. (1969), 537-546 and 38(1971), 499-508.

J.

36

244

R. C. GUNNING

[11] I. Kra and B. Maskit. Remarks on projective structures. This volume.

[12] R. Mandelbaum. Branched- structures on Riemann surfaces. Trans. American Math. Soc. 163(1972), 261-275. [13]

. Branched structures and affine and projective bundles on Riemann surfaces. Trans. American Math. Soc. 183(1973), 37-58.

[14]

. Unstable bundles and branched structures on Riemann surfaces. Math. Annalen 214(1975), 49-59.

[15] M.S. Narasimhan and C. S. Seshadri. Stable and unitary vector bundles on a compact Riemann surface. Annals of Math. 82 (1965), 540-567.

BOUNDARY STRUCTURE OF THE MODULAR GROUP

W. J. Harvey*

§0. Introduction In this note we introduce a simplicial structure for the collection of simple loops in a surface, with the main purpose in mind being to provide an appropriate combinatorial framework for studying the geometry of how the modular group r(S) of a surface S acts at infinity on the Teichmiiller space T(S). A model for such a study is the paper of Borel and Serre [4], which analyses the structure of arithmetic groups by adding suitable boundary components to the relevant homogeneous spaces. We content ourselves here with a description of the basic facts and some simple deductions. A detailed study of the implied algebraic structure for the modular group and a related geometric description of the compactified space of moduli will appear elsewhere. The main point which emerges is the remarkable closeness of the analogy with arithmetic groups; underneath the definite lack of homogeneity in the complex analytic character of Tg, there lies concealed a beautiful real analytic structure which is mirrored in the action of rg.

*Preliminary report presented at the Riemann surfaces conference in July 1978 at S.U.N.Y., Stony Brook. Partial support for the work was provided by NSF Grant MCS 77-18723 AOl. The author is grateful for the hospitality of the Institute for Advanced Study during preparation of this manuscript. © 1980 Princeton University Press Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics Proceedin~s of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference 0-6 91-08264-2/80/000245-07 $00.50/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000245-07$00.50/1 (paperback) For copying information, see copyright page

245

246

W.j.HARVEY

I want to record here my indebtedness to J.-P. Serre, both for rendering palatable to my tender stomach the rich diet of buildings and arithmetic groups and for demonstrating that one should not be put off by locally infinite phenomena. After all, think of the structure of a cusp! §2. Partitions of a surface Let S be a surface of finite type (g, n). We denote by ~(S) the set of all partitions of S . These are systems A of disjoint simple loops in S , such that (i)

no loop in A bounds either a disc in S or a single boundary component of S;

(ii) no pair of loops form the boundary of an annulus.

The group of all homeomorphisms of S acts naturally on

~(S), and

the orbit of A consists of all partitions which determine topologically equivalent ways of dissecting the surface. Normally we regard as identical two partitions that are equivalent by a homeomorphism isotopic to the identity, and our aim is to understand how the group r(S) of isotopy classes of homeomorphisms acts on the classes of ~(S) . We observe that ~(S) is partially ordered by inclusion, so that it is possible to assemble

~

as an abstract simplicial complex by taking

singleton loops as vertices with edges corresponding to pairs of loops, the edge joining the vertices representing the individual loops of the pair, and so on. For a k-simplex, which represents a partition by k+1 loops, there will be k +1 faces, each a (k-1)-simplex obtained by omission of one loop. The resulting simplicial complex is denoted

§{s)

or

§'.

It plays

in the theory the role of Tits building, although it lacks certain essential features of that object. PROPOSITION

1. /!J{S) is a thick chamber complex of dimension N -1

(N =3g+n-3), on which f'(S) operates simplicially. The quotient is a finite complex.

BOUNDARY STRUCTURE OF THE MODULAR GROUP

247

[A chamber complex (see for instance [11]) of dimension m is a simplicial complex with the property that every simplex is a face of some m-simplex. It is termed thick if each (m-1)-simplex abutts at least three m-simplices

(chambers).] Any partition extends to a maximal one with 3g + n- 3 loops, which determines a chamber. This can be done in infinitely many ways if A has fewer than N loops since some subsurface of S \A must have negative Euler characteristic and thus contains infinitely many distinct simple loops. Therefore /!!'is locally infinite. We shall abuse notation by using the same symbol for the geometric realization of of all functions ,\ from the vertex set

/!J: which is the space

~ to [0, 1] whose support is a

simplex and which are such that the sum of the ,\-values is 1 . Equipped with the weak topology,

f!J{s)

is a C- W complex, on which r(S) acts

by the rule

for ..\

f

/!f' and

g

f

r. This action is certainly simplicial, and a finite

connected subcomplex

Xr:; /!!'

containing a simplex from every r-orbit

is easily obtained by choosing one partition for each of the finite number of ways in which S can be dissected into a collection of 3-holed spheres. After passing to the barycentric subdivision of /!!'(and construct a precise fundamental domain; the quotient

(f{),

f!Jir

one can

is therefore a

triangulable finite complex. EXAMPLES. (a) In genus 1 with 1 hole /!!'is a discrete set of vertices. The quotient is a point. (b) If S has genus 2, there are two orbits of 2-simplices which represent the following partitions:

W.J.HARVEY

248

In the barycentric subdivision of

:J{,

we find the shaded fundamental

region.

Notice that all the loops are fixed setwise up to homotopy by the hyperelliptic involution. We end this section by stating the following elementary yet powerful result (cf. Birman's discussion in (D.G] Chapter 6). PROPOSITION

2.

/!i(s)

is connected if it has positive dimension.

The proof consists in determining, for a given pair of loops f, ( in

s

(with intersection number m > 0 ), how to walk from

e to

e'

by a

sequence of loops each disjoint from its predecessor. If m = 1 , this is two steps when S has type (g, n) ~ (1, 1), and if m > 1, an inductive argument due to Lickorish (9] applies. Since this implies that r{S) is generated by stability groups of vertices, one obtains by induction on the topological type of S the corollary that r(S) is generated by a finite number of Dehn twists. A more careful study yields the precise form of Lickorish's result, as sharpened recently by Humphries, that 2g + 1 twists are sufficient to generate r(Sg, 0 ).

§2. The cuspidal boundary of Teichmiiller space A method used by several authors ([1], [2], (6], [7]) to construct a compacification of T(S)/r(S) has important connections with the complex

/!i(s)

of §1. It stems from the observation that to any given partition A of S

BOUNDARY STRUCTURE OF THE MODULAR GROUP

249

there is associated a way to degenerate the surface into a singular topological space, known as a surface with nodes, or stable surface, by shrinking of the loops in A to points. Formally, we make the following definition. DEFINITION.

The stable surface SA of a partition A i.s the topological

space S/-A, obtained from the equivalence relation "'A determined by the rule x "'A y

¢::=:::?

x and y lie on the same loop of A . ~·-·

The projection of loops in A to SA determines the set of nodes in SA. Note that homotopically equivalent partitions determine isomorphic stable surfaces; again we shall abuse notation by identifying these. The partial ordering on partitions induces a partial ordering on stable surfaces, according to which there exists a morphism from SA to SA' whenever A C A' -here a morphism is a continuous map whose fibers are either points or simple loops, disjoint and homotopically distinct from the nodes of SA. For our purposes we regard all boundary components of S as points and require morphisms to fix each one. Now one associates to each partition A of S a Teichmiiller space of stable surfaces T A= T(SA) which classifies marked complex structures

on SA. A natural way to parametrize T A comes from the well-known Fenchel-Nielsen coordinates, taken with respect to some maximal partition

A 0 containing A. These determine a homeomorphism from T(S) onto the product of N = 3g + n- 3 copies of f) = R x R+ , well defined after choice of an ordering A 0 , with the R+-components representing the set of lengths for the minimal geodesics in the homotopy classes of loops in A 0 , measured in the Riemannian metric on S given by the choice of complex structure Sx

f

T(S), and R-components giving the twist parameters

which describe the procedure for assembling Sx from the component parts of S \A 0 in terms of angular deviation from a fixed one. For more details, the reader is referred to [D.G] Chapter 9 and further references to be found there.

250

W.J.HARVEY

The various faces of the corner R~ obtained by setting A-lengths to 0 are now to be viewed as the result of shrinking S by the relation -A for the various A C A 0 which amounts to identifying a given face with a parametrization of the product of T-spaces for the parts of S \A with the

A-twist parameters added. In view of the naturality of the procedures and the mutual compatibility of changing to different maximal partitions, it turns out that one can adjoin to T(S) in this fashion the various boundary components aTA for all A ( fYJ(S), with appropriate identifications arising from the partial ordering corresponding to the procedure of collapsing TA' onto TA c aTA' when A' cA. This is the cuspidal boundary

structure for T(S) which we denote aT(S). THEOREM

1. The bordified space

T

U aT is a connected Hausdorff

real analytic manifold with boundary, on which the Teichmiiller modular group

r

acts properly discontinuously.

THEOREM

2. There is a weak homotopy equivalence between aT(S) and

the complex

/!i(S) equivariant with respect to the two r(S)-actions.

The boundary structure is closely related to the boundaries studied by Abikoff, by Bers and by Earle and Marden, and all have a common root in Mumford's work on stable curves and the studies of Bers and Maskit (2, 10] on Kleinian groups. The main novelty here is that one blows up one real dimension for each degeneration curve, thereby rendering the action of

res)

proper, since the stability group of a boundary component TA

X

R#(A)

contains the group of Dehn twists about the loops of A and these act as translations on the corresponding twist parameter space R#(A). §3. Comments The Fenchel-Nielsen coordinates are in some respects more naturally defined by using the reciprocal of the lengths of A-loops as R+ variables. It is then possible to make canonical the A-shrinking process as passage

to the cusp at

oo

for the translation group of Dehn twists about A-curves,

BOUNDARY STRUCTURE OF THE MODULAR GROUP

251

and there is then a natural interpretation in terms of the action of SL 2 (R)N on ~N. As a final remark we observe that it is an easy consequence of Theorem 2 that the quotient moduli space

[J({s) =

T(S) U aT(S)/f'(S) is

a compact real analytic space with boundary. Known properties of f'(S) imply (see e.g. [8]) that there is a finite covering of

ffcs)

that is a

smooth manifold. This result does not extend immediately to the complex analytic Mumford compactification of moduli space. REFERENCES [D.G] Discrete Groups and Automorphic Functions (edited by W. J. Harvey), Acad. Press (London), 1977. [1] W. Abikoff, "Degenerating families of Riemann surfaces," Ann. of Math 105(1977), 29-44. [2] L. Bers, "On boundaries of Teichmiiller spaces and on Kleinian groups I," Ann. of Math. 91 (1970), 570-600. [3] , "Spaces of degenerating Riemann surfaces," in Ann. of Math Studies no. 79(1974), 43-55. [4] A. Borel and J.-P. Serre, "Corners and Arithmetic Groups," Comment. Math. Helv. 48(1973), 436-491. [5] P. Deligne and D. Mumford, "The irreducibility of the space of curves of given genus," Publ. Math. I.H.E.S. 36(1969). [6] C. J. Earle and A. Marden, unpublished (but see reference [D.G], Chapter 8). [7] W. J. Harvey, "Chabauty spaces of discrete groups," in Ann. of Math Study no. 79(1974), 239-246; see also Chapter 9 of [D.G]. [8] , "Geometric structure of surface mapping-class groups," in Homological Group Theory (ed. C. T. C. Wall), London Mathematical Society Lecture Notes #36, Cambridge University Press (1979), 255-269. [9] W. B. R. Lickorish, "A finite set of generators for the homeotopy group of a 2-manifold," Proc. Comb. Phil. Soc. 60(1964), 769-778. (Also corrigendum, ibid., 62 (1966), 679-681.) [10] B. Maskit, "On boundaries of Teichmuller spaces and on Kleinian groups II," Ann. of Math. 91 (1970), 607-639. [11] J. Tits, Buildings of spherical type and finite B- N pairs, Lecture Notes in Math 386, Springer Verlag 1974.

A REALIZATION PROBLEM IN THE THEORY OF ANALYTIC CURVES Maurice Heins

1. My talk at the Conference was based on a paper [3] that appeared in the volume of the Bulletin of the Greek Mathematical Society dedicated to the memory of Christos Papakyriakopoulos. For this reason, the present note has the restricted objective of summarizing the paper and of indicating two further realization problems that may be treated with the aid of the methods of the paper. We start with these related questions. 2. One of these is the problem of characterizing up to conformal equivalence a Weierstrass class [2] taken with its center map. The answer is simply stated. The pairs, (Weierstrass class, associated center function), are conformally equivaleni: to exactly the pairs (S, f), where S is a noncompact Riemann surface and f is a locally simple analytic function on S. By the Gunning-Narasimhan solution [1] of the problem of Karl Stein concerning the existence of locally simple analytic functions on noncompact Riemann surfaces, all noncompact Riemann surfaces admit locally simple analytic functions. Consequently, there exists a Weierstrass class conformally equivalent to a given noncompact Riemann surface. Further, for a giver. pair (S, f) there exists g analytic on S such that (S, f, g) is equivalent to an

© 1980 Princeton University Press Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics ProceedinJ2s of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference 0-691-08264-2/80/000253-03$00.50/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000253-03$00.50/1 (paperback) For copying information, see copyright page

253

254

MAURICE HEINS

analytic entity ( = analytische Gebilde) so that the Weierstrass class induced by (S, f, g) does not admit adjunction of poles or algebraic elements. On communicating this result to Robert Gunning at the Conference I learned from him that essentially the same question had been proposed to him by Barry Simon of Princeton University. I am indebted to Robert Gunning for this information and for also stating to me a second problem proposed by Barry Simon, namely: Given a region 0 C2

c

C, does there exist a holomorphic map of 0 into

whose first projection is the identity map on

n

and which is maximal

in the sense that it is not representable as the composition of a (univalent) holomorphic map of a Riemann surface S into C 2 and a proper injective holomorphic map of

n

into

s?

This problem has an affirmative answer as does its generalization which replaces 0 by a noncompact Riemann surface and takes the first projection as a given analytic function on S . It is planned to give a unified account of these questions in the Pro-

ceedings of the projected 1979 Durham Instructional Conference (to appear in the L .M.S. Series of the Academic Press). 3. The problem treated in my talk is the following: Let F be holomorphic on C 2 , not the constant 0, but taking the value zero somewhere. Such F will be termed allowed. Let A be an analytic entity annihilating F in the sense that with c and v denoting respectively the center and value functions of A the equality F[c(p), v(p)]

=

0 holds for all p (A such that (c(p), v(p)) ( C 2 . One asks

for the conformal equivalence classes containing such A . The answer is simple: all. Given a Riemann surface S, there exist an allowed F and an analytic entity A that is conformally equivalent to S and annihilates F. The facts are classical for compact S. It suffices to refer to the results concerning the problem of Riemann and Klein, cf. [2].

THEORY OF ANALYTIC CURVES

255

To treat the case where S is not compact we proceed as follows. We construct with the aid of the theorem of Behnke and Stein and PickNevanlinna interpolation theory on Riemann surfaces analytic functions f and g on S which have the following properties: (1) C 1 (liz I< r l) is not empty and its components are relatively com-

pact, 0

< r < + oo.

(2) Let

n

be a component of C 1 (l[z I< r!). Then f has a zero on

each component of

s ~ n.

(3) 0/ g(S). (4) For some a < C such that f has multiplicity one at each point of f~ 1 (lal)

it is the case that g[f~ 1 (lal) is univalent.

(5) The infinite product

(3.1)

II

[

f(p )=z

w Jn(p;f) g(p)

1~­

is uniformly convergent on liz I;::; rl x llw I;::; rl, 0 < r < + oo. We see that the infinite product defines an allowed F which is annihilated by the pair (f, g). Further, it is concluded with the aid of (1), (2), and (4) that (S, f, g) is equivalent to an analytic entity taken together with its center and value functions. These facts permit us to conclude that the analytic entity induced by (S, f, g) annihilates F. We conclude that every conformal equivalence class of Riemann surfaces contains an annihilator of an allowed F . UNIVERSITY OF MARYLAND COLLEGE PARK, MARYLAND 20742

REFERENCES

[1] Gunning, R. C. and Narasimhan, R., Immersion of open Riemann surfaces. Math. Ann. 174, 103-108 (1967). [2] Heins, M., Complex Function Theory. New York and London. Academic Press, 1968. .. , A realization problem in the theory of analytic curves. Bull. [3] Gr. Math. Soc., Papakyriakopoulos Memorial Volume 1978.

THE MONODROMY OF PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES John H. Hubbard

Introduction In this paper we shall give a new proof of the result, due to Hejhal [5], that the map associating to an isomorphism class of projective structures its conjugacy class of monodromy homomorphisms is a local homeomorphism. We shall follow the following plan: show that the domain (Prop. 1) and the range (Prop. 4) are manifolds, identify their tangent spaces (Prop. 2 and 4), and compute the derivative of the map above. It turns out that one space is an Eichler cohomology space and the other is the cohomology of a group; they are canonically isomorphic by a classical theorem of algebraic topology. The derivative is the canonical isomorphism. The idea of using differential calculus on this problem is not new: both Earle [2] and Gunning [4] have proposed similar proofs; this paper explains the appearance of Eichler cohomology in their computations. Many of the other results I establish in this paper were already known to Hejhal, Kra, Gunning, Maskit, Earle, Weiland no doubt others. The exposition is, I hope, in the spirit of Gunning's book and in fact the paper is largely a matter of putting parameters in arguments appearing there. I wish to thank Earle, Douady, Kra, and Gunning for helpful conversations, and the N .S.F. for financial support during part of the preparation of this paper.

© 1980 Princeton University Press Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics Proceedings of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference 0-691-08264-2/80/000257-19$00.95/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000257-19$00.95/1 (paperback) For copying information, see copyright page

257

258

JOHN H. HUBBARD

NOTATION.

P 1 is the complex projective line (the Riemann Sphere)

G = PGLiC) = Aut P 1 ; A C G is the subgroup of affine maps z

1->

~

=

az +b. pgl 2 (C)

=

Space of analytic vector fields on P 1 .

The adjoint action of G on ~ corresponds to the direct image of the corresponding vector fields. We will speak of the fundamental group of a space only after a universal covering space has been chosen; the fundamental group is then the group of automorphisms of the universal covering space. All universal covering maps will be denoted u .

1.

Projective structures A projective atlas on a Riemann surface X is an open cover U i of

X and analytic maps ai : U i .... P 1 which are homeomorphisms onto their images such that aj

o

ai 1 is the restriction to ai(Ui n Uj) of an element

of G. Two projective atlases are equivalent if together they form a projective atlas; a projective structure on X is an equivalence class of projective atlases. EXAMPLES.

(i) If X is compact of genus 2' 2 and H is the upper

half plane, there is a covering map u: H .... X by the uniformization theorem. Sections of u over simply-connected open subsets of X define a projective atlas. (ii) Other planar covering spaces of X, such as the Schottky covering space, can be used to describe projective structures. (iii) If r

cC

is a lattice and X

=

C/r, appropriate restrictions of

the canonical coordinate z of C define a projective structure on X as above; restrictions of eaz also do for any a< C-{01. In these cases, the changes of coordinates are affine; a projective structure which can be defined by an affine atlas is called an affine structure.

259

THE MONODROMY OF PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

-

Let a be a projective structure on a Riemann surface X, and X be

-

a universal covering space of X, with u : X .... X the covering map. LEMMA

1. (i) There exists an analytic map f: X --> P 1 such that on any

contractible open subset U C X the composition f chart. Any other such map is of the form a

o

o

u- 1

is a projective

f for some a

f

G.

(ii) To every such f there corresponds a unique homomorphism Pf:rr 1 (X)-->G suchthat Pf(y)of=foy, and Paof=aopfoa- 1

.

Proof. Cover X by open subset Ui on which u is injective, and such that there exist projective charts ai: u(Ui) .... P 1 ; let {3i = ai ou- 1 . Then aij.= aj oai- 1 is a 1-cocycle on X with values in G. Since X is contractible, this cocycle is a coboundary, after refining the cover if necessary, and there exist ai

f

G such that aij = aj 1 a ai. Then on Ui

ai ai = aj aj so all the ai 0

0

0

n Uj ,

ai are restrictions of a global map

f : X .... P 1 with the appropriate properties. The second part of (i) is obvious. In any Ui there is a homomorphism Pf,i: rr 1 (X)--> G such that Pf,i(y)of(x) = f(y(x)) for

X f

Ui, since both fa u- 1 and fay a u- 1 are

projective coordinates on X. But it is clear from analytic continuation

-

-

that Pf ,i(y) of= f oy on all of X, since X is connected and both sides Q.E.D. are analytic functions of x . Such a map f is called a developing map of X; Pf is the corresponding monodromy homomorphism. We will need the following fact: LEMMA

2. A projective structure on a compact Riemann surface is

equivalent to an affine structure if and only if the surface is of genus 1. Proof. See [3], p. 173. The result is purely topological, essentially saying that if a surface admits an affine structure, the cotangent bundle is trivial.

Q.E.D.

260

JOHN H. HUBBARD

COROLLARY. If X

is a compact Riemann surface of genus 2: 2 and a

is a projective structure on X, then the monodromy homomorphism Pf for any developing map f has non-commutative image. Proof. Any commutative subgroup of G is conjugate by an appropriate

a

f

G to a subgroup of the affine group A C G . The projective atlas

formed by maps of the form a of o u-l on contractible open subsets of X

Q.E.D.

is affine.

The real interest of projective structures is the geometry of developing maps and the monodromy homomorphism. Beyond this corollary there is little to be said in general; the developing maps may fail to be covering spaces of their images, the monodromy homomorphisms may fail to be isomorphisms, and their images may fail to be discrete. In fact all of these pathologies occur for the family given in example (iii) for appropriate values of a.

2.

The Schwarzian derivative and the affine structure of P(X) Let U be a Riemann surface, x

tions on U such that f'(x)

f

U, and f, g meromorphic func-

I= 0, g'(x) I= 0. There exists a unique a f G

such that f and a o g agree to order 2 at x. Then d 3 (f- aog)(x) is naturally a cubic map TxU-. Tfcxt 1 , and f'(xr 1 a d\f-aag)(x) is a cubic map TxU-> TxU. But for any one dimensional complex vector space V , the cubic maps V -> V correspond naturally to the quadratic maps V -> C. Therefore the construction above defines a quadratic form S(f, g)(x) on T xU, and it is easy to see that S(f, g) is a meromorphic quadratic differential form on U , holomorphic at those points x where f'(x)

I= 0 and g'(x) 1/0.

If U f" f'-

C

C and z is the canonical coordinate on C, then S(f, z)

! (f") /(f') 2

2,

=

as the classical definition requires.

For any Riemann surface U, let Q(U) be the space of holomorphic quadratic forms on U .

THE MONODROMY OF PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

261

LEMMA 3. The Schwarzian derivative has the following properties : (i)

S(f, g)= S(f, aog) = S(aof, g) for all a

G.

(ii)

S(f, g) = 0 if f = ao g, and conversely f = ao g if S(f, g)= 0

f

and U is connected. (iii) S(f, g)+ S(g, f)= S(f, h), and S(f, g)=- S(g, f). (iv) If U is simply connected, f is schlicht on U and q

f

Q(U),

there exists a solution g schlicht on U to the equation S(f, g)= q.

Proof. Parts i, ii, iii are obvious. Part (iv) is similar to Lemma 1. Q.E.D. Suppose the projective structures a and {3 on X are defined by

(\j, {3j).

atlases (Ui,ai) and fined in

ui n vJ.

Then the quadratic forms S(ai, {3j), de-

coincide on open sets of form

ui n ui n v

are induced by a quadratic form q = a- {3 on X . Conversely, if a structure {3

f

f

P(X) and q

f

1

2

so they

Q(X), there is a unique projective

P(X) such that {3- a = q , we shall denote it q + a . If

(Ui,ai) is an atlas defining a and the Ui are simply connected, then {3 may be defined by (Ui, {3i) where the {3 are solutions of S({3i, ai) = q in Ui, which exist by Lemma 3, (iv). LEMMA 4. The map Q(X) x P(X)

-->

P(X) given by (q, a)

1-->

q +a makes

P(X) into an affine space under Q(X).

Proof. All that is left to show is that P(X) is not empty. This follows from the uniformization theorem, as in the example (i) §1, or from RiemannRoch as in [3], p. 172.

Q.E.D.

COROLLARY. The space P(X) is canonically a complex manifold, and

for all a

3.

f

P(X), we have TaP(X) = Q(X).

Relative projective structures Let rr: X

-->

S be a smooth family of compact Riemann surfaces para-

metrized by a complex manifold S (i.e. a proper analytic submersion with

262

JOHN H. HUBBARD

fibers X(s)

= 77- 1 (s)

of dimension 1 ). A relative projective atlas on X

isarelativeatlas (Ui,ai) wherethe Ui formanopencoverof X, and the ai : Ui .... P 1 are analytic maps where restrictions to fibers of isomorphisms onto their images, such that over each s

f

77

are

S, the pair

(Ui(s),ai(s)) is a projective atlas on X(s). As above, two relative projective atlases are equivalent if together they still form a projective atlas, and a relative projective structure on X is an equivalence class of relative projective atlases. REMARK. To say that a family of projective structures a(s) is induced by a relative structure is to say that a(s) depends analytically on s. EXAMPLES. The family of projective structures obtained by applying the uniformization theorem fiber by fiber does not define a relative projective structure: the normalization requiring the images of the universal covering spaces to be the upper half plane cannot be made analytic. The generalization of the uniformization theorem given by Bers [1] does give relative projective structures on the universal curve over Teichmuller space. The canonical family of projective structure on P(X)x X --> P(X) is induced by a relative projective structure. Let P s(X) be the set of pairs (s, a) such that s

f

S and a is a

projective structure on X(s). PROPOSITION 1. (i) There is a unique structure of a complex manifold on P s S given by (s, a)

1--->

s is

analytic, and analytic families of projective structures on X given by section of p are induced by relative projective structures on X. (ii) The action of Qs(X) on P s(X) over S given by

((s, q), (s, a))

1--->

(s, q+a) makes P s(X) into an analytic affine bundle over

S, under the analytic vector bundle Qs(X). Proof. The proposition is clearly local in S. Suppose a relative projec-

tive structure a on X can be found (even locally over small subset of S ).

263

THE MONODROMY OF PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

Then the map (s, q)--> (s, q +a(s)) is a bijection Qs(X) .... Ps(X). Give P sCX) the induced structure; with this structure, P s(X) clearly satisfies (ii). To see that it satisfies (i), we need to know that if q is a section of Qs(X), then the family of projective structures induced by a(s) + q(s) is induced by a relative projective structure. Let (Ui,ai) be a relative projective atlas defining a. equation S(ai(s), /3i)

=

On Ui(s), the

q(s) is an analytic differential equation of third

order depending analytically on s, whose solutions will exist in Ui(s) by Lemma 3, (iv) if the Ui are sufficiently small, and will depend analytically on s if initial conditions are chosen analytic in s . But this can be done, for instance by picking (locally in S) a section S .... X of

TT

and requiring /3i(s) to coincide with ai(s) to order 2 along the section. Clearly the /3i form a relative projective atlas with the desired properties. Thus we are left with showing that over sufficiently small open subsets of S, X carries a relative projective structure. This may be shown by appealing to the universal property of Teichmuller space and the simultaneous uniformization theorem of Bers [1 ]; we shall prove a slightly more general result. LEMMA

5. Let

TT:

X .... S be a proper and smooth family of Riemann sur-

faces of genus at least 2, with S a Stein manifold. Then X admits relative projective structures. Proof. Let (Ui, H ( ,TT*~£x;s)

and the first term is zero because H 1 (X(s), n the last term is zero because S is Stein.

®2 ) =

0 by Riemann-Roch;

264

JOHN H. HUBBARD

Therefore refining the cover if necessary, we may assume that there are sections qi of n~5s over ui such that

Solutions ai of the differential equations S(ai, ¢i)

=

qi chosen so as to

satisfy some analytic initial condition such as to agree with ¢i to order 2 along some section S -. U i of

TT,

will then form a projective atlas for

X , perhaps after further refining the cover to make them injective on

Q.E.D.

fibers. COROLLARY.

(i) The family of projective structures on the family of

Riemann surfaces p*X-> P 5 X which is a on the fiber over a induced by a canonical relative projective structure a 5 (X). (ii) The space P 5 X has the following universal property:

f

P 5 X is

The map

which associates to any analytic mapping f: T -> P 5 (X) the projective structure f* a 5 (X) on the family of Riemann surfaces (p of )*X is a bijection of Mor (T, P 5 (X)) onto the set of relative projective structures on (pof)*X. The proof is left to the reader.

4.

Infinitesimal deformations and Eichler cohomology In this paragraph, we shall carry out an infinitesimal deformation

theory for projective structures analogous to the Kodaira-Spencer theory for complex structures. Let U be a Riemann surface, a be a projective structure on U and

x

an analytic vector field on U. Choose a one-parameter family of maps

cPt : U -> U with ¢ a in the direction

0

= id and ¢ 0 = x, and define the Lie derivative of

x

THE MONODROMY OF PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

265

Clearly L)((a) is an analytic quadratic form on U, and we leave it to the reader to prove that if l; is a projective coordinate on U and

x

=

x(l;)iL,

at;

then L (a)= xm(l;)d£; 2

x

.

In particular, the Lie derivative

does not depend on the family rPt that was chosen. Let Aa be the subsheaf of the sheaf of germs of analytic vector fields which is the kernel of the morphism 1/J

f->

L)((a); we then obtain an

exact sequence of sheaves

0----. Aa ----. TU

~

0® 2

-

0

which will be important; TU stands for the sheaf of germs of vector fields on U (as opposed to the tangent bundle TU ), and the Lie derivative is surjective because of the formula that computes it in a projective coordinate. REMARKS. In a projective coordinate l;, sections of Aa are exactly those vector fields which can be written p(l;)iL with p a polynomial of

at;

degree at most two; such vector fields are called infinitesimal automorphisms of a because the flows they generate send a to itself. The sheaf Aa is locally constant of rank 3, an example of what topologists call a local system. In particular, it may be thought of as the sheaf of germs of sections of a covering space, with fiber isomorphic to

C3 with the discrete topology. Let X

->

S a family of Riemann surfaces, s 0 ( S and X 0 the surface

above it. Suppose a is a relative projective structure on X which induces the projective structure a 0 on X0 . We shall describe a linear map Ts S--> H 1 (X 0 ,A of a.

o

ao

) which measures the infinitesimal deformation

Let (U i• ai) be a relative projective atlas on X; by restricting S and refining the cover

'U

= {Ui I we may assume that for each i and all

s ( S the maps ai(s): Ui(s) .... P 1 are homeomorphisms onto some open set ViC P 1 . Define c/Ji(s) = ai(sr 1 0 ai(s 0 ) and c/Ji,j(s) = c/Ji(s)- 1 ocjJj(s),

266

JOHN H. HUBBARD

cb·1,)·(S) is defined in an open subset of u1. n UJ· which will in-

where

elude any given point for s sufficiently near s 0 . The maps cbi,j(s) satisfy the following two identities:

cb·1,)-(s)oc/;J.J' k(s) = cb·1' k(s)

the first obviously and the second because (Ui, ai) is a relative projective atlas. Since cbi,j(s 0 ) is the identity map Ui n Uj ... Ui n Uj, the derivative ds 0cbi)v) = Xi)v) is a vector field on Ui

n Uj

for any v

f

Ts 0 S, and

the derivatives of the identities above give:

x·1,)·(v) + x·J' k(v) = x·1' k(v) L x·. (a 0 ) = 0 . 1,)

The first identity says that x(v)

=

lxi,j(v)l is a cocycle in

C 1 ('U, T X 0 ), and the second that it is in fact in C 1 ('U, A

ao

infinitesimal deformation of a at s 0

by ds (a)(v) 0

=

) . Define the

the cohomology class of x(v). We leave it to the reader .

to prove that the class does not depend on the projective atlas that was chosen. The map ds (a) has the following properties: 0

(i) It commutes with change of basis, i.e., if f: T ... S is a map with f(t 0 )

=

s 0 and we give f*X the relative projective structure £*a, then

dt (f* a) 0

=

ds (a) odt f. 0

0

(ii) The map i* ods a: Ts S -> H 1 (X 0 , T X 0 ) obtained by composing 0

0

ds 0a with the map H 1 (X 0 , Aa 0 )-> H 1 (X 0 , TX 0 ) induced by the inclusion

THE MONODROMY OF PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

267

Aa C T X 0 is the Kodaira-Spencer map classifying the deformation of the 0

complex structure of X at x 0 . (iii) Let X 0 , a 0 be any compact Riemann surface with a projective structure, and let a be the canonical relative projective structure on P(X 0 )xX 0 -.P(X 0 ).

Then Ta 0 P(X 0 )=Q(X 0 ), and da 0 a:Q(X 0 )-.

H 1 (X 0 , Aa ) is the "connecting homomorphism" coming from the long 0

exact sequence associated to the short exact sequence (1). Part (i) follows immediately from the construction, (ii) is clear since the cocycle x(v) is a definition of the Kodaira-Spencer map [7], (iii) is a computation we shall leave to the reader. Now let us examine the universal case; let M be a compact surface of genus at least 2 , TT:

EM ->eM

eM

the Teichmiiller space modelled on M and

the universal Teichmuller curve. We shall omit the subscript

M in the sequel.

Let p:

PeE-. e be the canonical projection and give p*E the

canonical relative projective structure a given by the corollary to Proposition 1.

2. Let 8 0 be a point in

PROPOSITION

surface above it and a 0

f

P(X 0 ).

e,

X 0 = rr- 1 (6 0 )

the Riemann

Then

is an isomorphism. Proof. Consider the diagram

0--- T

ao

P(X 0 )

---0

268

JOHN H. HUBBARD

The top line is induced by the inclusion of P(X 0 ) as the fiber of p above 80 (cf. Prop. 1), the bottom line is extracted from the long exact sequence associated to the short exact sequence (1 ), the left vertical map is the isomorphism of the corollary to Lemma 4 and the right vertical map is the Kodaira-Spencer isomorphism. The left-hand square commutes by properties (i) and (iii) of d

and the right-hand square by property (ii).

a

ao

Q.E.D.

The proposition now follows from the five lemma.

REMARK. Proposition 2 identifies the tangent space to the space PeE of "all projective structures on all Riemann surfaces" exactly in the same sense that the Kodaira-Spencer isomorphism identifies the tangent space to the space 0 of "all Riemann surfaces" as Te 0 = H 1 (X 0 , TX 0 ). 0

5.

The space Hom (1, G) Let 1

be the fundamental group of a surface, given by generators

I= lal' ... ,a 2 g! subject to the one relation g

II [ai, ai+g]

1.

i=l

Clearly the set Hom (1, G) may be identified with the subset of G 2 g defined by the analytic equation f

=

1 where f : G 2 g --> G is given by

g

f(a1 , ... ,a2 g)

=

H [ai, ai+g]. This gives Hom(1,G) the structure of an 1=1

analytic space. LEMMA 6. With this analytic structure, Hom {1, G) has the following universalproperty: foranyanalyticspace S, morphisms S-->Hom(1,G) correspond bijectively to morphisms S x 1 --> G which are analytic, and whose restrictions to ls ~

X

REMARK. In this lemma 1

1

are group homomorphisms for all

S t

S.

is considered as a discrete analytic space.

The proof is trivial and left to the reader. In particular, the analytic

269

THE MONODROMY OF PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

structure on Hom (r, G) does not depend on the chosen presentation. We may therefore expect that there is an intrinsic description of the local structure of Hom (r, G), in particular of its tangent space, etc. The object of this paragraph is to give such a description. Let Hom*{r, G) C Hom (r, G) be the open set of representations with non-commutative image. For any representation p: r .... G, we may consider g as a r-module by y ·

t =Ad p(y)(c;};

we shall denote this r-module gp. Recall [6]

that a derivation 0: r .... gp is a map satisfying o(y1y2) = o(y1)+y1. o(y2) and that those derivations of the form

ot (y) = t- y · t

are called principal

derivations. Call Der(r, gp) the space of derivations and IDer(r, gp) the subspace of principal derivations. A classical description of H 1(r, g P) is Der (r, g p)/IDer (r, g p); this is the description we shall use. The tangent space to G at any a is g (in two different ways); we shall use the local chart g -. G of G near a given by PROPOSITION 3.

t 1--> exp (t) a.

The space Hom*(r, G) is a submanifold of G 2g.

For any p (_ Hom*(r, G) the map Der (r, gp) .... g~g given by

o 1--> oil

is an isomorphism of Der{r, gp) onto TPHom{r,G). Proof. A computation which begins

)(1 )( )(1+)( 2 2 e 2 =e +0(ix 1 \2 +1x 2 1) showsthatthe derivative of f at a= (a1 , ... , a 2 g) f G 2 g in the direction ~ = (t1 , ... , t 2g) f g 2 g is and ends using e

daf(~) =

l

g

n i-1

i=1 j=1

[aj, aj+g]. ((1- aiai+gai 1). ti + (ai- [ai, ai+g]). ti+g).

270

JOHN H. HUBBARD If a= PI~ for some p

E

Hom (r, G), essentially the same computation

shows that d 0 f(l;) = 0 is the necessary and sufficient condition for

I;: ~ .... g P to extend (obviously uniquely) to a derivation 1 Thus all we need to prove is that d 0 f: g ~g p

E

->

->

g P.

g P is surjective if

Hom *(1, G). The basic fact (left to the reader) is that if r 1 , r 2

not commute, the linear map gpx gp-> gp given by ctl,t'2)

!-->

E

G do

(1-rl)t"l +

(1-r 2)t" 2 is surjective. This result gets applied twice. First suppose that for some i, 1

S i S g,

a i and a i+g do not commute. Then since

the images of the t"i and t"i+g already fill out the image of d 0 f. If each a i commutes with a i+g the expression for the derivative of

f simplifies to

2,

g

((1- a i+g) · t"i +(a i -1) · t"i+g)) i=l

and the result is clear since for some i , j , a i and a j do not commute.

Q.E.D. REMARK. This result is a special case of the following more general results: If 1

is a group of finite presentation, G is a Lie group with Lie

algebra g, then Hom (1, G) is an analytic space, its Zariski tangent space at p is Der (r, gp) and the equations defining locally Hom (1, G) in Der(f', gp) may be chosen to have values in H 2(1, gp). In our case, this boils down to the fact that if the image of p is not commutative, H 2(1, gp)

=

0, which may be proved by Poincare duality.

PROPOSITION 4. (i) The group G acts freely on Hom*(r, G), and the quotient Hom*(I', G)/G has a unique structure of an analytic manifold such that the projection Hom*(!, G)-> Hom*(!, G)/G is analytic.

THE MONODROMY OF PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES (ii) For any p

f

271

Hom*{r, G), the derivative of the inclusion

G .... Hom*(r, G) given by a r. a

g P .... Der (r, g P) given by

~

o

p

o

a- 1 at 1 ( G is the map

.... 8 ~. In particular the tangent space to

Hom*{r, G)/G at the image of p is canonically isomorphic to H 1 {r, gp).

Proof. The fact that G acts freely follows from the fact that commuting is an equivalence relation on non-trivial elements of G. This may for instance be seen by observing that a 1 I= 1 and a2

I= 1 commute if and

only if they have the same fixed points in P 1 . Similarly, if p 1 and p 2 are not conjugate, they have neighborhoods U 1 and U 2 such that no element of U 1 is conjugate to an element of U 2 , since the fixed points of a non-trivial y

f

G vary continuously with

y. Therefore the graph of the equivalence relation is closed, and the

quotient is Hausdorff. The existence and uniqueness of the analytic structure follows from the analyticity of the action of G, and the derivative in (ii) is computed from

6.

e~pe-~ = e~-p·~p+O (1~1 2 ).

Hejhal's theorem Let

17:

X .... S be a family of Riemann surfaces with a relative projec-

tive structure a. Suppose S is contractible and let r = If

Q.E.D.

17

17 1 (X)= 17 1 (X(s)).

admits analytic sections, there are relative developing maps

f: X .... P 1 , i.e., analytic maps which, restricted to X(s), are developing maps of a(s). This is just a matter of picking an analytic normalization, for instance requiring that f should agree to order 2 with a relative analytic chart along a section. REMARK. The requirement that

17

admit analytic sections is too strin-

gent. In fact, there are relative developing maps if S is contractible and Stein. Indeed, the space of all developing maps of the X(s) forms a principle analytic bundle under G over S, and so is trivial by Grauert's theorem if S is Stein and contractible. This applies in particular to the universal family over

PeS .

272

JOHN H. HUBBARD Clearly if f: X_, P 1 is a relative developing map, the associated

Pf: S _,Hom (r, G) which associates to each s

E

S the monodromy homo-

morphism of f(s) , is analytic. Let F : PeS _, Hom (r, G)/G be induced by the above construction, for the universal family of projective structures parametrized by PeS. REMARK. The global existence of F does not require Grauert's theorem, because we have divided by the action of G. It does require the contractibility of PeS, so that a universal covering space

;*'E

induces a

universal covering space p*S over each fiber of p*S _,PeS. THEOREM.

The map F is an analytic local homeomorphism.

The fact that F is analytic follows from the fact that F lifts locally (and even globally by Grauert) to an analytic map PeS_, Hom (r, G). By the corollary to Lemma 2, the image of a monodromy homomorphism is never commutative, and so both the range and the image of F are manifolds, whose tangent spaces we know. PeS be a projective structure on X 0 ; let f: X 0 _, P 1 be a developing map for a 0 and p: r _, G its monodromy homomorphism. Let a 0

f

The theorem will now follow from

Approachable Approachable isomorphism. The two tangent spaces look similar; they are in fact canonically isomorphic by the classical theorem of algebraic topology which says that one way to compute the cohomology of a group r

with values in a

r-module is to compute the cohomology of a K(r, 1), with coefficients in the associated local system in the sense of the following lemma. LEMMA7.

and the map

Thegroup r

X0 x

gp

f-->

acts on

Xox

gp by y·(x,t)=(y·x,p(y)*O'

Aa 0 given by (x, t)

isomorphism on the quotient.

f-->

(u(x), u*f*t) induces an

THE MONODROMY OF PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

273

The proof is immediate and left to the reader. We cannot unfortunately use the canonical isomorphism without explicitly constructing it. There are many ways to do this; the one we shall use here is adapted to our knowledge of the two spaces, one via Cech cocycles and the other via derivations. It is possible to compute Cech cohomology using a generalization of an open cover: an etale cover. The "open sets" are manifolds Ui and immersions Ui ->X, whose images are required to cover X. The intersections Ui

n Uj

must be replaced by the fiber products Ui XX Uj, and

similarly for multiple intersections. Moreover, Leray 's theorem still applies: if the Ui as well as all their fiber products are cohomologically trivial (for whatever sheaf we may be considering) the Cech cohomology for that cover is the cohomology of the sheaf (either in the Cech sense of direct limit over all covers, or via resolutions, or whatever, which are all isomorphic). We shall apply this to the cover consisting of a single open set X -> X. The map

X Xx X Xx X X .•.

Xx

X=

X

X

rn given by (x,

yl, ... ,

Yn)

I->

(x, y 1 (x), · · ·, Yn(x)) and the identification of Lemma 7 give isomorphisms cn(x, X; Aa)

=

g~n. In fact the complex is the classical inhomogeneous

bar complex [6] whose first two differentials are

In particular, the kernel of d 1 is formed of the derivations r .... gp and the image of d 0 is formed of the principal derivations. In our case, X 0 is a K(r, 1) so Leray's theorem applies to guarantee that the cohomology of the complex is in fact H 1 (X 0 , Aa ) . 0

LEMMA

6'. The derivative d

Approachable

F is the isomorphism H 1(X 0 , A

ao

ao

) ....

274

JOHN H. HUBBARD

Proof. Choose an analytic curve a(t) in PeE; let ft be a relative developing map and Pt the corresponding monodromy homomorphisms. Define (as in the construction of §4) a family of analytic maps cPt : Ut .... X(t) which: a) are analytic isomorphisms onto their images, and analytic in t ; b) are defined in subsets Ut

C

-

-

X 0 which fill out X 0 as t becomes

small;

-

c) satisfy f 0 =ftocPt in Ut, and c/Jo=identityof X 0 . Then Jt a(t)'t=O is represented by the Cech cocycle for the cover X 0 which is, on the component .fy = fft (c/Jtl

X0 x lyl

of

X0 xx

oyoc~Jt)'t=O.

0

X 0 , given by

Using ft o y = Pt(y)ft the expression above may be written .fy = Jt (f 01 0 Pt(y)of 0 )'t=O, where the entire expression f 01 opt(y)of 0 is defined in ut. If we write fft Pt(y)lt=O = .f ~ (it is best to think of .f ~ as a vector

field on P 1 ), then differentiating the expression above gives .fy = f~,f~. This is the identification of Lemma 7.

Q.E.D.

REMARKS. Some obvious questions, unsolved to the author's knowledge, are: What is the image of F? What do the fibers of F look like, and their projections in TeichmUller space? It is known [8] that F is not injective, but it is injective on fibers [3]. BIBLIOGRAPHY [1] L. Bers, Simultaneous Uniformization, Bull. A.M.S. 66 (1960), 94-97. [2] C. Earle, On Variations of Projective Structures, these proceedings. [3] Gunning, R. C., Lectures on Riemann Surfaces, Princeton University Press, 1966. [4] ____ ,unpublished notes.

THE MONODROMY OF PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

275

[5] Hejhal, D. A., Monodromy Groups and Poincare Series, Bull. A.M.S. 84 (1978), 339-376. [6] Hilton, P. J. and Stammbach, U., A Course in Homological Algebra, Springer-Verlag, 1971. [7] Kodaira, K. and Spencer, T., On Deformations of Complex Analytic Structures, I and II, Ann. Math. 67(1958), 328-466. [8] Maskit, B., One Class of Kleinian Groups, Ann. Acad. Sci. Fenn. 442 (1969).

HOLOMORPHIC FAMILIES OF RIEMANN SURF ACES AND TEICHMOLLER SPACES Yoichi Imayoshi

Introduction Let @5 be a two dimensional complex manifold. Denote by D the unit disc ltl < 1 and by D* the punctured disc 0 < ltl < 1 in the complex t-plane. We assume that a proper holomorphic mapping rr: @5

-->

D*

satisfies the following two conditions; for every t < D*, i)

the fiber St

=

rr-l (t) over t is a one-dimensional, non-singular

irreducible analytic subset of @5, and ii) the rank of the Jacobian of rr is equal to one at each point of St. It is well known that the fiber space (@5, rr, D*) is differentiably locally trivial. Therefore, every fiber St has the same genus g as a Riemann surface. We shall always assume that g

~

2.

We call the triple (@5, rr, D*) satisfying above conditions a holomorphic family of compact Riemann surfaces of genus g. A fiber St satisfying above two conditions i) and ii) is called ordinary. It should be noted that, in general, the fiber over t

=

0 cannot be considered.

Further, let @5 be a two-dimensional complex analytic space and

rr: @5 S

-->

D be a proper holomorphic mapping. Assume that the fiber

0 = 17- 1 (0)

of

6

over t

=

0 is a one-dimensional compact analytic subset of

and that the triple

(S-S 0 ,771S-S 0 ,D*)

is a holomorphic family

© 1980 Princeton University Press Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics Proceedings of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference 0-691-08264-2/80/000277-24$01.20/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000277-24$01.20/1 (paperback) For copying infonnation, see copyright page 277

278

YOICHI IMA YOSHI

as stated above. In this case when the fiber

S0

is not ordinary, we call

the triple (~, 17, D) a holomorphic family of compact Riemann surfaces of genus g with a singular fiber over t = 0. In this paper, given a holomorphic family (~, rr, D*), we regard the fiber St over t (tED*) as a point in a Teichmuller space and we try to construct the fiber over t = 0 from the limit point of

l St It ED*

in the

Teichmiiller space when t tends to zero and try to construct a holomorphic family (~, 17, D) with or without a singular fiber over t can be considered as a natural extension of

=

(~, rr, D*). This

0, which

(S, 17, D)

will be called a completion of (~, rr, D*). Here the concept of the homotopical monodromy an essential role. t

=

m of (~. TT, D*), which will be defined later, plays If m is trivial or of finite order, then the fiber over

0 can be constructed by a compact Riemann surface without nodes of

genus g. On the other hand, if over t

=

m is of infinite order, then the fiber

0 can be constructed by a compact Riemann surfaces with nodes

of genus g. A precise description of the fiber t

=

0 is given in

Theorems 1, 2, and 4 in §§3, 4, and 6. More properties of the completion of (~,

TT,

D*) are given in Theorems 5 and 6.

Nishino [16] has already discussed the quite similar problem to construct the fiber over t

=

0 and obtained the same results as ours without

using the theory of Teichmiiller spaces. The author would like to express his hearty gratitude to Professor Kuroda for his constant encouragement and advice and wish to express his thanks to my colleagues Yamamoto and Sekigawa for immeasurably profitable conversations with them. The author is also indebted to Professor Bers for pointing out some errors in the original version of this paper. §1. Preliminaries First we introduce terminologies and notations which will be used throughout this paper. These are due to Ahlfors [3], [4] and Bers [6], [7],

[8].

279

HOLOMORPHIC FAMILIES OF RIEMANN SURFACES A

Let C be the complex plane and let C be the extended complex plane. We denote by U and L the upper and the lower half-planes in C, respectively, and by R the real axis in C . Let SL'(2; C) be the set of all complex Mobius transformations of the form

g.. z

1->

az+b b ,c, d f C --d,a,

and

CZ+

ad- be

=

1 ,

and let SL'(2; R) be the set of all g ( SL'(2; C) whose coefficients are all real. Let us denote by G a Fuchsian group acting on U and by Qnorm the group of all quasiconformal automorphisms w of U satisfying normalization conditions w(O)

=

0, w(1)

=

1 and w(oo)

=

oo. Here we

note that any w f Qnorm can be extended to a hqmeomorphism of U onto itself, where U is the closure of U in C. We set Qnorm(G)

=

lw fQnorm I wGw- 1 CSL'(2; R)l.

Let L 00(U) be the complex Banach space of (equivalence classes of) bounded measurable functions on U and let L ""(U, G) be the closed linear subspace of L 00 (U) such that every tJ.(g(z))g'(z)/g'(z)

=

tJ.(z)

fJ.

f L ""(U, G) satisfies

for every

g f G.

We denote by L ""(U) 1 the unit ball in L ""(U) and put L 00 (U, G) 1 L ""(U, G) n L ""(U) 1 .

=

Furthermore, we mean by B/L, G) the set of all holomorphic functions c/> defined on L such that c/>(g(z)) g'(z) 2 = c/>(z)

for every

gf G

and such that its norm llc/>11

sup y 2 \c/>(z)i,

z

=

x+iy

Z(L

is bounded. The space B/L, G) is the complex Banach space of holomorphic quadratic differentials in L with respect to the Fuchsian group G.

280

YOICHI IMA YOSHI

Now we can define Teichmtiller spaces in three ways. 1) Given a reference compact Riemann surface S of genus g(;;2), a marked Riemann surface with respect to S is a compact Riemann surface S' of genus g with an orientation-preserving topological mapping f: S

->

S', which we call the marking on S'. We denote this marked sur-

face by (S, f, S'). We define an equivalence relation between marked surfaces by calling two marked surfaces (S, f, S') and (S, g, S") homotopically equivalent if and only if there exists a conformal mapping h such that the diagram

s - - - f- - - s ' h

g

S" commutes up to homotopy, that is, the self-mapping g- 1 oh of: S .... S is homotopic to the identity. We denote by [S, f, S'] an equivalence class of marked surfaces and by T(S) the set of all those equivalence classes, which is the Teichmiiller space of S. 2) Let G be the finitely generated Fuchsian group of the first kind acting on U induced by the universal covering group of the compact Riemann surface S of genus g. Two elements w 1 and w 2 in Qnorm are called equivalent if w 1 = w 2 on R. The equivalence class of w

f

Qnorm is denoted by [w]. The Teichmtiller space T(G) of the

Fuchsian group G is the set of all equivalence classes [w] of elements w

f

Qnorm(G) · 3) The Teichmtiller space T(G) with its complex structure can be

regarded canonically as a bounded domain in the complex Banach space B 2 (L, G) in the following way: For every 11-

f

L 00 (U) 1 , there is a unique

quasiconformal automorphism w of C with w(O)

=

0 , w(l)

=

1 , w( oo) = oo

such that w has the Beltrami coefficient 11- on U and is conformal on L.

HOLOMORPHIC FAMILIES OF RIEMANN SURF ACES

281

We write w = wl1 and denote by ¢ 11 the Schwarzian derivative of wl1 in L, that is,

Nehari's theorem shows that ¢ 11 < B 2 (L, I) and

II¢)~ ;S ~, where I is

the group consisting of only the identity mapping of C onto itself. As is well known, wi11L,wl-liR and ¢ 11 depend only on [w 11 ], where w 11 is the quasiconformal automorphism of U with the Beltrami coefficient 11 and w(O)=O, w(1)=1, w(oo)=oo. If 11 ¢ 11

11

is a biholomorphic bijection

of T(G) onto a holomorphically convex bounded domain in B 2 (L, G) containing the open ball of radius 1/2. From now on, we will identify T(G) with its canonical image in B 2 (L, G). Note that T(S) is canonically biholomorphic to T(G). Therefore, we can also identify T(S) with T(G). For every holomorphic function ¢

on the lower half-plane L, the

Schwarzian differential equation

Iw, z l -- (w "! w ')' - 12 (w "! w ')2

(1.1)

has a meromorphic solution defined in L. If 77 1(z) and 11iz) are two linearly independent solutions of the linear differential equation 27]"(z) + ¢(z)7](z) = 0,

(1.2)

then w(z) = T/ 1 (z)/TJ 2 (z) is a solution of (1.1) and every solution of (1.1) can be obtained in this way. Let ¢: o* -> T(G) defined by (t) = q;t

IS

ana-

lytic. In general, this mapping 1:1> is not single-valued and it depends on the homotopical monodromy

§3. The case where

-

m is

m of

(@5,

77,

D*).

trivial.

First we prove the following.

-

m is

THEOREM 1. If the homotopical monodromy

trivial, then the map-

ping 1:1>: D* _, T(G) is single-valued and it has the holomorphic extension 1:1>: D-> T(G),

so there exists a non-singular compact Riemann surface S 0

of genus g corresponding to the point 11>(0) of T(G). Further, a holomorphic family (@5,

rr, D)

of compact Riemann surfaces

of genus g can be constructed canonically in such a way that (i)

@5 is a two-dimensional complex manifold,

(ii)

the fiber St

=

;r- 1(t) is ordinary for every t in D, and

(iii) the fiber St is conformally equivalent to St for every t in D*

and @5 is naturally isomorphic to

6- S0

so that the following diagram

is commutative: ~

@5

"j

D*

@5

id

·J

D

Proof. First, by a result of Earle [10], T(G) is complete with respect to its Caratheodory distance. Therefore, the holomorphic mapping 1:1>: D* -> T(G) has the holomorphic extension

: D --. T(G).

285

HOLOMORPHIC FAMILIES OF RIEMANN SURFACES

Next we prove the second assertion of our theorem. We set

I = I (t, z )j t f D, z f DcPt I. Denote by g the group of analytic automorphisms of I

consisting of g(t, z) = (t, (x cPt (g))(z)) for all elements g

in G . Then the group g acts on I

properly discontinuously and fixed-

~

~

point freely. Hence, if we set S = I/g, then S

is a two-dimensional

complex manifold with the canonical complex structure. Denote by [t, z] ~

the point in S

represented by (t, z) ( I. The mapping

rr:

~

S .... D ,

which carries [t, z] into t, is holomorphic and the rank of Jacobian of

rr

is equal to one at each point of

S.

The fiber St =

rr- 1 (t)

over t is

ordinary for every t ( D and St is conformally equivalent to St for every t phic to

D* by its construction. Furthermore, S is naturally isomor-

f

S - S0

so that the diagram in Theorem 1 is commutative.

§4. The case where

-

:ffi is of finite order.

In this section, we prove the following. THEOREM

-

2. If the homotopical monodromy :ffi is of finite order, then

for the mapping 0

T-->0

lim cPt exists in T(G) and it coincides with bO

~

c/J 0 =lim cPt is a fixed point of t-->0

t/1 0 .

It is obvious that

m by Lindelof's theorem. ~

Next, we will construct a holomorphic family (S, ii, D) satisfying the second assertion of the theorem. We put

and

~here

T f

m= Dt/1

en(r)

!J., z

f

Dt/lr' g

f

G, n

f

Z, en(r) = (exp en:))

T,

w

f

and [wn o g]*(z) is the conformal bijection of Dt/1

induced by wn

o

N(G) with onto

T

g as (1.4). Then gn is an analytic automor-

phism of ~ and the group g of all these automorphisms acts properly discontinuously on ~. Now we recall the canonical ringed structure of the quotient of a bounded domain ~ in CN by a discrete subgroup [' of Aut(~), where Aut~) is the group of analytic automorphisms of ~ . Then [' acts on

~ in properly discontinuous fashion and the orbit space X

=

~/1 with

the canonical quotient topology is a locally compact Hausdorff space. Let 11:

~

-->

X be the canonical projection. We define a ringed structure ~ on

X as follows: If V is an open subset of X and if f is a complexvalued continuous function on V , then f

f

~V if and only if f

o 11

is

287

HOLOMORPHIC FAMILIES OF RIEMANN SURF ACES

holomorphic on rr- 1 (V) C ~. It is well known that the ringed space (X,~) defined as above is a normal complex analytic space. Therefore, if we introduce the above canonical ringed structure on ~

6

~

=

I/g, then 6 is a two-dimensional normal complex analytic space.

The projection 17: 6 ... D sending [r, z] into r P is holomorphic and the fiber st

=

n:- 1(t)

is ordinary and conformally equivalent to st for every

t < o*.

If S 0 is the Riemann surface corresponding to the point ¢ 0 in T(G) and if g 0 is the conformal automorphism group of D¢ 0 induced by g, then g 0 induces an automorphism group ro of so and the fiber

§0

= ; - 1 (0)

is isomorphic to S 0 /r0 .

Moreover, by its construction, 6

is analytically isomorphic to

~- S0 such that the diagram in Theorem 2 is commutative. §5. Deformation spaces of Riemann surfaces with nodes To consider the case where

:lR is of infinite order, we will first ex-

plain deformation spaces of Riemann surfaces with nodes, which is due to Bers [9]. A compact Riemann surface with nodes of (arithmetic) genus g C;:;: 2) is a connected compact one-dimensional complex analytic space S, on which there are k

=

k(S)

(~

3g-3) points P1 , ... ,Pk, called nodes,

lj has a neighborhood isomorphic to lz 1z2 = Ollz 1 1< 1, lz 2 1< 11 with Pj corresponding to

such that (i) every nodes

the ana-

lytic set

(0, 0),

(ii) the set S -

I P1 , .. ·, Pk I

has r (;:;: 1) components I

1 , .. ·,

Ir called

parts of S , where each Ii is a Riemann surface of genus gi , compact except for ni punctures, with 3gi - 3 + ni:;;; 0 and n 1 + · ·· + nr

=

2k,

and (iii) g = (g 1 -1)+ · .. + (gr-1) + k+ 1. The condition (ii) implies that every part carries a Poincare metric and the condition (iii) is equivalent to the requirement that the total Poincare area of S equals 4rr(g-1). From now on, g ( ~ 2) is fixed and the letter S , with or without subscripts or superscripts, always denotes a surface with properties (i)- (iii).

288

YOICHI IMA YOSHI

If k(S) = 0, then S is called non-s in gular; if k(S) = 3g- 3 , then S is called terminal. A continuous surjection a: S'--> S is called a deformation if, for every node P

f

S, a- 1 (P) is either a node or a Jordan curve avoiding

all nodes and if, for every part ~ of S, a- 1 1 ~ is an orientationpreserving homeomorphism. Once and for all we choose an integer v(> 3) which will be fixed throughout the following discussion. Two deformations a: S'-. S 0 and {3: S"--> S 0 are called equivalent to each other, if there exists a homeomorphism f of S' onto S" such that a = {3 of and if f is homotopic to a product of v-th powers of Dehn twists about Jordan curves mapped by a into nodes, followed by an isomorphism. We denote by

=

< S', a, S 0 > the equivalence class of a

deformation a: S'--> S 0 . Given a compact Riemann surface S 0 with nodes of genus g, the deformation space X(S 0 ) consists of equivalence classes < S', a, S 0 > of all deformations a: S' .... S 0 . To every node P

f

S 0 , there belongs a distinguished analytic hyper-

surface

(CX(S 0 )) consisting of all f X(S 0 ) such that a- 1 (P) is a node of a- 1 (S 0 ). If P 1 , ... , Pk are all nodes of S 0 , we denote by X 0 (S 0 ) the set X(S 0 ) - < P 1 > U .. · U < Pk >, that is, X 0 (S 0 )

=

I< S', a,

S 0 >1S' is non-singular!.

Every deformation {3 : S 0 .... S 1 induces an allowable holomorphic mapping {3*: X(S 0 )--> X(S 1 ) which sends

f

X(S 0 ) into

f

X(S 1 ).

Let r(S 0 ) induced by all topological orientation-preserving self-mappings of S 0 and let

r 0 (S 0 )

be its subgroup induced by all automorphisms of

S 0 . Then the group r(S 0 ) is discrete and the subgroup r 0 (S 0 ) is finite

and is the stabilizer of < id > ( X(S 0 ) in r(S 0 ). Let Rg be the Riemann's moduli space of non-singular compact Riemann surfaces of genus g and let Mg be the moduli space of compact Riemann surfaces with nodes of genus g. Let TT: T(G) .... Rg and II: X(S 0 )--> Mg be the canonical projections. Now we can prove the following lemma.

HOLOMORPHIC FAMILIES OF RIEMANN SURFACES LEMMA 1.

The holomorphic mapping

j :D

has a holomorphic extension

J : D*

289

-> Rg sending t into [St]

->Mg.

Proof. To prove this lemma, we use the following theorem (Kobayashi

[12], Kobayashi and Ochiai [13]). Let :J) be a complex space and

THEOREM.

group of holomorphic transformations of

:D

r

a properly discontinuous

such that M = :D;r is an

open subset of a complex space Y . Assume that (1) the pseudo-distance dM' is a distance;

(2) the closure

M of M in Y is compact;

(3) given a point p (

aM

and a neighborhood U of p zn Y, there

exists a smaller neighborhood V of p in Y such that

Let X be a complex manifold and A a locally closed complex submanifold of X . Then every locally liftable holomorphic mapping f : X- A -> M extends to a holomorphic mapping

f:

X -> Y .

We apply this theorem to the case where :J) Y

=

Mg and f

=

J.

=

T(G),

r

=

Mod (G),

So we have to see that three conditions (1), (2) and

(3) in the theorem are satisfied in this case. If p, q

f

Rg and p, q

f

T(G) such that rr(p)

where the infimum is taken over all p

f

=

p and 11(q)

=

q, then

T(G) satisfying 11(p) = p. Since

T(G) is a bounded domain in C3 g- 3 and since Mod (G) acts properly discontinuously on T(G), the pseudo-distance dM' is a distance. Since Mg is compact, the condition (2) is satisfied obviously. Given a point [S 0 ] on aRg and a neighborhood U of [S 0 ] in Mg, there is a neighborhood N of

< id > in X(S 0 ) such that

N is stable

under r 0(S 0) and such that N/r0(S 0) is a neighborhood of [S 0 ] in Mg.

290

YOICHI IMAVOSHI

n N = ¢ for every y t r{S 0) Take a neighborhood N 0( «; N) of < id > in

(See Bers [9].) We may assume that y(N)

f'0(S 0 ) and U = NIf'0(S 0 ).

X(S 0) such that N 0 is stable under f'0(S 0) and such that V = N 0 /f'0(S 0 ) is a neighborhood of [S 0 ] in Mg. Let a: S --> S 0 be a deformation and let a*: T(G)--> X(S 0 ) be an allowable mapping which sends [S, f, S'] into 0 and small, then there exists a unique loxodromic

Mobius transformation hi s. , which conjugates the r'i into r'i, has '

1

(j

the multiplier si and has fixed points in ~j and ~e

and

e being

as before). Set s = (s 1 , ···, sk). If lsi =max lsi I is small, the group H 0 s generated by H and by all elements hiS· with si '

'

Kleinian group.

I= 0 is a

1

Let s be as before and let W be a quasi-conformal automorphism of

C

such that W leaves 0, 1,

group and such that

Wl~o

=

fixed and WoHo,s oW-l is a Kleinian

is conformal. Then

WI~/

j

=

1, ···, r, defines

292

YOICHI IMAYOSHI

an element rj of the Teichmtiller space T(Hj), which we represent as a bounded domain in

c

3g·-3+n· J J . If si ~ 0' set ti = ai- ai where ai is

the repelling fixed point of Wohi '

S· 1

oW-l and ai is the fixed point of

Wof'i o w- 1 in W(~j). If si = 0, set ti = 0. Then the point (T

'

t)

= (T

determines the group Hr,t

1'

• •• T

t

' r' 1'

•• • tk) '

L

'""

C3g-3

W oHo,s oW- 1 completely. We denote by

=

Xa(S 0 ) the set of all (r, t) for which a group Hr t is defined. Here a

'

represents the choices made; the group Hj and the subgroups Then Xa, bydefinition,there T ,t T ,t exists a homeomorphism gr: s -> sr such that a =a of- 1 og and rr,tr rr,tr r r gr is homotopic to a product of v-th powers of Dehn twists about Jordan curves mapped by a r r into nodes, followed by an isomorphism. Hence, T ,t if this product of Dehn twists is denoted by dr, then [S, fr, Sr] = [S, dr a g~ 1 ofr, S r r] in T(G). We can assume that a: S -. S 0 is locally T ,t quasiconformal and for any sufficiently small neighborhood

1\,

i = 1, · · ·, k,

of Pi in S 0 , we can also assume that there exists a quasiconformal mapping hr: S -. S r r such that [S, fr, Sr] = [S, hr, S r r] and hr = T ,t T ,t

drog~ 1 ofr on S-a- 1 (8), where O=o 1 U···Uok. (SeeBers[S].) Let

TT :

U -. U /G = S and if:

tions, where

U is

U -. U/Hj

= !j be the natural projec-

the upper-half plane in the z-plane, let Llj be a con-

nected component of rr- 1 oa- 1 (!j-o) and let l'ij = rr 1 (Sj, 0')

rr- 1 (!j-o).

Since

and rr 1 (!j, 0) are conjugate by a, we can lift a to a quasi-

conformal mapping A: Llj -. l'ij such that Gj and

I\

are conjugate by A. ~

Let Wr = W¢

be the quasiconformal automorphism of C defined by

r

[S, hr, S r r] and let Wj r = Wj ¢· be the quasiconformal automorphism ~ r,t ' ' J,r of C defined by [!j, Fj,r• !j,r]. Then

v.],r

= W oA- 1 oW-:- 1 r J,r

:

w.],r(l'i.)-. W (fl.) J r J

is a conformal mapping, because Wr and Wj,r oA have the same Beltrami coefficient on Llj . We can assume that Wj,r converges to the

w1. 0 : z

~ uniformly on any compact subset z +1 of U as r -. 0 , because F j ,r converges to identity as r -. 0 . If we set

Mobius transformation

'

r>

Wj, 0 (1'ij) = ~j,o• then IVj,rl for r ~ (0, 1) forms a normal family on l'ij,o and hence IWrl is also a normal family on Llj. Now we can prove that Gj, 0 assume that

v1.'n r

=

X¢ 0 (Gj) is not degenerate: We may

converges to a holomorphic mapping

v1., 0

uniformly

294

YOICHI IMA YOSHI

on any compact subset of ~j,o as rn _, 0. Suppose that Vj,o is a constant mapping with a value c . There exist two loxodromic elements 7j and ji in H j and a point

~ in ~ j such that ii((), ji(() are con-

tained in ~j and iiY f, }iii. Since Hj is conjugate to

Gj

by A, we

seethat,if TJ=A- 1 r,A, y=A- 1 jiA and TJ 0 =x~ 0 (TJ), Yo=X~ 0 (y), then ., 0 and y 0 are of infinite order and TloY 0

1-

YoT/o. If we set iin =

X~. (TJ), Yn=X~. (y), Tin=X~ (TJ), Yn=X~ (y) and ~n= J,rn J,rn rn rn

W1. r (~), then we have Tin o v 1. r (~n) = 'n

'n

v 1. r

'n

o i'in(~n). By taking limit of

this equality, we obtain ., 0 oVj, 0 (() = Vj, 0 a.,((), which implies ., 0 (c) =c.

Similarly, we have y 0(c) =c. Three properties obtained

above that ., 0 , y 0 are of infinite order, ., 0 oy 0

1-

y 0 o., 0 and ., 0 (c) =

y 0(c) = c contradict the discreteness of G 0 . Therefore, Vj,o is a univalent holomorphic mapping. Using above functions V j, 0 and co~tracting _each oj to the _poin~ Pj , we can con~truct a conformal_ mapping Vj,o of U onto Dj,o = Vj,o(U) suchthat Vj,o conjugates Hj into for any g 0 < G0

-

Gj, 0 ,

Gj, 0 .

Then Dj, 0

Fuchsian and Dj,o is an invariant component of

Q(G 0)

Therefore, G 0 =

x~

fixed points of G 0 on

and,

we see g 0(Dj, 0 )noj,o = ~ and Vj,o induces

an isomorphism of Ij = U/Hj onto Dj, 0 /Gj, 0 . Hence is a component of

cQ_ 0(G) corresponding to c/> 0 is a regular tends to zero

b-group and x cf>t (G) converges to x cf> 0 (G) uniformly as t through D 1 .

If

mis regarded as a mapping from

fixed point of

m in

T(G) to T(G)' then cf>o is a

T(G)' where T(G) is the augment space of T(G)

in the sense of Abikoff [1]. Proof.

By LindelOf's theorem, it is sufficient to prove that cf>t converges

to c/> 0 for a fixed argument of t as r = It I --> 0. We may assume arg t = 0 and will prove that c/>r converges to an element c/> 0 in aT(G) as r

-->

0, where r is a positive real number.

For a convergent subsequence lcf>r l of lcf>rl with its limit c/> 0 n

as rn --. 0, we have cf>o image J(O) = [S 0 ) of t

t

=

aT(G). In fact, assume. c/> 0

t

0 by the holomorphic mapping

t

T(G)

T(G), then the

j:

D

-->

Mg in §S

is contained in Rg, that is, S 0 is a non-singular Riemann surface. Hence there exists a sufficiently small neighborhood U 0 of cf> 0 in T(G) such that ,jif5cf>t) Since

t

U 0 for a sufficiently small t

t

D and for every integer f.

m is of infinite order, this contradicts the discreteness

This implies c/> 0

t

of Mod (G).

aT(G).

The facts stated in §S show that, for any convergent subsequence lcf>r l of lcf>r l with its limit cf>o n

t

aT(G) as r .... 0, x cf> (G) converges rn

to a regular b-group G 0 = X...t.. (G) and that D 0 U !parabolic fixed points 'PO of G 0 on D 0 l!G 0 is isomorphic to S 0 . For another convergent subsequence lcf>r 'l of lcf>rl with its limit cf> 0't aT(G) as rn'__, 0, G0 = X...t.. '(G) n

"'O

is also a regular b-group and D 0 ' U !parabolic fixed points of G 0 ' on D0 'l/G 0 ' isisomorphicto S 0 , where D 0 '=0(G 0 ')-.:\(G 0 '), O(G 0 ') is the region of discontinuity of G 0 ' and .:\(G 0 ') is the invariant component of G 0 '. From the univalent holomorphic functions Vj, 0 , j

=

1, · · ·, r, con-

structed in the proof of Lemma 2, we can construct a conformal mapping h: O(G 0 )--. O(G 0 ') such that h conjugates G 0 into G 0 '. Hence, by a theorem due to Abikoff [2] and Marden [14], the mapping h is a complex

296

YOICHI IMA YOSHI

Mobius transformation. Hence G 0 is conjugate to G 0 ' in SL'(2; C). On the other hand, by Bers' theorem (6], every boundary group of G is conjugate, in SL'(2; C), to precisely m-1 other boundary group of G, where m is the index of G in its normalizer in SL'(2; R). Since m is finite and since the mapping 1 (O, 1 ): (0, 1) -. T(G) sending r into fi>r is continuous, we have f/> 0 = f/> 0 '. Therefore,

1> 0

1>r

converges to an element

< aT(G) as r-. 0.

By Lindelof's theorem, it is obvious that f/> 0 is a fixed point of

:m.

This completes the proof. Further we have the following. THEOREM

-

4. If the homotopical monodromy :liT is of infinite order, then

a two-dimensional normal complex space @3 can be canonically constructed in the following way: (i)

(@3, ;;., D) is a holomorphic family of compact Riemann surfaces

of genus g with a singular fiber over t (ii)

=

0,

if S 0 is the Riemann surface with nodes corresponding to

¢ 0 < aT(G) in Theorem 3 and if 10 is an automorphism group of S 0 m-

duced by

m,

then the fiber

§0 = ; - 1 (0)

to S 0!i0 , and (iii) @3 is naturally isomorphic to

over t

S- S0

=

0 of

6

is isomorphic

so that the following

diagram is commutative: @3 - - - - - - @ 3

Til

7Tj D*

id

----'"----+-

D

Proof. We use the notations in §5. Let f* be an element of Mod (S) corresponding to

:ffi

of Mod (G). Since the mapping ] : D --. Rg sending

t into (St] has a holomorphic extension

J: D -. Mg

with J(O)

=

[S 0 ]

and since there is a neighborhood N of < id > in X(S 0 ) such that N is stable under the finite group 1 0(S 0 ) and N/10(S 0 ) is a neighborhood of

297

HOLOMORPHIC FAMILIES OF RIEMANN SURFACES

[S 0 ) in Mg, there exists a positive integer p such that f P is homotopic to a product of v-th powers of Dehn twists about Jordan curves mapped by a into nodes. Set 8 =(I( I< 1) and 8* = 8-IOI in the (-plane and let K: 8 -. D be the mapping sending ( into ( P. Consider the holomorphic family (S, n, 8 *) constructed by (@3'

TT,

D*) from the relation t = ( p.

Then the analytic mapping K: 8 * -. X(S 0 ) sending ( into < S(, a ofz 1 , S 0 > is single-valued. Hence K has a holomorphic extension K: 8 -. X(S 0 ) with K(O)

=

< id >.

We denote by H(() and U(() the Kleinian group H(r, t) and its components U(r, t), respectively, determined by the point K(() in Xa(S 0 ). Now we can canonically construct a completion

S of

S

=

(r, t)

as follows:

We set

Then, by its construction,

S1

becomes a two-dimensional complex mani-

ill: sl-> 8* is the mapping sending ((, [z)) into (, then , , (S 1 il 1 8 *) is a holomorphic family of compact Riemann surfaces of

fold. If

genus g. Let and 'I' be the analytic mappings (many-valued) of

(S 1 , il 1 , 8 *)

(S, TI, 8 *) and that

=

into T(G), respectively. We may assume

cS, n, 8 *)

'I' on 8 * and that

and

cS 1 , TI 1 , 8 *)

homotopical monodromy for a certain positive integer

so sl u !n(O)/H(O) =

p.

have the same We set

with the images of all elliptic vertices removed I

and

S=S 1 U !U(O)/H(O)

with the images of related elliptic vertices identified!.

Then, by its construction,

S0

becomes a two-dimensional complex mani-

fold. We can naturally define a locally compact Hausdorff topology on such that

S0

is an open dense subset of

S,

S

By Cartan's theorem on the

continuation of normal complex spaces, we can induce a normal complex structure

:R

on

S such that the restricted structure :RIS ..... ..... ... 0

same one given on

S0

and

S - S0

to

S0

is a proper analytic subset of

is the

.....

S.

(The

YOICHI IMA YOSHI

298

functions which separate the points of

S0

are obtained from the automor-

TI : S-. 11

phic forms constructed by Bers [9].) Then the projection ing

(~, [z])

into

~

(S, TI, 11)

is holomorphic and

send-

is a completion of

(S, II, 11 *). ~

Finally we construct a completion @3 of @3 as follows: For an element w < N(G) with an automorphism

y1

of Lemma 1,

Yt

of

=

s1.

m,

the automorphism [m]* of F(G) induces

By the similar reasoning to that in the proof

has a holomorphic extension

81 is the inverse mapping of y1 , 80 : S0 -• S. We can prove that the

S0 -. S.

y0 :

Similarly, if

then § 1 has a holomorphic extension

y0

mappings

and

80

are not constant

on each part of S 0 as follows: Let P1 , ···, Pk be the nodes of S 0 . Denote by

~~

the fiber of

S1

over

~ < 11 *.

Yo



has a constant value

q 0 < S 0 on a part ~e of S 0 , then there exist a small neighborhood A of q 0 in such that

S and a skmall neighborhood bj of y 0 (~e- .u bj) is contained in A ]=1

Pj in S 0 , j and such that

=

1, ···, k,

~,. n A s

is

homeomorphic to a disc or an annular domain for every small ~ < 11 *. We k

can take a sufficiently small neighborhood B of ~f- .~ 1 bj in ~

~

that y 0( "-~

n

B) is contained in A and

~

"-~

nB

~

S

such

]-

is homeomorphic to

k

bJ. for every small ~ < 11 *. Therefore, ~,. n B must be schlicht s for every small ~ < 11 *. Then ~~ n B has at least three boundary curves ~f- U

]=1

c 1 , c 2 , c 3 such that each of them is not contractible to a point in ~~. On the other hand, the images ~~1

n

y0(c 1 ), y0 (c 2 ), y0(c 3 )

A with ~~1 =Yo(~~). Since ~~1

n

are contained in

A is homeomorphic to a disc

y0(c 1 ), y0(c 2 ), y0 (c 3 ) contradicts the fact such that y0

or an annular domain, at least one of the curves is contractible to a point in ~~ . This 1

induces an isomorphism of ~~ onto ~~ 1 . Similarly, on each part of S 0 . If

y0

is not constant

is not holomorphic at some node of S 0 , then § 0 is constant

on a certain part of S 0

y: S-. S. y8 = § y =

~

o0

,

which implies

y0

has a holomorphic extension

Similarly, § 0 has a holomorphic extension §: id on

S, y

is an automorphism of

S.

S-. S.

Since

299

HOLOMORPHIC FAMILIES OF RIEMANN SURFACES

r

~

Therefore, the automorphism [w]* of F(G) induces a finite group of automorphisms of

S.

Then the quotient space

normal complex space by a Cartan's theorem. If

~

=

S;f

becomes a

~

17 is the projection of @;

onto D, then by its construction, (@;, iT, D) is a completion of (@;, rr, D*) and

s0

=

"-l (0) is isomorphic

phism group of S 0 induced by

so~r0'

~0

r.

where

r0

is a finite automor-

Thus we have Theorem 4.

§7. An extension theorem THEOREM 5.

Let (@;,

TT,

D*) be a holomorphic family of compact Riemann ~

surfaces of genus g and (@;,

17, D) the completion of (@;, rr, D*) con-

structed canonically as above and let @;' be the image of @; by the inclusion map of @; intq @; . Then, for a complex manifold X and for a locally closed complex submanifold A of X, every locally liftable holomorphic mapping f: X- A --> @;' extends to a holomorphic mapping

f: X--> S.

~

Proof. From the construction of @; , this theorem can be proved by the

same reasoning as that in the proof of Lemma 1. THEOREM 6.

Let (@;, rr, D) be a holomorphic family of compact Riemann

surfaces of genus g with a fiber S 0 over t

=

0 and (@;,

ii, D) the com-

pletion of (@;-S 0 , rr, D*) con~tructed canonically as above. Then the inclusion mapping j : @;- S 0 --> @; induces a bimeromorphic equivalence

j:@; ....

s.

Proof. The set Sing (S 0 ) of singular points of S 0 has at least codimen-

sion 2, that is, Sing(S 0 ) is the set of finite points. By Theorem 5,

~-S 0 has a holomorphic extension ) : @;-Sing(S 0 ) .... ~. The graph GJ of ) is the set ! (p, )(p)I p @; and

w: @; x@; --> @; ,

the mappings

300

YOICHI IMA YOSHI

W[G? and J

ping

j: S

W[G~ are proper.

Hence j extends to a bimeromorphic map-

J

->

S.

This completes the proof of Theorem 6.

DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS COLLEGE OF GENERAL EDUCATION OSAKA UNIVERSITY TOYANAKA, OSAKA, 560 JAPAN

REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]

W. Abikoff, Moduli of Riemann surfaces, in "A crash course on Kleinian groups," Springer Lecture notes, No. 400(1974), 79-93. , On boundaries of Teichmiiller spaces and on Kleinian groups: III, Acta Math. 134(1975), 211-237. L. Ahlfors, The complex analytic structure of the space of closed Riemann surfaces, in "Analytic functions," Princeton Univ. Press (1960), 45-66. , Lectures on quasiconformal mappings, Van Nostrand Math. Studies #1 0 (1966 ). L. Bers, Uniformization by Beltrami equations, Comm. Pure Appl. Math. 14 (1961), 215-228. - - - - , On boundary of Teichmiiller spaces and Kleinian groups: I, Ann. of Math. 91 (1970), 570-600. , Uniformization, Moduli and Kleinian groups, Bull. of London Math. Soc. 4(1972), 257-300. , Fibre spaces over Teichmiiller spaces, Acta Math. 130 (1973), 89-126. _____ , Spaces of degenerating Riemann surfaces, in "Discontinuous groups and Riemann surfaces," Ann. of Math. Studies 79, Princeton Univ. Press, (1974), 43-55. C. J. Earle, On the Caratheodory metric in Teichmiiller spaces in "Discontinuous groups and Riemann surfaces," Ann. of Math. Studies 79, Princeton Univ. Press, (1974), 99-103. P. A. Griffiths, Complex analytic properties of certain Zariski-open sets on algebraic varieties, Ann. of Math. 94(1971), 21-51. S. Kobayashi, Hyperbolic manifolds and holomorphic mappings, Marcel Dekker Inc., New York, 1970. S. Kobayashi and T. Ochiai, Satake compactification and the great Picard theorem, J. Math. Soc. Japan 23 (1971), 340-350. A. Marden, The geometry of finitely generated Kleinian groups, Ann. of Math. 99 (197 4), 383-462. B. Maskit, On boundary of Teichmiiller spaces and on Kleinian groups: II, Ann. of Math. 91 (1970), 607-639. T. Nishino, Nouvelles recherches sur les fonctions entieres de plusieurs variables complexes: [V], Fonctions qui se reduisent au polynomes, J. Math. Kyoto Univ., 15(1975), 527-553.

COMMUTATORS IN SL(2, C) Troels J 0rgensen * As usual, we denote by r the trace function on SL(2, C). With use of the two well-known identities r(xy) + r(xy- 1 )

1)

r(x)r(y)

and 2)

r(xyx- 1 y- 1 ) - 2

=

[r(x)-r{y)] 2 - [r(xy)-2][r{xy- 1 )-2],

we will prove the following: PROPOSITION.

If two elements

x

and y with equal traces generate a

non-elementary discrete subgroup of SL{2, C), then

Under the assumptions of the proposition, one can show that lr(xyx- 1y- 1 )-2\ attains a global minimum, and that this minimum is less than ~. I do not know its exact value. The method used below would allow us to obtain a constant slightly larger than ~, but not the best possible constant.

*supported by the National Science Foundation MCS 78-00949.

© 1980 Princeton University Press Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics Proceedings of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference 0-691-08264-2/80/000301-03$00.50/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000301-03$00.50/1 (paperback) For copying information, see copyright page 301

302

TROELSJ!DRGENSEN

If no hypothesis is made about the traces of x and y , then the trace of the commutator may be arbitrarily close to 2. This was shown in [2]. Let us put a

\r(xy)-21

{3

\r(xy- 1 )-2\

y

=

o= Assuming that r (x)

=

\r(xyx-ly- 1 )-21

lr 2 (x)-41

.

r (y), we obtain from 2)

3)

and from 1), with use of the triangle inequality, 4)

a+{3?_o.

Now recall the following result: LEMMA. If A and B generate a discrete subgroup of SL(2, C), then

unless BAB- 1

f

{A, A- 1 !, in which case the subgroup is elementary.

This was proved in [1]. When applied to x and y , one obtains with use of 4) the inequality

5)

a+-{3+y?_1.

If instead the lemma is applied with xy or xy- 1 as A and y as B, then one sees almost immediately that 6)

a 2 + 4a + y ?_ 1

and 7)

{3 2 + 4{3 + y ?_ 1

0

With this information available, we are ready to prove the proposition.

COMMUTATORS IN SL(2,

By

symmet~y,

303

we may assume that

8)

a ~

If a

C)

~ ~, then 6) shows that

If a > ~ and y ~

yy

~

>

k.

y

{3.

k, then we deduce from 3) and 5) and 3) and 5) that

(3 8 > V 8 > contrary to 8). This finishes the proof. UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA

REFERENCES [1] T. J 0rgensen, On discrete groups of Mobius transformations, Amer. Math. 98(1976), 739-749. [2]

, Comments on a discreteness condition for subgroups of SL(2, C), Can. J. Math. 31 (1979), 87-92.

J.

TWO EXAMPLES OF COVERING SURF ACES T. Jprgensen, A. Marden, C. Pommerenke*

1.

Introduction We will present two classes of Riemann surfaces which are, in a

sense, opposite extremes:

1. Surfaces S which cover nothing, 2. Surfaces S which cover themselves. By a surface S we mean a maximal Riemann surface. That is, one for which there is no embedding S < S' as a proper subset such that the inclusion of the fundamental group

77 1

(S) ...

77 1

By a cover we mean an analytic covering

(S') is injective. 77:

S ... S 0 such that (i)

every point q < S 0 is the center of a closed disk ~ such that each component of 177- 1 (~)! is compact (in short, closed arcs can be lifted except at branch points), and (ii) the branching, if any, is constant on each fiber l77- 1

(q)!, q < S 0 . We do not admit the trivial covering S 0

=

S and

77 =

id.

Example (2) requires and example (1) becomes more difficult to find if we stipulate that

77 1

(S) must have infinite rank.

The examples will be constructed in the context of fuchsian groups acting on hyperbolic 2-space H, which will be realized as the upper half plane or unit disk D depending on which is more convenient under

*Authors

supported in part by the National Science Foundation.

© 1980 Princeton University Press Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics Proceedings of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference 0-691-08264-2/80/000305-13 $00.65/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000305-13$00.65/1 (paperback) For copying information, see copyright page 305

306

T. JII'>RGENSEN, A. MARDEN AND C. POMMERENKE

the circumstances. The connection with maximal surfaces arises through the fact that a surface is maximal if and only if the fuchsian covering group in its universal covering surface is of the first kind.

2.

Maximal fuchsian groups

Let

r

r

be a fuchsian group acting on a particular realization of H .

is called maximal if the augmented group is not discrete for

each Mobius transformation t acting on H with t

I r . Maximal groups

are necessarily of the first kind. Finitely generated ones were investigated principally by L. Greenberg [2]. He showed that for most signatures, the groups which are maximal form a dense open set, and the others lie on subvarieties representing lower dimensional Teichmtiller spaces. In particular for finite n :;:: 4, most free groups of rank n are maximal. In contrast to Greenberg's analysis however, we will exhibit fairly explicitly maximal groups of rank n . At the same time our analysis works for the infinite rank case, whereas dimensional arguments break down. THEOREM

1. For every n, 4 :s; n :s;

~0 ,

group rn which is free of rank n' and

there exists a maximal fuchsian

u;rn

is an (n+l)-punctured

sphere.

The proof depends on a property of groups close to the group representing the triply punctured sphere. PROPOSITION.

Suppose G = is a fuchsian group generated by

parabolic transformations a, {3. There exists a universal constant e > 0 such that if (1)

then no group of the form , n :;:: 2 , is discrete.

The hypothesis of the proposition is equivalent to the condition that HI< a, {3> be a twice punctured disk with a{3 determined by a simple

loop surrounding the two punctures (see §4). Let a(a{3) denote the

307

TWO EXAMPLES OF COVERING SURFACES

length of the geodesic in the Poincare metric in the free homotopy class of this loop. Condition (1) is equivalent to the relation, a(a{3) < e* ,

(2) where

As is customary, the notation try will denote the trace (a+d) of the normalized Mobius transformation y(z) = (az+b)/(cz+d), ad-be= 1. In general this is determined only up to sign. For our work here we will always choose the matrices representing parabolic transformations to have trace +2 and then we will not encounter ambiguities of sign. The symbol a 1 /n designates that parabolic transformation with the same fixed point as a such that (a 1 /n)n = a. We will prove the proposition after proving the theorem. Proof of Theorem 1. We will first construct a maximal group ['00 of rank

N 0 . Set x 0 = 0 and choose an infinite sequence of disjoint closed intervals [x 2 k, x 2 k+l] on the positive real axis, k = 0, 1, ... , with x 2 k+l - x 2 k < 1/2. Space the intervals far enough apart so that the disks Dk = {z: lz-(x 2 k+x 2 k+ 1 )/21 < 11 are mutually disjoint. .Set 0 = C\U{xil. Now push the endpoints of each interval [x 2 k, x 2 k+l] close enough together so that the length of the simple geodesic in 0 (in the Poincare metric of n) separating x 2 k and x 2 k+l from all other xj has length < e*. This can be fulfilled by estimation in Dk: the Poincare metric of Dk \{x 2 kl U lx 2 k+l! is larger than that of 0 restricted to Dk. Finally, we require that the length of these geodesics approach zero, as k

-> oo.

Let ['oo denote a universal covering group for 0, acting in the unit disk D. Choose a point 0 say, and fix a point Let

p

f

o*

0 on the negative real axis, the point z f

D over 0. We may assume

o*

=

-1,

is the origin.

denote the Poincare fundamental polygon for [' with center at

o* .

308

T. J0RGENSEN, A. MARDEN AND C. POMMERENKE

We claim that the interior of

P

projects one-to-one on the region

n0 c n

obtained by slitting the complex plane along the positive real axis [0, + oo). This is true because

n

is invariant under the reflection z

1-+

z

which

is therefore an isometry in the Poincare metric. Consequently, the geodesic from 0 in

n

cross the real axis the interior of

0

to any point in the upper or lower half plane does not It follows that the lift of

no

aP

ano

from o* is exactly

P.

We can describe

by travelling around

0

We see that

aP n ao

is the union of a countable number of parabolic fixed points of roo and one point ( which is the limit point of these fixed points.

P

is sym-

metric about the diameter of D through (. We could have imposed the additional requirement that the

REMARK.

segments [x 2k, x 2k+l] approach + oo so fast that the length of the geodesics in lz: of

n'

belonging to the free homotopy classes of the circles

lz I= (x 2k-l +x 2k)/2!, P would approach (

are uniformly bounded above. Then the sides non-tangentially.

Now we are ready to show that roo is maximal. Start by fixing a free set of generators {y2k, y 2k+l!, k = 0, 1, ···, with the following property: y 2k, y 2k+l are induced by simple loops in

n

n

from 0, contractable in

to x 2k, x 2 k+l respectively, and so oriented that y 2k+l y 2k is homotopic in to a simple loop surrounding the segment [x2k' x2k+l]' sepa-

n

rating it from all other xj. Thus the group Gk

=

satisfies

the hypothesis of the proposition. Suppose that roo is not maximal. Then there is a Mobius transformation t

I r such that the extended group r*

=

oo. This cannot occur in a finitely generated group. REMARK.

If we had imposed the additional condition on Q suggested in

the remark above, then y*(~) at (

from arising.

P

could not contain the internally tangent disk

for metric reasons. This fact alone would prevent Case 3

310

T. J0RGENSEN, A. MARDEN AND C. POMMERENKE

Finally, to complete the proof of Theorem 1, we will show how the argument above can be modified to yield the existence of maximal free groups of any rank n > 4 . The case of odd n (an even number of punctures) is easiest. Choose the pairs [x 2 k, x 2 k+l] close together as above so as to obtain the two generator groups Gk satisfying the hypothesis of the proposition. In addition, position the (n+1)-punctures so that there is no conformal automorphism of

n

(this cannot be done if there are only four punctures).

Only Cases 1 or 2 can arise for the corresponding group f'n and both of these are excluded for the reasons cited above. For the case of even n we proceed in the same way except that an additional observation is necessary. Let Yn+l be a parabolic transformation corresponding to the unpaired puncture. Assume that for one of the paired transformations y 2 k, say, it is true that ty 2 kc 1 has the same fixed point ~ as ayn+l a- 1 , some a

f

f'n, but is not a power of it. Let

o be a generator of the parabolic subgroup of Then (3

= a- 1oa

['* =

< f'n, t > fixing ~.

has the same fixed point as Yn+l and Yn+l

=

(3m for

some integer m . We claim that (3f'n(3- 1 C f'n. Consider for example y 2 j. If {3y 2 j(3- 1 I f'n then (3y 2 j(3- 1 has the same fixed point as a 1 yn+l a! 1 , some a 1

f

f'n, but is not a power of it. Therefore, for some integer d,

or

and y 2 j is a power of (3 0 f ['*. Since < (3 0 , y 2 j+l > is not discrete, this is impossible. We conclude that (3f'n(3-l C f'n but this is not possible either.

3.

The group for the triply punctured sphere

In this section we will prove the proposition. The proof is based on the following results.

TWO EXAMPLES OF COVERING SURFACES

LEMMA

311

1. Given M > 0 there exists N > 0 such that for any non-cyclic

fuchs ian group G

=

< x, y > with two parabolic generators x, y satisfying

ltr xy I < M, the group < x 1 /n, y > is not discrete for any n > N. LEMMA

2. Suppose G = is the group of the triply punctured

sphere with the parabolic generators a(z)

=

z +2, f3(z)

=

z/(-2z + 1).

Then (i)

G 1 = contains G as a norma I subgroup of index two,

and a 'hf3 is elliptic or order two, (ii) G 2

=

contains G as a normal subgroup of index six,

aV.f3 is elliptic of order three, and G 2 is conjugate to the modular group. The cases (i) and (ii) are the only discrete groups of the form ,

n

~

2.

Proof of Lemma 1. By conjugating G we may assume x : z y: z

f->

f->

z +a ,

z/(-2z+1). Replacing x by x- 1 if necessary we may assume

a > 0. According to Siegel [S] or to [4], when G is a non-elementary discrete group, a2'1/2. Thusif a=(2-trxy)/22M 1 the group < x 1 /n, y > cannot be discrete.

Proof of Lemma 2. When a = 2 , the only possibilities for adjoining roots are • n = 2 , 3 or 4 since a 2' n/2. The case n = 3 cannot occur because then a 113 f3 would be an elliptic element of trace 2/3. This is not the trace of an element of finite order. The other cases are as indicated.

Proof of the proposition. It is known that for E


1/Eo there is a group with O

z/(-2z + 1). Because xkyk is a simple hyperbolic ele-

ment, ak > 2. In the notation of Lemma 2, lim xk =a. There are only a finite number of possible n for which isdiscrete(Lemma1). Since -->, forlarge k

312

T. ]0RGENSEN, A. MARDEN AND C. POMMERENKE

only the cases n

=

2 and n

groups. For otherwise

=

4 have any chance of yielding discrete

would not be discrete (Lemma 2) and

< xk 1 /n, yk > would contain elements arbitrarily close to the identity as k -. "". This is impossible by [5] or [4]. But the same line of reasoning shows that the cases n

=

if, for example, the group

2, n

=

4 cannot occur either, for large k. For

< xk y,, Yk > were discrete for infinitely many k,

it would contain elliptic elements of arbitrarily high order and hence elements arbitrarily close to the identity as k -. "", since tr xky,Yk = 2- ak and ak -. 2. We conclude that for sufficiently small

E,

the proposition

is true. REMARK. Instead of the proposition, another approach is to observe that, with the normalization of the generators x, y of < x, y > as in the proof of Lemma 1, if 2 < a < 4 then x 1 /ny is elliptic of trace 2- 2a/n, n > 2. Consequently, if a is known to be transcendental, no group n

< x 1 /n, y >,

> 2 is discrete. In the context of our example r"", this can be

arranged for each Gk as follows. Set up

r""

as above but introduce the

parameter A= x 1 -x 0 , keeping the other points xi fixed. As A decreases, the geodesic length ak of the simple loop in

n

surrounding

[x 2 k, x 2 k+l] also strictly decreases. The values of A for which exp (ak) is an algebraic number for some k;: 1 are countable. Hence for all except a countable number of values of A, the traces of all y 2 k+ 1 y 2 k are transcendental.

4.

Conformal automorphisms of surfaces The following is a rather striking application of Theorem 1. Without

the condition that the surfaces involved are maximal, it was obtained by Greenberg [1]. COROLLARY. Let be an abstract n-generator group, 4 :S n :S X 0 . There exists a maximal Riemann surface S whose group of conformal

automorphisms is isomorphic to . The surface S can be taken to be a covering surface of the (n+1) or (n+2) -punctured sphere.

TWO EXAMPLES OF COVERING SURFACES

313

Proof. Working with our maximal free group in of rank n , there is an

isomorphism where N is the normal subgroup of in generated by the "relations" of

. We must, however, ensure that N I= {id.!. Therefore if is itself free of rank n < ~0' use rn+l instead of rn' or if is free of rank ~0 ,

choose the isomorphism to send into ['00 , not onto. Then N

will be a non-elementary group (one having more than two limit points) and therefore, having the same limit set as rn' will be a group of the first kind. Let S be the maximal surface

S

=

H/N.

The group of conformal automorphism Aut S of S is determined by the normalizer of N in the group of all Mobius transformations acting on H. This group is discrete, hence because of maximality it is precisely in or f'n+l . That is, Aut S ::: f'n/N or ['n+/N (if is free of rank n ). REMARK.

Aut S is exactly the group of cover transformations of S over

the (n+l) or (n+2) -punctured sphere. Thus is an n-generator finite group if and only if S is a finite sheeted cover of the (n+l )-punctured sphere.

5.

Groups conjugate to a proper subgroup

In this section we will investigate fuchsian groups F for which tFC 1 < F f~~ some Mobius transformation t (the symbol < denotes proper inclusion). This phenomenon does not appear for finitely generated groups nor, according to Heins [3 ], for groups without elliptic elements which are of divergence type (i.e., the quotient surface does not support a Green's function). Here we will construct large families of such groups. Since we allow groups with elliptic elements, the examples presented are more general than those suggested in the introduction. According to Heins [3], the question for covering surfaces was originally raised by H. Hop£.

314

T. JORGENSEN, A. MARDEN AND C. POMMERENKE

Without the requirement that F be a group of the first kind, trivial examples abound. For instance let C 1 denote the semi-circle lz: [z-1121=114, Im z::::Ol and C 2 the semi-circle lz: \z-3/21 = 114, Im z 2: 0 l. Let A 0 denote a Mobius transformation sending the upper half plane to itself and the exterior of C 1 in it onto the interior of C 2 . Let t denote the translation z

t->

z + 2 and set Ak

tk A 0ck, k

=

2: 0. Then

the group F generated by all Ak, k ? 0, has the property that tFC 1 is a =

G0 * < t > .

Conversely, if G is a fuchsian group of the first kind with a decomposition G = G 0

*< t >

where t £ G is parabolic, then there exist groups F

of the first kind with G

< F, t > and tFC 1 < F.

=

Proof. If tFC 1 < F, the groups tkFck, - oo < k < oo, are nested; the larger the k, the smaller the group. Set H = Uk=-oo tkFck. Then H satisfies tHC 1 Set G

=

=

H while tn

< H, t >

=

I

H for all n

f 0

0

< F, t >. Then G is also a fuchsian group of the

first kind (because H is a normal subgroup) and satisfies, (i)

G

(ii)

the commutator subgroup [G, G] lies in H,

=

ltnh: h£Hl, G/H"" ,

(iii) for n

f 0 and h £ H , tnh is not elliptic or the identity.

These are true because in any word in G, the letter t can be moved to the left end by virtue of the fact tHt -l

=

H.

If G is finitely generated it has a standard generator system of hyper-

bolic elements lai, bil elliptic lei!, and parabolic lpil satisfying the relation II[ai, bi]llei llpi

=

1. By (ii) the commutator [ai, bi] £ H and by

(iii) ei £H. We can assume one Pi is t. Therefore if this relation is to hold, there must be at least two parabolic transformations pi. This

315

TWO EXAMPLES OF COVERING SURFACES

means the surface H/G has at least two punctures, one of which determines t. Draw a simple arc on this surface from one of these punctures to the other. This arc determines a splitting of G as required. If G is not finitely generated, then the surface H/G has a puncture

determined by t and at least one other ideal boundary component. Connect these two by a simple arc. In the same way as above, this determines a splitting of G. To prove the converse we begin by constructing the fuchsian group H C G which is the free product of the groups tkG 0ck, -"" < k < "",

Because H is a (non-elementary) normal subgroup of G, it has the same limit set and therefore is also of the first kind. Define the projection Pk: H follows. For x pk(x)

=

t

tjG 0 Cj, j

I=

->

tkG 0 t-k which is a homomorphism as

k, set pk(x)

=

id.; for x < tkG 0 ck, set

x , and extend to a homomorphism of all H.

Let N be any proper normal subgroup of G 0 , for example, N

=

lid.!.

Define

The group F is not elementary and it is a normal subgroup of H. Consequently F isofthefirstkind. Furthermore, tFC 1 z + 1 the geometric picture in

the upper half plane is quite nice: Each ek has its fixed point at the

316

T J0RGENSEN, A. MARDEN AND C. POMMERENKE

north pole of the circle of radius 1/2 centered at z = k. The group F can be constructed as above taking N =lid. I, or as follows: F=lhfH:thetotalnumberof ek's with k, t hyperbolic but not necessarily simple, we can construct as above a group F with tFC 1 < F. On the other hand, suppose G is a surface group of genus g + 1 ;::: 3. Cutting the surface along a simple, non-dividing loop gives rise to a representation of G as an HNN extension of a subgroup G 0 by a hyperbolic transformation t. The presentation of G 0 looks like

where 1 :::: i ~ g. A homomorphism ¢: G 0

-->

Ig onto the surface group of

genus g, Ig = < ai, hi : TI[ai, hi]= 1 >, is determined by setting c/J(ai) = ai, c/J(bi) = hi and c/J(x) = c/J{C 1 xt) = 1. Let c/Jk denote the corresponding homomorphism tkG 0 ck .... Ig. Consider the free product with amalgamation, H

=

We can extend each c/Jk to a homomorphism c/Jk : H c/Jk(x) = id. for x ( tjG 0 t-j, j

-->

!g after requiring

I= k. Now form the normal subgroup,

F = {hfH: c/Jk(x)=id.

for all

Again, tFC 1 < F and F is of the first kind.

k can even be a happy, closed surface. UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA

REFERENCES [1] L. Greenberg, Conformal transformations of Riemann surface, A mer. ] . Math. 82 (1960), 7 49-760. [2]

, Maximal groups and signatures, in Discontinuous Groups and Riemann Surfaces, L. Greenberg, ed., Annals of Math. Studies 79, Princeton Univ. Press (1974).

[3] M. Heins, On a problem of H. Hopf, .Jour. de Math. 37(1958), 153-160. [4] T. ] !lirgensen, On discrete groups of Mobius transformations, A mer. .J. Math. 98(1976), 739-749. [5] C. L. Siegel, Uber einige Ungleichungen bei Bewegungsgruppen in der nichteuklidischen Ebene, Math. Ann. 133(1957), 127-138.

DEFORMATIONS OF SYMMETRIC PRODUCTS George R. Kempf* Let C be a smooth complete algebraic curve of genus g over an algebraically closed field k . If n > 2g- 2 , any universal abelian integral

J : c(n) ~ 1 n

from the n-th symmetric product c(n) to the Jacobian

J of C isalocallytrivial pr_bundle,where, r=n-g. If one deforms jective bundle

J

n

.J as an abelian variety, one may ask whether the promay also be simultaneously deformed along with .J .

The main result of this paper is that such a deformation is impossible even in first order unless the deformation of J comes from a deformation of C, if C is not hyperelliptic. We first show that any deformation of the variety c 0, k = r(e, 0c) ~ r(e, ~c(c)). Let

be the product sheaf on en. Thus, as r(en,

m)

®

77:

0c(c)

1 e(n) be a principal G-bundle. Then p~ if

TT

77

is a trivial bundle over the product en if and only

is a trivial bundle OVer e(n).

323

DEFORMATIONS OF SYMMETRIC PRODUCTS Proof. Clearly, if that p~ TT: Y' = y

X

is trivial, then p~ TT is trivial. Conversely, assume

TT

c

cnPn -->en is trivial. Let

T:

en --> Y' be a section

of p~ TT. Let r' be another section of p~ TT. Then, r '= a· r, where a: c en is equivariant. If we can show that the image r(Cn) is in-

variant under the action of Sym(n) on Y', then r(Cn)/Sym(n) Y' /Sym(n) = y TT

will be isomorphic to c(n) via

TT:

c;

y --> c (')x(D 0 ) --> (')X(D 0 )\ D --> 0 of sheaves on X . 0

Next, I will explain what these abstract ideas mean in this particular case of interest. Consider the divisor Dn on C x c(n) from section 1.

=

For each point d = c 1 +···+en of c(n), Dnld is the divisor D [c 1 ] + · ·· + [en] on C. Thus, one may confuse points of c(n) with effective divisors of degree n of C. This confusion does not lead to any infinitesimal ambiguities because A. The characteristic mapping, :td: Tangent space of cCn) at d ....

r(C, (')c(D)\D), is an isomorphism of n-dimensional vector spaces. One may even globalize the characteristic mappings to get A'. The characteristic mapping :X:® (n)--> 11 *((') (n)(Dn)ID ) gives c C cxc n an isomorphism of locally free (.') (nfmodules of rank n.

c

In this case,

-->H 1(C, (')c) is the linearization of the ,c : c(n)--> Pn = 177£H 1 (C, (.') )\deg 7]=nl.

B. the mapping t/Jd :® (n) abelian integral More globally,

f

c

"n

C*

B'. we have a commutative diagram of homomorphisms of (.') (nfmodules,

c

326

GEORGE R. KEMPF

where 8 is the boundary in the long exact sequence of direct images R*rr

c

*

of the sequence

The following special case will be very useful. C'. If n

=

1, we have a commutative diagram

The dual 1/J~: H 1(C, t)c( ®k ()c phism H 1 (C,

->

e~- 1 =We induces the usual isomor-

t)c( __::::__, l(C, we) on the global sections of these sheaves.

If g > 0, Blc and 1/Jic are injective at each point c of C. Next we will reverse the roles of C and c 0.

Proof. By the diagram

*

and the last lemma, OCc must be injective if

1/lc is injective. In point C, we have seen that 1/lc is in fact injective. Thus, to prove the lemma, we need only check that r(c(n), x) .

A universal deformation of X is a formal deformation s : ~

that any formal deformation s': ~,-> morphism lls

:f'-> :f.

:f'

-> :f

such

is induced from s by a unique

Clearly, if s is a universal deformation of X , then

must be an isomorphism. We have another criterion for the universality

of a given deformation. CRITERION. If s : ~

-->

:f

a) the linear mapping b) c)

is a deformation of X such that llo

is an isomorphism,

rex, E>x) is zero, and :f is a smooth formal scheme,

then s : ~-->

:f

is a universal

deformation of X. The most well-known case of a universal deformation is when X is a smooth complete curve C of genus g > 1. Then it is well known that there exists a universal deformation s :

e . . :r

of c ' where

:r

is a

smooth formal scheme. In fact, if C is a compact Riemann surface,

:f

is the formal completion of Teichmuller space at a point corresponding to C. With our universal deformation s : construct a deformation sn : en ....

:r

e . . j"

of the curve C, we may

of the product en by taking en

=

e xj" e ··· xj" e.

Furthermore, we have a deformation s: ecn> .... j" of

c(n) where e

=

en/Sym(n). A key result of this paper is

THEOREM 4.2. If C is a non-hyperelliptic curve of genus > 2, then s: cCn) .... j" is a universal deformation of the symmetric product c.

336

GEORGE R. KEMPF

Proof. We will use the above criterion to check the universality of c {3(m)

=

zero in P0 and s 0 o {3 =a.

Thus, we have an m-morphism m X

Po

Furthermore, using the addition + {3: m xj" ( + {3)

m xj"

0

pn . . m xj" pn,

(m X

s) by n

D(a,

e(n) -> m xj" pn

assumed that {3(m)

xj"

be a morphism such that

sn: m xj"e(n)-> m xj" pn pn

->

pn

using

we have a m-isomorphism,

m.

Trivial, one may check that D(a,

s :c (n) -> pn n

m:

as we have

zero.

The converse is usually true. THEOREM

5.2. If C is a non-hyperelliptic curve of ~enus > 3, then

any deformation of the inte~ral

f : c(n)-> Pn n

has the form D(a, {3),

where these morphisms a and {3 are uniquely determined by the deformation.

a.

given by addition by {3. Denote the composition

is a deformation of =

Po

340

GEORGE R. KEMPF

Proof. Let F :

:R "

-->

J.

~ be the deformation of

m "

In Theorem 4.2, we have

n

determined that any deformation of the symmetric product c(n) has the form m xj" ecn) .... m where a: m .... j" is a unique morphism. If we replace S:

e

-->

:R . . m

j" by m X S : m Xj"

e

-->

m, We may assume that the deformation

of c(n) is the s(n): ecn) .... m of the first part of this section.

Next, consider the deformation ~ .... m of Pn . As we may take a section

of ~

T

m and pn is a principal homogeneOUS space under an

-->

abelian variety, the Theorem 6~ 14 of [9] implies that ~ .... m possesses a unique structure of an abelian m-scheme with identity

T.

Thus, ~ is a

group scheme over m and we may now apply Proposition 5.1 to the m-morphism F: ecn) .... ~. Therefore, F factors through an m-morphism

1/J:

Pn

-->

~. As 1/J must be a deformation of the identity of Pn, 1/J is an

m-isomorphism. Thus far, we have shown that our deformation must have the form K

0

D(a, zero): m xj"e(n) .... m xj" pn' where

K

is an '"-isomorphism

m xj" Pn, which is a deformation of the identity of Pn. By Corollary 6.2 0

f [9],

K

must be translation by a unique j" -morphism {3 : m ....

Po'

which

vanishes at the point m of m. Therefore, our deformation is in fact

D(a, {3). Q.E.D. Now, I may explain why I wrote this paper. Let n > 2g-2. Then,

s :c(n) .... pn n

is a locally trivial projective bundle. If one chooses a

point in Pn, one may identify Pn with the Jacobian of C. I was trying to answer the question: Given a deformation (f variety, when can the projective bundle bundle

G --> Cf ?

n

-->

j( of J as an abelian

be extended to a projective

n

As the bundle

f : cCn) .... Pn,

J

G --> (f

" j("

would be a deformation of the integral

the Theorem 5.2 implies that we must be deforming J as

a Jacobian variety, when C is not hyperelliptic. PRINCETON UNIVERSITY AND THE JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY

DEFORMATIONS OF SYMMETRIC PRODUCTS

341

REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]

H. Cartan, Seminare: Families d'espaces complexes et fondements de la geometrie analytique, Secretariat mathematique, Paris, 19601961. P. Griffiths, Some remarks and examples on continuous systems and moduli. J. Math. Mech. 16 (1967), 789-802. A. Grothendieck, Seminare de geomehie algebraique, l.H.E.S., Buressur-Yvette, 1960-1961. _____ , Fondements de la geometries algebraique (Extracts du Seminare Bourbaki) Secretariat mathematique, Paris, 1962. R. Gunning, Riemann surfaces and generalized theta functions, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1976. G. Kempf, Toward the inversion of abelian integrals I, to appear. A. Mattuck, Symmetric products and Jacobians, Amer. J. Math. 83 (1961), 189-206. A. Mayer, Rauch's variational formula and the heat equation, Math. Ann. 181 (1969), 53-59. D. Mumford, Geometric Invariant Theory, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1965.

[10] ------· Lectures on curves on an algebraic s'urface, Princeton University Press, Princeton, 1966. [11] K. Kodaira and D. C. Spencer, On deformations of complex analytic structures. Annals of Math. 67 (1958), 328-466. [12] - - - - - , A theorem of completeness of characteristic systems of complete continuous systems. Amer. of Math. 81 (1959), 477-500. [13] J.-P. Serre, Groupes algebraiques et corps de classes. Hermann, Paris, 1959.

REMARKS ON PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES Irwin Kra and Bernard Maskit* In this note the authors continue their previous investigations of deformations of Fuchsian groups [10, 14]. Throughout this paper [' denotes a finitely generated, purely loxodromic (including hyperbolic) Fuchsian group of the first kind operating on the upper half plane U. Then [' operates discontinuously and freely on U, and S = U/1 is a closed Riemann surface of genus g :;: 2. We denote the space of holomorphic quadratic differentials on S by B 2 (f'). We do not differentiate between differentials on S and automorphic forms for [', so that we regard ¢

f

B 2 (f') as a holomorphic function on U , with ¢(Az)A'(z)2 = ¢(z),

for all

A

f [',

and for all

z

f

U .

We use the Nehari norm [20] 11¢11 = sup ll¢(z)l (2 Im z) 2 ! . ZiU

(We will on occasion need to regard U as the unit disc, in which case 11¢11 =sup li¢(z)\(1-lz! 2 ) 2 ! ziU

*Research

.)

supported in part by NSF grant MCS 7801248.

© 1980 Princeton University Press Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics Proceedings of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference 0-691-08264-2/80/000343-17$00.85/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000343-17$00.85/1 (paperback) For copying information, see copyright page 343

344

IRWIN KRA AND BERNARD MASKIT

Given ¢

f

B 2 (r), we can find a locally schlicht meromorphic function f

on U with !f, z l

¢(z) [9, pp. 376-377]; here

=

differential operator !f

'

!f, ·I is the Schwarz ian

1 (f")2 -(f")' f' 2 f'

·I = -

The function f will be unique once we normalize by requiring f(z)

=

(z- c', 4-> b, 5-> c, 4'--> b', 5'--> c', 1'-. a, 6 --> d, 7--> e, 6'--> d', 7'-> e', 8-> d, 9--> e, 8'-> d', 9'-> e'. As before, this map extends to a local homeomorphism of U onto gates

r*

~

which conju-

onto G . The local homeomorphism is replaced by an analytic

local homeomorphism using a variation of the complex structure through quasiconformal mappings.

§3. A problem We can regard our second example from a slightly different point of

351

REMARKS ON PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

view. We start with the Fuchsian group r surface

s of genus

finite index in

f,

2' and we observe that there is a subgroup r ' of and there is a uniformization (ll, G) of S, so that

f:

the covering map

representing the closed

U -. tl conjugates the proper subgroup r

onto all

-

of G. One observes that this can occur only if f is not injective. PROBLEM.

For which uniformizations (ll, G) of a Riemann surface S

can one choose a proper subgroup

r

of the Fuchsian group

ing S, so that the cover map f : U -. tl conjugates

r

l~

represent-

onto all of G?

§4. Generalizations of the examples Our two examples involve low genera and low index

[f : rJ;

these

examples can easily be generalized to higher genera and higher index. In fact it was only because of the low genus that we included the first example. If we start with a deformation r:P, f,

e: r-. G,

where S

=

U/r

is a branched covering of S( = f(U)/G = ll/G), then we let G 0 be a torsion-free normal subgroup of finite index in G (Selberg [21 ]). One easily sees that r;e- 1 (G 0 ) coverings u;r0

-.

=

r/r0 is isomorphic to G/G 0 , and so the

u;r and ll/G 0

-.

ll!G have the same number of sheets.

It follows that f projects to a covering U /r0 -. tl!G 0 which has the

same number of sheets as the covering U/r-. tl/G. Of course, since G 0 is torsion free, the covering U/r0

-.

tl!G 0 is unbranched.

Ex'cept for genus 2, the generic Fuchsian group is not contained in any other Fuchsian group (Greenberg [6]), and so our examples of nontrivial coverings are exceptional. Of course, once we have such an example r:/J, f,

-

e:

r -. G, then we can obtain a family of such examples

-

by varying r, the extension of r. In fact, we can regard T(r), the Teichmliller space of r, as a submanifold of T(r), and every point of this submanifold admits a deformation which yields a non-trivial covering.

§5. Theorem 1 In this section we prove Theorem 1; as we have already remarked, it

352

IRWIN KRA AND BERNARD MAS KIT

cP for which f is a cover map is bounded.

suffices to show that the set of

Our proof makes use of a generalization of the Kraus [13] -Nehari [20] theorem. LEMMA 5.1.

Let f be a locally schlicht meromorphic function on the

unit disc U, and let

cP = If, ·I.

(a) If f is schlicht on every non-Euclidean disc of radius

II¢ II : :;

6 tanh- 2

(b) If

o.

\\¢\\ :S k,

disc of radius

o,

then

and k > 2, then f is schlicht on every non-Euclidean

~ log~:~·

(If k < 2 then, by Nehari's theorem [20],

f is schlicht in U . )

We actually only need part (a) of this lemma. To prove this part, we set A(z) = o* z , where

o* = tanh 0.

Observe that f 0 A is Schlicht in

the unit disc, and hence \¢(0)\ =\If, Ol\ =\If, A(O)l\ = \lfoA, O}A'(Or 2 \

(5.1)

:S \\lfoA,·l\\\o*\- 2 :::;6(8*)-2; where we have used the Cayley identity, and Kraus' theorem [13] which

cP is the Schwarzian of a function that is schlicht in the unit disc, then \\¢\\ :S 6.

asserts that if

Now for any z /, 0, in U, we let T z be some non-Euclidean motion mapping 0 to z. Then, using the Cayley identity, the invariance of the Poincare metric and (5.1), we obtain (5.2)

llf,zll(1-\z\ 2 )2

llfoTz,OII\T~(o)- 2 \(1-lz\ 2 ) 2

\lfoTz,Ol\ :::;

6(o*r 2

Combining (5.1) and (5.2) we obtain

\1¢\1 :S 6(8*)- 2

=

6 tanh- 2

o.

.

353

REMARKS ON PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

The proof (although not the present formulation) of part (b) appears in Kra [10]. It is based on Nehari's theorem [20]. We turn now to the proof of Theorem 1. We have already observed that f is a possibly ramified cover map and

-

that hence fop

=

-

p of is a· possibly ramified covering of S. Let f' be

the corresponding cover group (the Fuchsian model of G). Since f' C f',

f

must be a finite extension of f'. We cover

S by a finite number of

opensets {Uj}, sothatforeach j, (pof)- 1 (Uj) isadisjointunion {U ja l of open circular discs, each of which !s precisely invariant under a (possibly trivial) finite cyclic subgroup of f'. It is easy to see that f i~

schlicht on each Uja. Since we can cover a fundamental domain for

f' by a finite number of the Uja, we have shown that there is a 8 > 0 so that for every z

f

U , f restricted to the non-Euclidean disc of radius

8 about z is schlicht. The above remarks hold for any given covering map f, and, of course,

8 depends, not on f , but on S . Since f' has at most finitely many extensions, we can in fact find a 8 independent of S. (This 8 still depends on S .)

§6. The radius of univalence In this section we obtain another (more geometric) lower bound on the radius of univalence of cover maps f (producing an alternate proof of Theorem 1). We may assume that f is not univalent. We let

8 = 8(1) =

inf

p(z, Az)

> 0,

ZfU

Aff'\{1} where

p

is the non-Euclidean distance function on U . The quantity

8(1) is the length of the shortest closed geodesic on S.

(1) If f is one-to-one, then f is clearly univalent in every non-Euclidean disc of radius :S 8(1).

354

IRWIN KRA AND BERNARD MASKIT

-

(2) If f is an unramified n-sheeted cover, then f is univalent in every

-

-

disc of radius :S 8(1), where 1

-

is the cover group of S. But it is easy

to see that 8(1) 2: 8(r) ' and from Riemann-Hurwitz n :S g - 1

(g

=

genus of S ) .

Thus f is univalent in every disc of radius :S 8(1)/(g -1).

-

(3) Finally, if f is ramified we pass to a torsion-free finite index subgroup G 0 of G. Let 1 0 the index n of 1 0 in 1

=

e- 1 (G 0 ).

Then 1 0 is a subgn;mp of 1 and /

equals the index of G 0 in G .. Clearly

As before, we need only estimate the number of sheets k in the covering f: L'./10

->

D/G 0 . Since the following diagram commutes

T

f

-

f

L'./1 - - - - D /G

and each of the vertical maps is n-sheeted. we see that k is the number of sheets in f: L'./1 ->DIG. But it is well known that k

=

Area(L'./1) Area(L'./1)

-

where 1

is the branched universal cover group of S ( = full pre-image of

G via the map f). Now Area L'./1

=

2rr(2g- 2), and Area (L'./1) 2: rr/3

(see, for example, Kra [12, pp. 76-78]). This last estimate follows from the fact that G cannot be a triangle group ( D would have to be simply connected for G to be a triangle group). We conclude that in this case f is univalent in every disc of radius :S 8(1)/12(g -1).

355

REMARKS ON PROJECTIVE STRUCTURES

§7. Convergence of cover maps In this section, we discuss one example of convergence of cover maps in B 2 (1) and prove Theorem 2; our discussion is based on the classification of geometrically finite Kleinian groups with an invariant component (Maskit [18], [19]). We start with the situation described in the hypotheses of Theorem 2. We can find a simple loop w 0 on S, so that 0(A 0 ) f G corresponds to the lifting of w 0 (Maskit [17]); there is, in fact, a set of simple disjoint loops w 0 ,w 1 ,· .. ,wk on S, andasetof"integers" 1 ::; aj ::;

oo,

(1) If aj


Ax

Rn+l: xn+l > O! which

models hyperbolic n-space. Let G be a discrete subgroup of M(n+1) acting discontinuously in R~+l, and, perhaps, on some (open) set fl(G)

c Rn =

aR~+l . Then the limit set A(G) of the group G lies in Rn

and either coincides with Rn or is nowhere dense in Rn. However, for n

2' 2 we may start from discrete groups acting in Rn; their continua-

tions in R~+l (obtained in the well-known way) will be discontinuous there. For the elements A

1::

M(n+1) there is well defined the value IA'(x)l

=

ldAxl/ldxl ,

which is the linear expansion at the point x ; it is independent of the direction. We assume that mnA(G) > 0.

364

S. L. KRUSHKAL'

In A(G) one may form (using the axiom of choice) a fundamental set e A which contains one point of each orbit Gx for almost all x fA( G), or rather, for all x f A(G), different from the fixed points of the elements of G (see [3]). As it has been shown in [3], there is a condition which guarantees that this set is non-measurable. If we pass from R~+l to the unit ball IxI < 1 , then the above-mentioned condition is ( *) the intersection of isometric fundamental polyhedron with A(G) has zero measure. More generally, we have PROPOSITION

2. If G satisfies condition(*), every subset e

C

eA

with positive exterior measure is non-measurable. It is not difficult to construct the Kleinian groups which have measur-

able eA. We shall not dwell upon them here. Henceforth we consider only these groups for which Proposition 2 is valid.

For an arbitrary set E C A(G) we may define the multiplicity function k(x; E)

=

card E

n Gx , x f A(G) .

It is clear that if E 1 C E, then k(x; E 1 )

_'S

k(x; E). For the measurable

set E the function k(x; E) is also measurable, and we have the decomposition

where

We then have THEOREM

2. If E is a measurable subset of A(G) having positive

measure, then almost everywhere on E the function k(x; E)= the intersection E points.

oo,

that is,

n Gx is either empty or consists of an infinite set of

365

SOME REMARKS ON KLEINIAN GROUPS

This is in sharp contrast with the fact that any compact set F C R~+l U U(G) can intersect only a finite number of images A(P G) where P G is a fundamental domain for the group G in R~+l U U(G). Such rigidity must, of course, raise the possibility of the existence of non-trivial automorphic forms and deformations with supports on A(G). For many forms this question is completely solved by the following theorem. THEOREM

3. For

p

f

Z\ I0 I the equation

c,b(Ax)IA '(x)l P

=

c,b(x)(A f G, x fA( G))

has, in the class of measurable a. e. finite functions on A(G), only the zero solution.

In particular, if p+q

I= 0 every measurable G-form c,b(z)dzPcrzq(z £C),

concentrated on A(G), assumes only the values 0 or

oo.

§3. The rigidity of deformations Theorem 3 does not embrace the automorphic functions c,b(x)(p = 0) and, for n

=

2 (in C), also the measurable forms c,b(z)dzPdz-P, p

f

Z,

with supports on A(G). These include the Beltrami differentials c,b(z)dz/dz which are of special interest and connected with planar quasiconformal mappings. The question of the existence of non-trivial differentials of such type presents a special case of the general rigidity problem of quasiconformal deformations of Kleinian groups in Rn, n ~ 3. This is connected to the rigidity problem for Riemannian manifolds with negative curvature. Precisely, one questions whether there can exist quasiconformal automorphisms f : Rn -. Rn (n

2: 2) deforming G into an isomorphic Kleinian group which

is not conformal on A(G). In particular, whether any quasiconformal automorphism of Rn compatible with the discrete nondiscontinuous group G, must be reduced to a Mobius one (that is, the composition of a finite number of inversions in spheres). Such deformations are, for instance, obtained as the boundary values of quasiconformal automorphisms of the half-space.

366

S. L. KRUSHKAL'

The affirmative answer to the latter question would mean that every two discrete subgroups G 1 , G2 from M(n+1), n ~ 2, which are conjugate by a quasiconformal automorphism of R~+ 1 are also conjugate in M(n+1). For groups whose quotients have finite volume, this result has been obtained by Mostow [4]. However, B. Apanasov [1] has recently shown that the rigidity theorem fails in the general case. INSTITUTE OF MATHEMATICS SIBERIAN BRANCH OF THE USSR ACADEMY OF SCIENCES NOVOSIBIRSK

REFERENCES (1] Apanasov, B. N., On Mostow's rigidity theorem, Dokl. Akad. Nauk SSSR, t. 243, No. 4 (1978), 829-832. [2] Knapp, A. W., Doubly generated Fuchsian groups, Mich. Math. J., v. 15, No. 3 (1968), 289-304. [3] Krushkal', S. L., On a property of limit sets of Kleinian groups, Dokl. Akad. Nauk SSSR, t. 225, No. 3(1975), 500-502; t. 237, No. 2(1977), 258. [4] Mostov, G. D., Strong rigidity of locally symmetric spaces. Princeton, Princeton Univ. Press, 1973, 195 p. (Ann. of Math. Stud., No. 78).

REMARKS ON WEB GROUPS Tadashi Kuroda, Seiki Mori and Hidenori Takahashi

1.

Let G be a finitely generated non-elementary Kleinian group and

let Q(G) be the region of discontinuity of G. The limit set A(G) of G is the complementary set of Q(G) with respect to the extended complex plane

C.

For a (connected) component n* of Q(G), we denote by Gn

*

the stabilizer subgroup of G for n*, that is, Gn = !y. 4. By using Lemma 2, we can prove the following characterization of web groups. THEOREM

1. Given a Kleinian group G, the following four propositions

are equivalent to each other: i)

G is a web group.

ii)

G is finitely generated and A0 (G) = L 2 (G) ~ cP.

iii) G is finitely generated, L 2 (G)

~

cf> and M(A) = S(G) for every

A f L 2 (G).

iv) G is finitely generated, L 2 (G) ~ cP and M(A) = M(A') for arbitrary two A, A' f L 2 (G). Proof. First we suppose i). We note A 0 (G) -f, cP. If L 1 (G) is not empty,

then we can find a sequence that

n

I an 1;=l

of distinct separators of G such

(an)= {AI f L 1 (G). The properties c) and d) of separators of G n=l imply an C (a1 ) for every n. By the definition of separators of G, there is a component On of !l(G) such that an = annj for some component Unj of C - fin. Furthermore, the definition of web groups implies that ann is a quasi-circle. Hence an = ann. Since A I nn' we see that nn is the component of C - an not containing A. This fact holds for every n and we have 0

1

= On for every n. This contradicts the fact

=!AI. Hence i) implies L 1 (G) = So i) implies ii).

cb.

0()_

n (an) n=l Therefore we have A 0 (G) = L 2 (G)-f,cf>.

371

REMARKS ON WEB GROUPS

Next we prove that ii) implies iii). It suffices to show that S(G) C M(A) for every A < L 2 (G) under the condition ii). Take an arbitrary a< S(G) and choose a point z < O(G) which lies in a component of

C-

a

not containing A. Obviously a< S(G; z, A). Suppose that a is not the maximal separator in S(G; z,A) for A, that is, suppose a~ a(z,A). Take a point z' < Q(G) in a component of

C-

a(z, A) containing A and

choose a separator a'< S(G; z', A) of G. Then a(z, A), a and a' satisfytheconditionfor a 1 , a~,

a;

inLemma2andwehave L 1 (G)~r/J.

Hence ii) implies a= a(z, A) and a< M(A), which proves S(G) C M(A). The proposition iv) is immediately obtained from iii). Now we prove that iv) yields iii). For the purpose we assume that under the condition iv) there exists a point A < L 2 (G) with M(A) ~ S(G). Let a be a separator of G belonging to S(G)- M(A) and let z < Q(G) be a point which lies in a component of C - a not containing A. Then

a~ a(z,A). Clearly, in a component of

C- a(z,A)

not containing a,

there is a separator a'< M(A). By Lemma 2, there exists a point A'

R

=

nU

is

U/GR be the projection,

then the pull-back go TT-l is a nonconstant AD-function on R' = TT(D

n U)

whose real part vanishes on aR'. Thus R X 0 AoD, which proves the theorem. q.e.d. §2. The case of finite genus For surfaces of finite genus, it is known that

FUCHSIAN GROUPS AND OPEN RIEMANN SURFACES

381

Hence Theorem 1 implies the following THEOREM 1 '. Suppose R is of finite genus. If R belongs to class

0 AD, then R is of the type I. This theorem can be improved as follows. Now we shall introduce new classes of Riemann surfaces. Let OAD,n (1

S: n

S oo) denotes the

class of Riemann surfaces on which there are no nonconstant AD-functions which are at most n-valent, i.e. take every complex numbers at most n times. We may consider 0 AD,""

=0 AD .

Every surface of positive genus

belongs to 0 AD, 1 , while for planar surfaces 0 AD, 1 is identical with the class OSD introduced by Ahlfors-Beurling, and 0 AD ~ 0 AD, 1 (cf. [1 ], [12 ]). Generally 0 AD C 0 AD ,n+ 1 C 0 AD ,n for every n . One can show a surface belonging to

as follows. ExAMPLE 1. Let R* be a two-sheeted covering surface of genus g over the whole Riemann sphere

C = C U l ool,

and rr: R*

->

C

be the pro-

jection. Take a compact set E on C which does not contain the branch points of R* and belongs to the class NSB- ND. Put R

=

E=

rr- 1 (E) and

R* -E. Then R ~ OAD, for there exists a nonconstant AD-function

f on

C- E

and f

o

rr- belongs to AD(R). Next we show that

R < 0 AD ,n for every n . Otherwise there is a nonconstant m-valent function F < AD(R), and F can be extended to a homeomorphism of R* onto another compact Riemann surface s* of genus g, because

E

has

a planar neighborhood on R* and of class NSB. s* is an m-sheeted covering surface of

C

and S*- F(R) belongs to the class NSB. On

the other hand we can find that s* - F(R) is not in the class N SB, as the area of F(R) is finite. This is a contradiction. THEOREM 3. Suppose R is a Riemann surface of genus g(O 2= g < oo).

YUKIO KUSUNOKI AND MASAHIKO TANIGUCHI

382 Then,

(1) if R belongs to OAD,g+l, then R is of the type I. In particular, every planar surface of OSD is of the type I . (2) There exists a planar surface of the type I which does not belong to the class 0 8 D ~ 0 AD . Proof. Suppose that R is of the type II. We consider, as in the proof of

-

Theorem 1, the open Riemann surface R with the same genus g as R . Let p be an interior point of

R- R

and consider the divisor 8

=

pg+l.

Then by Riemann-Roch theorem on open Riemann surface R (Kusunoki [5]) there is a nonconstant meromorphic function f such that f is the multiple of 1/8 and df is (exact) canonical. It is known that f is at most (g+1)-valent on R and lldfll is finite outside of a neighborhood of lpl. Thus the restriction of f on R is a non-constant AD-function on R, hence R \ 0 AD ,g+l , which proves the first statement. The second statement comes from the following example. EXAMPLE 2. Let ~

=

liz I < 1! and E be its countable subset such

that E does not cluster in ~ and the closure E contains a~' (for example, E

=

lzn,k1;,k=l, where zn,k

=

(1-

~) · exp(v-12~k)).

Then

R = ~- E is the required for the statement (2). For the sake of the completeness we include the proof. First R

I

OSD,

because R admits a non-constant schlicht AD-function z . Now suppose

-=

that R is of the type II, and consider an abstract Riemann surface R (U U D)/GR as in the proof of Theorem 1. Since R is planar, by the

classical uniformization theorem we find that there exists a conformal mapping of

R onto a

bounded domain in the complex plane. We denote by

R' the image of U/GR (which we may regard as R) by . Then aR' contains a compact analytic boundary arc b', the image of a free boundary arc b for GR . Each point of E is clearly removable for , thus can be extended to a conformal mapping of

~

to a bounded domain

which contains R' densely. Moreover, by Caratheodory theorem the

~,

FUCHSIAN GROUPS AND OPEN RIEMANN SURFACES

383

conformal mapping - 1 can be extended to a continuous mapping from

LS. Let 8' be a simply connected subregion in R' corresponding to D' n U, D' being a smaller disk in D such that aD' is orthogonal to b. Let 8 = - 1 (8') C ~. We note that 8 does not con~' U b' into

tain any point of E and that on a~. If p 1

I=

p2 , 8

as

terminates at some points p 1 and p 2

would contain an infinite number of points of E,

which contradicts with the above. Hence p 1

p 2 , but this is also im-

=

possible by Riesz-Lusin-Privaloff theorem. Consequently R must be of the type I. q.e.d. §3. Other classes of Riemann surfaces I)

The classes of Riemann surfaces we shall be concerned here are those

related implicitly with the compactification theory. For any positive integer n we denote by 0~ 0 the class of Riemann surfaces R such that dim HD(R)

T g such that the fiber above each

point in T g is the Riemann surface represented by that point [9]. In this paper, however, we shall have no need for the additional structure on X0 nor for the global construction of V. We shall only be interested in any small neighborhood T of o in T g and in purposes, TT: ~

-->

X=

TT-l(T).

For our

T is more conveniently constructed as the complete,

effectively parameterized deformation of X0 in the Kodaira-Spencer sense (13], [12], [14]. Since the tangent space to T g at o may be

GENERALIZED WEIERSTRASS POINTS AND RINGS

393

identified with H 1(X 0 , ®), where ® is the tangent sheaf to X 0

[5,

p. 131), TT: V .... T g is locally complete and effectively parameterized. So the constructions from [9) and [12) coincide locally. One can also prove this coincidence from the universal property in [9, Theorem 3.1, pp. 7-81 For x 0 f X0

,

let dn(x 0 ) be the maximal order of a zero at x 0 of an

h f f'(X 0 , tl(,!l)). Recall that Dn = dim f'(X 0 , tl(,!l)). Observe that since the singular points of a subvariety are nowhere dense and since the number of generalized Weierstrass points of order n is bounded in terms of g [4) the first condition on h in Theorem 2.1 below is the generic case. THEOREM 2.1. Let X 0 be a Riemann surface of aenus g > 2. Let TT: ~

->

T be the complete effectively parameterized deformation of X 0

Let x 0 £X 0

.

.

Fix n~1. Supposethat dn(x 0 ):2:Dn. Let G={Xf~,

x near x 0 1dn(x) = dn(x 0 )l. In case n;::: 2, dn(x 0 ) = 2n(g-1) and d 1 (x 0 ) = 2g-2, G coincides with G 1 = !xf~, x near x 0 ld 1 (x) = d 1 (x 0 )l. In

ail other cases, G is a submanifold of ~ of dimension 3g-3+Dn-dn(x0 ). TT: G .... T is a finite proper map. If there does not exist an h

with a zero of order dn(x 0 )

-

1 at x 0

,

f

f'(X 0 , tl(Kn))

then G is transverse to X 0

,

TT(G) is a submanifold of T and TT: G .... TT(G) is a biholomorphic map. If

there exists h f r(xo, tl(,!l)) with a zero of order dn(xo)- 1 at xo' then G is not transverse to X0 and TT(G) is sinaular or some points in TT(G) parameterize Riemann surfaces with more than one point x near x 0

with dn(x) = dn(x 0 ). Proof. We shall first consider the case n ;::: 2, dn(x 0 ) = 2n(g-1) and d 1 (x 0 ) = 2 g- 2 . By taking tens or products, we see that G 1 C G . Let (x denote the point bundle at x on X . Let -

denote equivalence of line

bundles. Then x f G if and only if ,!I - (;n(g-1). Then (K(;- 2 g)"- 0. Since d 1(x 0 ) = 2g- 2 , K(;- 2g - 0. Let K be the line bundle over X 0

which restricts to the canonical bundle on each fiber. By [3, Theorem II, p. 208) or [19, (4.7), p. 52), for each h f f'(X 0 , tl(K)), there exists

394

H

f

HENRY B. LAUFER

r(X:, 0, q 1 q2

f

W2 , and h

f

Mg such that h(Tt 1/J 1 )

=

f

W1 ,

1/J 2 , and similarly for t < 0.

We may assume by Corollary 2.6 that W1 and W2 contain ¢ 1 and ¢ 2 with simple zeroes, that ¢ 1 and ¢ 2 have closed horizontal trajectories in the homotopy classes a 1 and a 2 and nondividing closed vertical trajectories in the classes {3 1 and {3 2

Mg so that g({3 2 ) = {3 1 . Mapping by g, we may assume the vertical trajectories of ¢ 2 are in the class {3

.

Find g

f

{3 1 as well. Then ¢ 1 and ¢ 2 determine projective foliations a 1 = [F¢ 1 ] and a 2 = [F¢ 2 ] and -¢ 1 and -¢ 2 determine the same class {3 = [F]. By Proposition 3.2, rn r13 -n fixes two classes =

a1

of foliations [F1 n] and [G 1 n] and for particular representatives the

436

HOWARD MASUR

quadratic differentials ¢ 1n

=

[F2n) and [G 2n) and ¢ 2n

=

(F1n, F2n) _, ¢ 1 . Similarly r~/f"t fixes (F2n, G2n) _, ¢ 2 . Moreover, [F1n) and

[F2n] are attractive fixed points for rn r13 -n and rn r13 -n resp. in the a1

a2

sense of Proposition 3.2. Since the map p : Q _, PR 8 is continuous, [F1n]_,[F¢ 1 ], [F2n]->[F¢ 2 ] andboth [G 1n] and [G 2n]_,[F] as n->oo. By Proposition 2.5 there are neighborhoods V1 of [F¢ 1 ], V2 of [F¢ 2 ] and V3 of [F] in

:f

such that if [H 1 ] f V1 , [H 3 ] f V3 there

exist H 1 f[H 1] and H 3 f[H 3 ] suchthat (H 1 ,H 3)CW 1 . Similarlyfor [H 2 ] f V2 and [H 3] f V3 there exist H 2 and H 3 such that (H 2 , H 3)fW 2. Pick n large enough so that [F1n] f V1 , [F2n] f V2 and both [G 1n] and [G 2n] f V3 . Let U 1n C V1 , U 2n C V2 and U 3n C V3 be disjoint compact contractible neighborhoods in

:f

of [F1n] , [F2n] and both

[G 1n] and [G 2n] resp. Since [F1n] and [F2n] are attractive fixed

rn r13 -n resp., Approachable Approachable

a2

for positive k large enough,

k

and (r~ 1 rjt) (U 2n)CU 1n. Since [G 1n] and are repulsive and U 3n is a neighborhood of both, for large positive k n n -k n n -k (ra 1 rj3) (U 3n)CU 3n and (ra 2 rj3) (U 3n)CU 3n. L et gnk

=

n -n)k n -n)k ( ra//3 (ra 2 r/3 and hnk

=

n -n)k n -n)k (ra//3 (ra//3

Then

gnk(U 1n) C U 1n' g~~(U 3n) C U 3n' hnk(U 2n) C U 2n and h~~(U 3n) C U 3n · By the Brouwer fixed point theorem gnk has fixed points in U 1n and U 3n and hnk has fixed points in U 2n and U 3n. Proposition 2.5 and

3.1 imply there is a quadratic differential qnk in W1 whose orbit T t(qnk) is fixed by gnk. Similarly, there is a Tt(Ci';;k) is fixed by hnk. However, fnk

=

Ci;;k

f W2 whose orbit

(r~ 2 rj3n)k conjugates gnk and

hnk; in fact, mapping the fixed points of one to the fixed points of the other. Therefore, fnk(T tqnk)

=

Ts

Ci';;k.

There are two possibilities. The

first is if gnk and hnk have finite order and are conformal mappings preserving qnk and ~. Then the orbits are fixed pointwise and there exists t such that fnk Ttqnk

=

~. We may not be able to guarantee

both positive and negative t as n and k vary in this case. However,

DENSE GEODESICS IN MODULI SPACE

437

since Mg acts properly discontinuously [6], [10] on T g, there can only be finitely many n and k such that for all but finitely many n and k,

~k

~k

is conformal. This means that

and hnk are hyperbolic and act

as translates of the orbits. Here the numbers Ank of Proposition 3.2 are greater than one and in fact -.

oo

again by the discontinuity of Mg. For

each integer m, (hnk)m · fnk(qnk) is on the orbit of

&;k.

Composing

with (hnk)m has the effect of translating fnk(qnk) along the orbit. For each m then there is a t such that Tt((hnk)m · fnk(qnk)) = ~. By taking lml large enough we can insure t both positive and negative. The theorem is proved. UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS AT CHICAGO CIRCLE

REFERENCES [1]

[2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

L. V. Ahlfors, On Quasiconformal mappings, Journal D'Analyse Mathematique, 4(1954), 1-58. L. Bers, Quasiconformal mappings and Teichmiiller's theorem, in Analytic Functions. (R. Nevanlinna et al., eds. ), Princeton University Press, 1960. - - - - - , An extremal problem for quasiconformal mappings, Acta Math. 141: 1-2, 73-98 (1978). G. D. Birkhoff, Dynamical Systems, American Mathematical Society Colloquium Publications, 9 (1927). A. Douady and J. Hubbard, On the density of Strebel Differentials. Inventiones Math. 30 (1975), 175-179.

C. Earle and J. Eells, A fibre bundle description of Teichmiiller theory. J oumal of Diff. Geometry 3 (1969), 19-45. [7] G. Hedlund, The dynamics of geodesic flow, Bulls. AMS, 45(1939), 241-260. [8] J. Hubbard and H. Masur, Quadratic differentials and foliations, Acta Math. 142 (1979), 221-274. [9] H. Keynes and D. Newton, A Minimal non-uniquely ergodic interval exchange transformation. Math Z. 148(1976), 101-105. [10] S. Kravetz, On the geometry of Teichmiiller spaces and the structure of their modular groups, Ann. Acad. Sci. Fenn. 278(1959), 1-35. [11] H. Marcus, Unique ergodicity of the horocycle flow: Variable negative curvature case. Israel Journal of Math. 21 nos. 2-3 (1975), 133-144.

438

HOWARD MASUR

[12] H. Masur, The Jenkins Strebel differentials with one cylinder are dense, Comm. Math. Helv. 54(1979), 179-184. [13] K. Strebel, On Quadratic differentials and extremal quasi-conformal mappings, Univ. of Minnesota. Lecture Notes. (1967). [14] W. Thurston, On the geometry and dynamics of diffeomorphisms of surfaces, to appear. [15] A. Fathi et al., Travaux de Thurston sur les surfaces, Asterisque 66-67 Societe mathematique de France, 1979.

AUTOMORPHISMEN EBENER DISKONTINUIERLICHER GRUPPEN Gerhard Rosenberger

Einleitung A. Se i G = < s 1 , · · · , s m, a 1 , · · · , ap Is~ 1 = · · · = s;m [ap_ 1 , ap]

=

=

s 1 · · · s m [a 1 , a 2 ] · · ·

1 >, yi ::;, 2 sowie m ::;, 3 und m- 2 - . ~

1=1

t

> 0 falls p

=

0,

1

eine Fuchssche Gruppe mit kompaktem Fundamentalbereich. In [15] hat Zieschang gezeigt, class jeder Automorphismus von G induziert wird von einem Automorphismus der freien Gruppe vom Rang p + m (vgl. auch [17]). Hier erweitern und erganzen wir dies en Satz, indem wir unter anderem zeigen: Jeder Automorphismus von G wird induziert von einem Automorphismus der freien Gruppe vom Rang r, wobei r der Rang von G ist. Dies beinhaltet gleichzeitig einen neuen Beweis fiir den erwahnten Satz von Zieschang. B. Diese Arbeit verwendet die Terminologie und Bezeichnungsweise von [8] und [16], wobei < ... I .. ·> die Gruppenbeschreibung durch Erzeugende und Relationen bedeutet. Unter < a 1 , ···,am> verstehen wir die von a 1 , ... ,am erzeugte Gruppe. Wie in [8] und [16] gewinnen wir oft aus einem System lx 1 , ... , xn! durch freie Ubergange (NielsenTransformationen) ein neues und bezeichnen es mit denselben Symbolen. Es bedeute: [a, b].

=

aba- 1 b- 1 den Kommutator von a und b. (a, {3)

den grossten gemeinsamen Teiler von a, {3

f

N.

© 1980 Princeton University Press Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics Proceedings of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference 0-691-08264-2/80/000439-17$00.85/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000439-17$00.85/1 (paperback) For copying information, see copyright page 439

440

GERHARD ROSENBERGER

§1. Vorbemerkungen Sei G = H 1

* H2 A

freies Produkt der Gruppen H 1 und H 2 mit

Amalgam A= H 1 n H 2 . Ferner sei in G eine Ordnung und eine Lange L wie in [8] und [16] definiert. Die Ordnung geniige der Bedingung, class vor einem Produkt von Restklassenvertretern 11 .. · lm von A in den Hi nur endlich viele Produkte 11 .. · lm_ 1 1 liegen, wobei 1 ein Restklassenvertreter a us demselben Faktor Hi wie lm ist. Aus Satz 1 von [16] und Korollar 2 von [8] erhalten wir SATZ 1.1.

1st !xl' .. ·,xnlCG einendlichesSystem, soist !x 1 , .. ·,xnl frei aquivalent zu einem System !y 1 , · · ·, y n l, fiir das einer der folgenden

Faile vorliegt: (i)

q Ei Fiir jedes w f gibt es eine Darstellung w = TI Yv.'

i=1

Ei = ±1, Ei = Ei+ 1 falls vi= vi+ 1 mit L(yv)

1

:S L(w) fiir i = 1, ... ,q.

1

(ii)

q



EsgibteinProdukt a= TI Yv1., aid, Yv.fA(i=1, .. ·,q) und i~1

1

1

in einem Faktor Hi ein Element x ~A mit xax- 1 fA. (iii) Einige der Yi liegen in einer zu H 1 oder H 2 konjugierten

Untergruppe von G, nicht aile liegen in A, und ein Produkt in ihnen ist zu einem von 1 verschiedenen Element aus A konjugiert. BEMERKUNGEN:

1) Der freie Ubergang kann in endlich vielen Schritten so gewahlt werden, class !y 1 , ... ,ynl ktirzer ist als !x 1 , ... ,xnl oder die Langen der Elemente von ! x 1 , 2) 1st ! x 1 , (i): L(yi)

· · ·,

.. ·,

xn l erhalten bleiben.

xn l ein Erzeugendensystem von G , so folgt a us Fall

:S 1 ftir i = 1, ... , n.

Im weiteren benotigen wir noch die folgende, geringfiigige Verallgemeinerung von Satz 1 aus [6]: SATZ 1.2.

Sei H = , m ~ 2, yi

~

2. Sei

!x 1 , ... ,xnl C H(n · Sei !x 1 , · · ·, xp+m- 1 1 ein Erzeugendensystem von G. 1st x 1

13·

konjugiert zu einem sj J, so ist (/3j, Yj) = 1 nach Satz 2.1. 1st x 1

13·

konjugiert zu einem aj J , 1 S j S n , mit 1 S /3j < aj, /3j [aj , so ist /3j = 1 ebenfalls nach Satz 2.1. 1st m = 2 und y 1 = y 2 = 2, so ist x 1 nicht konjugiert zu einer Potenz von a , da sonst das freie Produkt * 1. Es ist m 2: 3 , denn ftir m = 2 erhalten wir mit Satz 1.1 und Satz 1.3 sofort einen freien Ubergang von lx 1 , · · ·, xp+ 1 ! zu einem System la 1 , · · ·, ap, y 1 1 (mit Hilfe von Satz 2.1 ergibt sich sofort, dass kein xi, 2

~

i

~

p+1, in

derselben zu H 2 konjugierten Untergruppe liegen kann wie x 1 ). Sei nun m > 3 . Das freie Produkt Y·

.

* * den Rang p + m- 2 hat. Mit derselben Begriindung kann es nach Satz 1.2 nicht sein, dass einige der xj (2 ~ j ~ p + m-1) in einer zu K 1 konjugierten Untergruppe von G liegen und ein Produkt in ihnen zu einem von 1 verschiedenen Element von B konjugiert ist. Da andererseits wieder eine

447

EBENER DISKONI'INUIERLICHER GRUPPEN

Situation (iii) von Satz 1.1 eintreten muss, liegt also Fall (c) von Korollar 1.5 vor; d.h. es gibt einen freien Ubergang von lx 1 ,

... ,

xp+m- 1 1 zu einem

System lx 1 ,z 2 , .. ·,zm_ 1 ,za 1 z- 1 , .. ·,zapz- 1 1, z cG. Dieswiderspricht aber unserer Annahme. Also gilt Behauptung (2.5). Dam it konnen wir xm_ 1+i = ai, i = 1, · · ·, p, annehmen. Wir betrachten wieder die alte Faktorisierung G = H 1 * H 2 und verkiirzen A

lx 1 , ... ,xm_ 1 ,a 1 , ... ,apl bzgl. dieser Faktorisierung. Tritt eine Situation (iii) von Satz 1.1 ein, an der einige der xi, 1

S i S m-1,

beteiligt sind, so tritt-analog wie bei (2.5)-einer der

folgenden Falle ein: (2.8): Es ist m ungerade, y 1

= .. · = Ym

= 2, und es gibt einen freien

Ubergang von l x 1 , · · ·, xm_ 1 , a 1 , · · ·, ap I zu einem system

l zs 1 s 2 z - 1 , .. ·,zs 1 smz-

1 ,a , .. ·,ap, I 1

Zf

G.

(2.9): Es ist m gerade, alle Yj gleich zwei his auf eines, das ungerade ist, und es gibt einen freien Ubergang von lx 1 , ... ,xm_ 1 ,a 1 , ... ,apl zu einem System ly 1 , ... ,ym_ 2 ,za 0 z- 1 ,a 1 , ... ,apl, ::;.1, z 3 werdenin [S] gegeben. 2) Fur p = 0, m = 3 gilt eine Aussage wie in Korollar 2.11 im allgemeinen nicht (vgl. [2] und [10]). Hier sind die Erzeugendenpaare durch Satz 4 von [10] gegeben. SATZ 2.12. Sei p = 0, m ;:> 4 und Rang (G)= m-2. Dann gibt es genau

eine Nielsen-Aquivalenz-Klasse minimaler Erzeugendensysteme. 2 =sY=s ···S =1> m>4 Konkreter: Sei G=(sk) = cksj Jck_ 1 , ck j d1, ... , ml, so ist Yk = Yj und

l3j

f

G,

= ±1 (mod Yj ). Nun folgt fiir p = 0,

m > 4 und r(G) = m-1 die Aussage von (3.1) aus Korollar 2.11. 5) Sei nun m:;:: 3, p = 0 und r(G) = m -2. Dann folgt die Aussage

von (3.1) unmittelbar aus Satz 2.12. q.e.d. BEMERKUNG. Fiir .}1 + Y~ + .}3 > 1 falls m = 3 ist G endlich, und die Aussage von Satz 3.1 ist im allgemeinen nicht richtig. 1st

..!.

Y1

+

..!. Y2

+

falls m = 3, so ist die Aussage von Satz 3.1 richtig. In [2] und [10] benotigten wir aus beweistechnischen Grunden die Voraussetzung

l

Y1

+ .!._ + l < 1 falls m = 3 . Y2 Y3

ABTEILUNG MATHEMATIK DER UNIVERSITAT DORTMUND POSTFACH 50 05 00 4600 DORTMUND 50

..!. =

Y3

1

EBENER DISKONTINUIERLICHER GRUPPEN

455

LITERATUR

[1]

Automorphisms of the Fuchsian groups of type R.N. Kalia, G. Rosenberger, (0; 2,2,2,q; 0). Comm. in Alg. (6) 11 (1978),

[2]

A. W. Knapp,

Doubly generated Fuchs ian groups. Mich. Math.

[3]

W. A. D. N.

Combinatorial group theory. New York: Wiley 1966.

1115-1129.

[4] [5] [6] [7]

Magnus, Karrass, Solitar, Peczyns ki,

15 (1968), 289-304.

J.

Eine Kennzeichnung der Relationen der Fundamentalgruppe einer nicht-orientierbaren Flache. Diplomarbeit, Bochum 1972. Uber Erzeugendensysteme von Fuchsschen Gruppen. N. Peczynski, Dissertation, Bochum 1975. Uber Erzeugende ebener diskontinuierlicher Gruppen. N. Peczynski, G. Rosenberger, lnventiones math. 29(1975), 161-180. H. Zieschang, The isomorphism problem for one-relator groups with S. J. Pride, torsion ist solvable. Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 227

(1977), 109-139.

[8] [9]

G. Rosenberger,

Zum Rang- und Isomorphieproblem fur freie Produkte mit Amalgam. Habilitationsschrift, Hamburg 1974. - - - - - - - · Zum Isomorphieproblem fur Gruppen mit einer definierenden Relation. Ill. J. Math. 20 (1976),

614-621 [10] ________ , Von Untergruppen der Triangel-Gruppen. Ill. J. Math. 22 (1978), 404-413. [11] · - - - - - - · Uber Gruppen mit einer definierenden Relation. Math. z. 155 (1977), 71-77. [12] - - - - - - · Alternierende Produkte in freien Gruppen. Pacific J. Math. 78 (1978), 243-250. [13] G. Rosenberger, Eine Bemerkung zu den Nielsen-Transformationen. Mh. Math. 83 (1977), 43-56. F. Tessun [14] 0. Schreier, Uber die Gruppen Aa Bb = 1 . Abh. Math. Sem. Univ. Ham b. 3 (1924 ), 167-169. [15] H. Zieschang, Uber Automorphismen ebener diskontinuierlicher Gruppen. Math. Ann. 166 (1966 ), 148-167. [16] , Uber die Nielsensche Kurzungsmethode in freien Produkten mit Amalgam. lnventiones math. 10(1970), 4-37. [17] H. Zieschang, Flachen und ebene diskontinuierliche Gruppen. E. Vogt, Lecture N.otes in Math. 122, Springer 1970. H.-D. Coldewey,

REMARKS ON THE GEOMETRY OF THE SIEGEL MODULAR GROUP Robert I.

J. Sibner

Introduction

1.1. Thinking of a torus T (with modulus r) as the quotient of the universal cover C by the group of translations

! L 1 , Lrl where Laz

=

z +a,

the various types of conjugate holomorphic involutions of T can be obtained as projections of involutions of C as follows: (i) If Re r reflect C in the line y

= r /2

=

0,

. The quotient surface is orientable and has

two boundary components (i.e. a cylinder). (ii) Again for Re r translate by Ly, and reflect in y

= r /2.

=

0,

The quotient surface is a Klein

bottle-compact and non-orientable. (iii) For Re r translate by Ly, and reflect in y

=

=

~, one can again

r /2 . Now one obtains a non-orientable

surface with one boundary component (a Moebius band). Note that a Moebius band can also be obtained for lrl = 1 by reflecting in the line through the origin and the point r . Given the above information, Bers once observed that lrl Re r

=

=

1 and

~ are the defining conditions for the boundary of the standard fun-

damental domain of the elliptic modular group and that Re r

=

0 is an

axis of symmetry. This paper is an attempt to make precise this observation and to obtain a corresponding statement about the period matrices for surfaces of arbitrary genus.

© 1980 Princeton University Press Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics Proceedings of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference 0-691-08264-2/80/000457-07$00.50/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000457-07$00.50/1 (paperback) For copying information, see copyright page

457

458

ROBERT J. SIBNER

1.2. We define an involution J of the Siegel generalized half plane and show that any period matrix of a surface conformally equivalent to its conjugate is equivalent (modulo the Siegel modular group) to its image under

J . Moreover, the Siegel fundamenta 1 domain F is invariant under the action of J , as are the various types of boundary sets. An extended modular group is formed by adjoining ] to the Siegel modular group and a fundamental domain is obtained for this group. We show that every surface which is conformally equivalent to its conjugate

has a period matrix located on the boundary of this fundamental domain. A symmetric Riemann surface is a surface which admits a conjugate holomorphic involution and as such is conformally equivalent to its conjugate. More precise information on the location of symmetric surfaces has been obtained and will appear in [2]. II. The modular group 2.1. We denote by Hg the Siegel (generalized) half plane [3] consisting of g x g complex matrices Z

=

X+ iY with Y positive definite. The

group of (holomorphic) automorphisms of Hg is the symplectic group Sp (g, R), whose elements have the form

with real g x g matrices A , B , C , and D satisfying MTMt = T where

and

2.2. A fundamental domain D for a group G acting discontinuously on Hg is the closure of an open connected subset of Hg with the following two properties: (i) D contains a point in every G-equivalence class and (ii) no two points in the interior of D are equivalent by a non-trivial ele-

ment of G.

459

GEOMETRY OF THE SIEGEL MODULAR GROUP

As is well known, the Siegel modular group (of degree g) 1

=

Sp (g, Z)

C Sp (g, R), consisting of symplectic transformations with matrix coeffi-

cients A , B , C , and D having rational integral entries, acts discontinuously on Hg and has a fundamental domain F which we now describe

[3]. Denoting by IIWII the absolute value of the determinant of a matrix W, and by L 1 [W], ... , Lq [W] the homogeneous linear functions of the elements of W which arise in the Minkowski theory of reduction of quadratic forms, the Siegel fundamental domain F is the set of all Z < Hg satisfying (a) IICZ+DII2: 1 for all modular transformations Z-> (AZ+B)(CZ+Dr 1 (b) Lr[y-l] :;> 0 (c)

-21

~ by ii) above. Let such an interval define the annulus A in question, so that x fA C N(y) and log (dy) varies through

""2~

in A , by construction.

vi) Since A C N(y), diameter A and diameter y A< 8 by i) and Corollary 2. vii) Since dy "" 1/Ar 2 on N(y) and thus on A, variation

logdy-2~ on A impliesmodulus A-~(logr 22 /r 1 2 =2~ iff log r 2 /r 1 =~ ). Similarly yA has radii dr 1 e 2 ~ and dr 2 (for some d) because we know dy on A. Thus the modulus of yA is

log

Now we pass from the sphere to the plane. LEMMA 4. If e

is an absolutely continuous isomorphism of the plane

(relative to Lebesgue measure) carrying B to B', then a subset A C B with a proportion TJ of area is carried to a subset e(A)

=

A' C B' of pro-

portion at least TJ' of area where TJ' = 1-d(1-TJ) and d is the maximum ratio of area distortion at various points of B. Proof. By an affine scaling we can assume area B = 1, the low value of area distortion is 1, and the high value is d. The worst case occurs when 1 occurs on all of A and d occurs on all of the complement of A. Then, LEMMA 5.

TJ' = area A'/area B' = TJITJ+d(1-TJ) ~ 1-d(1-TJ).

Let X be a set in the plane of positive measure and let TJ

and ~ be given positive numbers. Consider sectorial boxes of shape ~,

Then there is a 8 > 0 and a subset X' of X of positive measure so that each box of shape ~ and diameter < 8 containing a point of X' also contains at least the proportion TJ of X.

474

DENNIS SULLIVAN

Proof. The class of sectorial boxes of shape 1'1 are generated by simi-

larity transformations from one of them. Thus Lebesgue's theorem concerning density points is true using these instead of round disks. (See

E. Stein "Singular Integrals ... " pp. 11, 12.) So for almost all x there is a largest positive portion of X in boxes containing x of diameter

ox ox

is a positive measurable function which has to be greater

than some

o> 0

on a set X'C X of positive measure. This proves the

lemma. Now consider a conformal transformation of the plane ad- be= 1,

c,£0

and sectorial boxes BL'1 of shape 1'1 < rr/2 centered at -d/c. LEMMA 6. If A C BL'1 is any subset with the proportion 71 of area, then the variation on A of the real and imaginary parts of log y'z

is at least

21'1(1- e 21'1(1-71)). Proof.

i) On a unit square the function (x, y) -. x has variation at least

71' on any subset whose proportion of area is at least 71'. ii) Introduce the variable ee

=

z +d/c so that the variation of

1log y'z = log - = -2 log (Z+d/c) + constant on A C BL'1 is just the (cz+d) 2 variation of -2e on a corresponding subset A' of a square in the t-plane of side 1'1 .

logy '(z)

-2 {; + constant

c

475

THE ERGODIC THEORY AT INFINITY

iii) The ratio of area distortion of exp at different points of the

e 2 ~. By Lemma 4 the proportion of A'= exp- 1 (A) in the square is at least r/ = 1-e 2 ~(1-7]).

square is at most

iv) Applying i) the result follows. Now we are ready to prove the nonexistence of invariant measurable line fields for groups of finite solid angle. i)

Choose a small number, rr/2 > ~ > 0 and a set of positive measure

X in the plane where the hypothetical invariant line field varies only in

~~ . ii) Choose 0 < 7] < 1 so that 1- e 2 ~(1- 77 + e 2 ~(1-7])) > 1/2. iii) Find X'C X of positive measure satisfying a o'> 0 uniform

an interval of inclinations of length

density relative to X, 7J, and sectorial boxes of shape ~ (as in Lemma 5). iv) Choose a point of density of X' and stereographically project the action of [' on the plane to a sphere resting on this point. v)

Let Y denote the intersection of X' with a ball B' about this

point sufficiently small so that the distortion of stereographic projection on 2B is as close to 1 as we need for the following. Let

o = min (o',

radius B'). vi) Relative to

o, ~

and Y (put Y on the sphere) find the element

y and the concentric annulus A satisfying Lemma 3 (and put A back on

the plane). In A choose a sectorial box B of shape

- ~ containing x

and centered at the pole of y (possible because we know the variation of log dy on A). vii) Since the diameters of B' and y B' are less than

o'

(even o)

they each contain the proportion 7J (at least) of X . (x 0 on

orbit of some smaller ball. Now consider the identity

The right-hand side is uniformly bounded wrt N. The left-hand side is at least e I gy(yp) as N

r

-+ "".

We conclude that "B = P77 8 or 1T 8 (y)

Thus almost all paths starting at y hit

r

B when

l

yfr

gy(yp)

=

= oo.

dJ.Lx ii) For fixed s 0 and x 0 the function of x, d-- (s 0 ) is a

llxo

P-harmonic function (Lemma 2), whose boundary values are + oo at s 0

1.

481

THE ERGODIC THEORY AT INFINITY

and zero at other points of the sphere. One sees by a standard limiting procedure [K] that gx(y)

~(s 0 )

is the corresponding Green's density for

the random walk conditioned so that the limit at

oo

is s 0 . By Fubini's

theorem and i) for almost all s 0 , almost all paths starting at y and conditioned to end up at s 0 must also hit [' B . Now if for one of these s 0

!

yen 2 . ' ' ,-......,. ,-......,.

Note that if Rk,oQk,j and Qk,lQk, 2 are members of a subsequence with coinciding limit, then R 0 must be arbitrarily close to A(yk), and

-..

so [R 1 R 2 [ must go to zero. Hence we assume that vk,j --> 0. (Recall

,--....

,-......,.

that by the choice of subsequences l Qk 1 Rk 1 ! and l Qk 2Rk 1 !, every remaining k will be represented in the respective subsequences lvk 1 ! I

I

I

1

'

or lvk 2 !, both with limit zero.) ' Consider the arrangement of the isometric circles l(y) and I(y- 1 ) and the axis A(y) of the hyperbolic transformation y(z) = az +db. Compucz+ tations show that the distance D between either endpoint of the axis of y and the nearer of the endpoints of the isometric circles under the axis

1- - _E_, of y satisfies D > -·- [ckl 2[ck[

E

> 0, where

E--.

0 as the length of

the geodesic determined by y goes to infinity. Hence, if any subsequence of l [ck[ l remains bounded, len I :::; M, then, for lkl > K, Dk ;=:

[c1k 1 - 21 ~k/>0,

e>O, and

Dk2:~{1-~)>0

for lki>K. ByLemma2,

503

ON INFINITE NIELSEN KERNELS

as k

--+ - oo,

~j)

vk,j (ordinate of the intersection point Qk,j of A(y) and

must go to zero. Since Dk;:::

h(1- ~) , Qk,j

,.--........

cannot collapse to

Wk 1.. Hence for iki > K, the arc Wk 1-Qk 1-Vk 1. (a side of the fundamen' ,,, ~ tal polygon) must be contained in l(y)(I(y- 1 )). But then Wk hQk h Vk h, ' ' ' hI= j, must be an arc outside I(yk 1 )(I(yk)), which is tangent to and outside a circle of radius

h centered at least ,--......

~

(1- V units away from

,--......

Wk,i. Since y is conformal, and Rk, 0 Qk,j, Qk,jRk, 1 are distinct, the image of ak,j , atj with vertex Qk,h also must go to zero, and hence vk h

,--......

0. Then Qk 1 Qk 2 must approach the x axis, with small ' ' ' Euclidean length. This clearly cannot be done via a sequence of convex --+

fundamental polygons. Hence {len II must be unbounded.

,.--........

We now must consider a sequence of transformations {ykl where the radii of I(y) and I(y- 1 ) become arbitrarily small. Suppose {Wk,jQk,jVk)

!w;----

has a subsequence which remains inside or on the isometric circle I(yt 1 ). Since -1 1 .... 0, ckl

'

1.Qk 1-Vk 1-1 must collapse to a point, and ' '

Vk 1. and hence Vk h must be arbitrarily close to points on {A(y)nRI. ·~ ' +1 ~ If {Wk 1-Qk 1-Vk 1-1 remains outside (or on) I(yk ), then {Wk hQk hvk hi '

,

,

+l

'

,

,

must be inside (resp. on) I(yk ) and the same argument holds. The corresponding situation exists for the neighboring y (by the remark following

-..

Lemma 2). A computation then shows that IR 1 R 2 1 must go to zero. WELLESLEY COLLEGE WELLESLEY, MASS. 02181

REFERENCES

[1] Bers, L., Nielsen Extensions of Riemann Surfaces, Ann. Acad. Sci. Fenn., 2 (1976), 17-22. [2] Keen, L., Canonical polygons for finitely generated Fuchs ian Groups, Acta Math., 115 (1966), 1-16. [3] , Intrinsic Moduli on Riemann Surfaces, Ann. of Math., 84 (1966), 404-416. [4] Meschkowski, H., Noneuclidean Geometry, Academic Press, New York, 1964.

HYPERBOLIC 3-MANIFOLDS WHICH SHARE A FUNDAMENTAL POLYHEDRON Norbert J. Wielenberg*

1. Introduction Let G be a discrete, torsion-free subgroup of PSL(2, C). Then the quotient under the action of G of the region of discontinuity of G in the closure of hyperbolic 3-space is a 3-manifold, possibly with boundary. The boundary is U(G)/G where U(G) is the ordinary set of G in C U

Iool.

Marden [2] has discussed group constructions which topological-

ly consist of gluing two boundary components of the same or of different 3-manifolds. This is of particular interest if each component of each lift of a boundary component is a euclidean disc. Geometrically the constructions then consist of gluing totally geodesic surfaces which are incompressible and boundary-parallel in the 3-manifolds. Algebraically, the group constructions are free products with amalgamation or HNN extensions. See [8] for link groups constructed in this way and Thurston [6] for more general examples. As corollaries of the theorems of Gromov and JI!Srgensen, the following results are given in [6]. The set of volumes of hyperbolic 3-manifolds is well ordered. The volume is a finite-to-one function of hyperbolic manifolds with finite volume.

Research supported in part by the National Science Foundation.

© 1980 Princeton University Press Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics Proceedi~s of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference 0-691-08264-2/80/000505-09$00.50/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000505-09$00.50/1 (paperback) For copying information, see copyright page 505

506

NORBERT J. WIELENBERG We will discuss some groups which are constructed by HNN extensions

and which justify the following. THEOREM. For each integer N, there is a polyhedron of finite volume

·in hyperbolic 3-space which is a fundamental polyhedron for at least N different 3-manifolds. In our examples, the corresponding groups are subgroups of finite index in the Picard group PSL (2, Z(i)).

2. Hyperbolic isometries As a model for the simply-connected hyperbolic 3-space we will use H3

c

=lz+tj:j=(0,0,1) and t>Ol. TheRiemannianmetricis

2(dx 2 + dy 2 + dt 2 ) and the volume element is dV = C 3 (dx dy dt). The

operation of inversion in the sphere of radius 1 with center at the origin can be written as z + tj -.. (z + tj)* where

z+ tj(z+tJ')* = lz+tjl2 This is an isometry of H 3 . For c < C, we can define an orthogonal transformation Tc of R2 by T c(z) = - (c/c)z. An orthogonal transformation of R2 extends in an obvious way to an orthogonal transformation of R3 which is an isometry of H 3 , i.e., leave the t-coordinate unchanged. We remark that if A(z) = az + b with ad- be = 1 , then an elementary calculation shows that cz + d A(z) = e.+ c

2 T (z + 9..)* (..1..) lei c c

We then extend A to act on H 3 by (1)

A(z + tj)

e. + c

2 T lz + tj + 9..) * (..1..) lc I c\: c

This is an isometry of H 3 and the group of all orientation preserving

507

HYPERBOLIC 3-MANIFOLDS

isometries of H 3 can be identified with PSL (2, C), where A corresponds to

±(: :)

and

A~l

The circle where lcz +dl we have isometric spheres

=

to

±(~:

~~).

1 is called the isometric circle of A. So

lz+tj+~l

_!_ and lz+tj~~l

=

lei

and A~l. When c is real, note that Tc(z) tion in the plane x

=

=

=

_!_ for A

lei

~z, that is Tc is reflec-

0. Recall that a parabolic, elliptic, or hyperbolic

transformation can be conjugated into PSL (2, R). We obtain the action of A on H 3 as discussed by Riley in [4]. It is possible to read off from the matrix of A how the points of the two isometric spheres are paired by A and A~l.

If c

t

0, then by (1) A consists of the composition of inversion in

the isometric sphere of A, reflection in a plane through ~ ~ and perpendicular to the line between

~ ~ and ~, a rotation leaving ~ ~ fixed

(possibly the identity), and translation of the isometric sphere of A to the isometric sphere of A~l. The reflection and rotation can be combined into a reflection in a plane through ~ ~ and perpendicular to the complex plane. Note that if A is parabolic, the isometric spheres are tangent at the fixed point. If A is hyperbolic, they are disjoint. If A is elliptic, they intersect in a circle. If A is loxodromic, the isometric spheres may be disjoint, tangent, or intersecting.

3. Some link groups If the volume of H 3 /G is finite, then H 3 /G is homeomorphic to N~e where N is a closed 3-manifold and

e

=

C 1 U ... U Cn where each Ci is

homeomorphic to S 1 . (See [7] or Thurston [6].) The fundamental group of S3 ~

e is

called a link group. We refer to Riley [5] for a discussion of

representations of link groups in PSL (2, C). In particular, an antiisomorphism between a discrete finite-volume subgroup of PSL(2, C) and a link group implies that the link complement is homeomorphic to the corresponding quotient space.

508

NORBERT

J. WIELENBERG

By a cusp torus we mean a set homeomorphic to lz: 0< lzl < 11 x S 1 . Cusp tori occur in H 3 /G as deleted neighborhoods of the components of a link [2] and correspond to conjugacy classes of rank two parabolic subgroups of G. The number of cusp tori in H 3 /G is equal to the number of cycles of parabolic fixed points on the boundary of a Poincare region or Ford domain for a finite-volume group. We refer to Maskit [3] for a discussion of fundamental polyhedra for discrete isometry groups of H 3 . Let M(G) = (H 3 U O(G))/G. Recall that a surface S in a 3-manifold M is incompressible if the inclusion S ... M induces an injection of fundamental groups,

11 1

(S) ...

11 1

(M).

It follows from Fine [1] that the Picard group is generated by

v =

(_~ ~)

w =

(~ ~)

0

The group G 1 generated by t 4 = t 4 , u 2 = u 2 and v is a free product G 1 = < t 4 , u 2 , v; t 4 u 2 =u 2 t 4 >. aM(G 1 ) has two components, each a 3-punctured sphere. These components are covered by euclidean discs stabilized by fuchsian subgroups of G 1 , e.g.,

(See Figure 1 which shows the isometric circles of v and v- 1 and the generators of F 1 and F 2 and lines paired by t 4 and u 2 . Imagine hemispheres over the circles and half-planes perpendicular to C along the lines.) Let Ii be the hemisphere over the disk ~i preserved by F i. Then I/Fi is incompressible, totally geodesic, and parallel to ~/Fi. We

509

HYPERBOLIC 3-MANIFOLDS

2

Fig. 1

can glue 2 1 /F1 to 2 2 /F2 by adding a generator s such that sF2 s- 1 = F 1 and s takes the outside of 2 2 to the inside of 1 1 . By Seifert-Van Kampen the result G is an HNN extension of G 1 , G = < G 1 ,s; sF2 s- 1 = F 1 >. It was shown in [8] that if s is parabolic, then H 3 /G = S 3 - B where B is the Borromean rings. The surface 2/F i occurs in

s3 -

B as a

twice-punctured open disc which spans a component of the link (Figure 2(a)). The group presentation reduces by Tietze transformations to

(a)

(b) Fig. 2

(c)

510

NORBERT J, WIELENBERG

A loxodromic s , which can be thought of as a parabolic transforma-

tion followed by a 180° rotation, gives a half-integer twist of a spanning disc. The result is the link in Figure 2(b). (See also Thurston (6], Section 6.8.) The group presentation in this case reduces to -1 ] [ -1 -1 ] 1 .

Fig. 3

The fundamental polyhedron for both groups is shown in Figure 3. It lies above the hemispheres indicated by circles and between the portions of vertical planes indicated by lines. A third group also shares this polyhedron. It is discussed in detail in (8]. The link complement is shown in Figure 2(c) and can be obtained from 2(b) by a twist along a different spanning disc. It is now fairly clear how to proceed to obtain examples which illustrate

our theorem. Start with a large fundamental polyhedron as indicated in Figure 4(a). The resulting 3-manifold M has an even number of 3-punctured spheres as boundary components. The boundary-parallel, totally geodesic surfaces in M can be glued in many different ways with parabolic and loxodromic transformations. The only requirement is that the additional generators conjugate the fuchsian groups which stabilize the corresponding hemispheres and interchange inside and outside of the hemispheres.

511

HYPERBOLIC 3-MANIFOLDS

• • • (a)

(b) Fig, 4

If we use all parabolic generators to get a cyclic n-fold covering of the Borromean rings in the obvious way, we obtain a link complement like the one in Figure 5. The point at the center indicates a component of the link which can be thought of as a straight line perpendicular to the plane

u -a •

Fig. 5

512

NORBERT]. WIELENBERG

of the paper and passing through

oo.

If one of the parabolic generators is

replaced by a loxodromic, the result is a half-integer twist along a twicepunctured spanning disk. The link complements in Figure 6 can be obtained, for example.

(a)

(c)

(b) Fig. 6

In particular, the groups indicated by Figure 4(b) can give link complements with 6, 7, 8, or 9 cusp tori. The fundamental polyhedron is the same for each of these groups but the groups are clearly not isomorphic. An arbitrarily large number of non-isomorphic groups can be seen to share a fundamental polyhedron in this -way. The following considerations show that these groups are subgroups of the Picard group. Form the composition of inversion in a hemisphere of radius 1 and reflection in a vertical plane parallel to x

=

0 through the

center of the hemisphere. Following this with translation two units to the right gives a parabolic, translation two units up gives a loxodromic. The centers of the isometric spheres of v, v- 1 , w, w- 1 are at 1, -1, i, -i and the spheres all have radius 1. By conjugation by translations, we can move these centers to any point m + ni where m and n are integers. The index of each group in the Picard group is given by the ratio of the volume of its polyhedron to the volume of a fundamental polyhedron for the Picard group. The Borromean rings are of index 24. UNIVERSITY OF WISCONSIN -PARKSIDE KENOSHA, WISCONSIN 53141

HYPERBOLIC 3-MANIFOLDS

513

BIBLIOGRAPHY [1] B. Fine, The structure of PSL(2, R); R, the ring of integers in a euclidean quadratic imaginary number field, Discontinuous Groups and Riemann Surfaces, ed. L. Greenberg, Ann. of Math. Studies 79, 1974. [2] A. Marden, Geometrically finite kleinian groups and their deformation spaces, Discrete Groups and Automorphic Functions, ed. W. J. Harvey, Academic Press, 1977. [3] B. Maskit, On Poincare's theorem for fundamental polygons, Adv. in Math. 7(1971), 219-230. [4] R. Riley, A quadratic parabolic group, Math. Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc. 77(1975), 281-288. [5] , Discrete parabolic representations of link groups, Mathematika 22 (1975), 141-150. [6] W. P. Thurston, The Geometry and Topology of 3-Manifolds, lectures at Princeton University, 1977-78. [7] N. Wielenberg, Discrete Moebius groups: Fundamental polyhedra and convergence, Amer. Jour. of Math. 99(1977), 861-877. [8] , The structure of certain subgroups of the Picard group, Math. Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc., to appear.

THE LENGTH SPECTRUM AS MODULI FOR COMPACT RIEMANN SURFACES Scott Wolpert* The purpose of this note is to announce results concerning a moduli problem. A complete description will appear elsewhere, [1]. Denote the Teichmiiller space for compact Riemann surfaces of genus g, g 2: 2 as T g. A point IS l of T g is the equivalence class of a pair, a Riemann surface S and the homotopy class of a homeomorphism from a base surface S 0 to S. Let Mg be the extended Teichmiiller modular group. A point of T g/Mg is the conformal and anticonformal equivalence class of a Riemann surface. Let ~(S) be the set of free homotopy classes of closed curves on S. The marking homeomorphism of

l Sl

< T g is used to identify

rr 1 (S 0 ) (resp. ~ =~(S 0 )) and rr 1 (S) (resp. ~(S)). Each element [y] of ~(S) contains a unique Poincare geodesic; denote by [y](S) the length

of this geodesic. Let 1 be the group of deck transformations for the covering of S by the upper half plane. It was noted by Fricke Klein that the information I ([y], [y ](S)) I [y] < ~ l determines 1 modulo conjugation by PGL(2; R) and S modulo Mg. Later it was asked if the set (with multiplicities) of numbers l[y ](S) I [y] < ~ l determines 1 modulo conjugation. We emphasize in the former case one is provided with considerable

*Partially

supported by National Science Foundation Grant #MCS75-07403-A03.

© 1980 Princeton University Press Riemann Surfaces and Related Topics Proceedings of the 1978 Stony Brook Conference 0-691-08264-2/80/000515-03 $00.50/1 (cloth) 0-691-08267-7/80/000515-03 $00.50/1 (paperback) For copying information, see copyright page 515

SCOTT WOLPERT

516

topological data and in the latter case no topological information is given. The set l[y ](S) I [y] £ S: I will be called the length spectrum of S and denoted Lsp (S). We have obtained the following result. THEOREM 1. A real analytic subvariety Vg of T g is defined. Let IRI, ISI£Tg besuchthat Lsp(R)=Lsp(S). Theneither IRI=ISI mod Mg or IRI. lSI

f

Vg.

The argument involves the theory of amalgamation of Fuchsian groups. Criterion are developed to identify [y 1 ], ···, [yp] £ S: as specific classes from knowledge (only) of the graphs of the functions [y 1 ](S), ···, [yp](S),

S £ T g.

Our argument involves the following results.

LEMMA 2. Let f: R

-->

S be a K quasiconformal map and y a closed

curve on R. Denote by f (resp. f ') the length of the Poincare geodesic freely homotopic to y (resp. f(y) ). Then

A deformation is a continuous map of [0, 1) into T g. LEMMA 3. Let [y 1 ], · · ·, [y p]

f

S: be primitive. Then [y 1 ], · ·~, [yp] are

simple and disjoint if and only if there exists a deformation St with

[y)

0 ·is determined. Then -p(log [y] (S)) < [a] (S) + c for all

§ ( T g. A deformation st is determined such that [y] (St) [a] (St) 'S -p (log [y] (St)) + c .

.... 0 and

A characterization of the first eigenvalue of the (Poincare) Laplace Beltrami operator is also required. A recent result of M. F. Vigneras establishes that Vg is not empty for certain choices of the genus g, [2]. REFERENCES [1] S. Wolpert, The length spectrum as moduli for compact Riemann surfaces, Annals of Math., 109 (1979), 323-351. [2] M. F. Vigneras, Exemples de sous-groupes discrets non conjugues de PSL(2, R) qui ont meme fonction zeta de Selberg, C. R. Acad. Sc. Paris, t. 287, 1978.

Library of Congress Cataloging in Publication Data

Riemann surfaces and related topics: proceedings of the 1978 Stony Brook conference. 1. Riemann surfaces-Congresses. II. Maskit, Bernard. III. Title. QA333.C593 1978 515'.223 ISBN 0-691-08264-2

I.

Kra, Irwin.

79-27823

11111111111111111111111111

9 780691 082677